Lecture Notes on Mobile Communication

A Curriculum Development Cell Project Under QIP, IIT Guwahati
Dr. Abhijit Mitra
Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering
Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati
Guwahati – 781039, India
November 2009
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Preface
It’s been many years that I’m teaching the subject “Mobile Communication”
(EC632) to the IIT Guwahati students and the current lecture notes intend to act
as a supplement to that course so that our students can have an access to this
course anytime. This course is mainly aimed toward senior year students of the
ECE discipline, and in particular, for the final year BTech, first year MTech and
PhD students. However, this does not necessarily imply that any other discipline
students can not study this course. Rather, they also should delve deeper into
this course since mobile communication is a familiar term to everyone nowadays.
Although the communication aspects of this subject depends on the fundamentals of
another interesting subject, communication engineering, I would strongly advocate
the engineering students to go through the same in order to grow up adequate
interest in this field. In fact, the present lecture notes are designed in such a way
that even a non-ECE student also would get certain basic notions of this subject.
The entire lecture notes are broadly divided into 8 chapters, which, I consider to
be most rudimentary topics to know the basics of this subject. The advance level
topics are avoided intensionally so as to give space to the possibility of developing
another lecture note in that area. In fact, this area is so vast and changing so fast
over time, there is no limit of discussing the advanced level topics. The current focus
has been therefore to deal with those main topics which would give a senior student
sufficient exposure to this field to carry out further study and/or research. Initially,
after dealing with the introductory concepts (i.e., what is mobile communication,
how a mobile call is made etc) and the evolution of mobile communication systems till
the present day status, the cellular engineering fundamentals are discussed at length
to make the students realize the importance of the practical engineering aspects of
this subject. Next, the different kinds of mobile communication channels is taken
up and large scale path loss model as well as small scale fading effects are dealt,
both with simulation and statistical approaches. To enhance the link performance
amidst the adverse channel conditions, the transmitter and receiver techniques are
i
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
discussed next. It is further extended with three main signal processing techniques
at the receiver, namely, equalization, diversity and channel coding. Finally, different
kinds of multiple access techniques are covered at length with the emphasis on how
several mobile communication techniques evolve via this. It should also be mentioned
that many figures in the lecture notes have been adopted from some standard text
books to keep the easy flow of the understanding of the topics.
During the process of developing the lecture notes, I have received kind helps
from my friends, colleagues as well as my post graduate and doctoral students which
I must acknowledge at the onset. I’m fortunate to have a group of energetic students
who have helped me a lot. It is for them only I could finish this project, albeit a
bit late. My sincere acknowledgment should also go to my parents and my younger
brother who have nicely reciprocated my oblivion nature by their nourishing and
generous attitude toward me since my childhood.
Finally, about the satisfaction of the author. In general, an author becomes
happy if he/she sees that his/her creation could instill certain sparks in the reader’s
mind. The same is true for me too. Once Bertrand Russell said “Science may set
limits to knowledge, but should not set limits to imagination”. If the readers can
visualize the continuously changing technology in this field after reading this lecture
notes and also can dream about a future career in the same, I’ll consider my en-
deavor to be successful. My best wishes to all the readers.
Abhijit Mitra
November 2009
ii
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Contents
1 Introductory Concepts 1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Evolution of Mobile Radio Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Present Day Mobile Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4 Fundamental Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4.1 Radio Transmission Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 How a Mobile Call is Actually Made? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5.1 Cellular Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5.2 Operational Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.5.3 Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.6 Future Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.7 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2 Modern Wireless Communication Systems 11
2.1 1G: First Generation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 2G: Second Generation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1 TDMA/FDD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.2 CDMA/FDD Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.3 2.5G Mobile Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.3 3G: Third Generation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.1 3G Standards and Access Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.2 3G W-CDMA (UMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.3 3G CDMA2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.4 3G TD-SCDMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4 Wireless Transmission Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
iii
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
2.4.1 Wireless Local Loop (WLL) and LMDS . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.2 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.3 Wireless Local Area Networks (W-LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.4.4 WiMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4.5 Zigbee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4.6 Wibree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.5 Conclusion: Beyond 3G Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3 The Cellular Engineering Fundamentals 23
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2 What is a Cell? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3 Frequency Reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.4 Channel Assignment Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4.1 Fixed Channel Assignment (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4.2 Dynamic Channel Assignment (DCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.5 Handoff Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.5.1 Factors Influencing Handoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.5.2 Handoffs In Different Generations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.5.3 Handoff Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.5.4 A Few Practical Problems in Handoff Scenario . . . . . . . . 33
3.6 Interference & System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.6.1 Co-channel interference (CCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.6.2 Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.7 Enhancing Capacity And Cell Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.7.1 The Key Trade-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.7.2 Cell-Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.3 Sectoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.7.4 Microcell Zone Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.8 Trunked Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.9 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
iv
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
4 Free Space Radio Wave Propagation 54
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.2 Free Space Propagation Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.3 Basic Methods of Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3.1 Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3.2 Diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.3.3 Scattering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.4 Two Ray Reflection Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.5 Diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.5.1 Knife-Edge Diffraction Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.5.2 Fresnel Zones: the Concept of Diffraction Loss . . . . . . . . 66
4.5.3 Knife-edge diffraction model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.6 Link Budget Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.6.1 Log-distance Path Loss Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.6.2 Log Normal Shadowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.7 Outdoor Propagation Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.7.1 Okumura Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.7.2 Hata Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.8 Indoor Propagation Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.8.1 Partition Losses Inside a Floor (Intra-floor) . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.8.2 Partition Losses Between Floors (Inter-floor) . . . . . . . . . 73
4.8.3 Log-distance Path Loss Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.10 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5 Multipath Wave Propagation and Fading 75
5.1 Multipath Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.2 Multipath & Small-Scale Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.2.1 Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.2.2 Multipath Fading Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.2.3 Factors Influencing Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.3 Types of Small-Scale Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.3.1 Fading Effects due to Multipath Time Delay Spread . . . . . 77
v
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
5.3.2 Fading Effects due to Doppler Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.3.3 Doppler Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.3.4 Impulse Response Model of a Multipath Channel . . . . . . . 80
5.3.5 Relation Between Bandwidth and Received Power . . . . . . 82
5.3.6 Linear Time Varying Channels (LTV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.3.7 Small-Scale Multipath Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.4 Multipath Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.4.1 Time Dispersion Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.4.2 Frequency Dispersion Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.5 Statistical models for multipath propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.5.1 NLoS Propagation: Rayleigh Fading Model . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.5.2 LoS Propagation: Rician Fading Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.5.3 Generalized Model: Nakagami Distribution . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.5.4 Second Order Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.6 Simulation of Rayleigh Fading Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.6.1 Clarke’s Model: without Doppler Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.6.2 Clarke and Gans’ Model: with Doppler Effect . . . . . . . . . 96
5.6.3 Rayleigh Simulator with Wide Range of Channel Conditions 97
5.6.4 Two-Ray Rayleigh Faded Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.6.5 Saleh and Valenzuela Indoor Statistical Model . . . . . . . . 98
5.6.6 SIRCIM/SMRCIM Indoor/Outdoor Statistical Models . . . . 98
5.7 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6 Transmitter and Receiver Techniques 101
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.2 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.2.1 Choice of Modulation Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.2.2 Advantages of Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.2.3 Linear and Non-linear Modulation Techniques . . . . . . . . . 103
6.2.4 Amplitude and Angle Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.2.5 Analog and Digital Modulation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.3 Signal Space Representation of Digitally Modulated Signals . . . . . 104
vi
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.4 Complex Representation of Linear Modulated Signals and Band Pass
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.5 Linear Modulation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.5.1 Amplitude Modulation (DSBSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.5.2 BPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5.3 QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5.4 Offset-QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.5.5 π/4 DQPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.6 Line Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.7 Pulse Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.7.1 Nyquist pulse shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.7.2 Raised Cosine Roll-Off Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.7.3 Realization of Pulse Shaping Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.8 Nonlinear Modulation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.8.1 Angle Modulation (FM and PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.8.2 BFSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.9 GMSK Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.10 GMSK Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.11 Two Practical Issues of Concern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.11.1 Inter Channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.11.2 Power Amplifier Nonlinearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.12 Receiver performance in multipath channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.12.1 Bit Error Rate and Symbol Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.13 Example of a Multicarrier Modulation: OFDM . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.13.1 Orthogonality of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.13.2 Mathematical Description of OFDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.14 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.15 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7 Techniques to Mitigate Fading Effects 129
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.2 Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.2.1 A Mathematical Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
vii
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
7.2.2 Zero Forcing Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.3 A Generic Adaptive Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.4 Choice of Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization . . . . . . . . 134
7.3 Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.3.1 Different Types of Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.4 Channel Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.4.1 Shannon’s Channel Capacity Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.4.2 Block Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.4.3 Convolutional Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.4.4 Concatenated Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.5 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8 Multiple Access Techniques 157
8.1 Multiple Access Techniques for Wireless Communication . . . . . . . 157
8.1.1 Narrowband Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.1.2 Wideband Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.2 Frequency Division Multiple Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.2.1 FDMA/FDD in AMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.2.2 FDMA/TDD in CT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.2.3 FDMA and Near-Far Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.3 Time Division Multiple Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.3.1 TDMA/FDD in GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.3.2 TDMA/TDD in DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.4 Spread Spectrum Multiple Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.4.1 Frequency Hopped Multiple Access (FHMA) . . . . . . . . . 163
8.4.2 Code Division Multiple Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.4.3 CDMA and Self-interference Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.4.4 CDMA and Near-Far Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.4.5 Hybrid Spread Spectrum Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.5 Space Division Multiple Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.6 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.7 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
viii
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
List of Figures
1.1 The worldwide mobile subscriber chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Basic mobile communication structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 The basic radio transmission techniques: (a) simplex, (b) half duplex
and (c) full duplex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 (a) Frequency division duplexing and (b) time division duplexing. . . 6
1.5 Basic Cellular Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1 Data transmission with Bluetooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.1 Footprint of cells showing the overlaps and gaps. . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2 Frequency reuse technique of a cellular system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.3 Handoff scenario at two adjacent cell boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4 Handoff process associated with power levels, when the user is going
from i-th cell to j-th cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.5 Handoff process with a rectangular cell inclined at an angle θ. . . . . 31
3.6 First tier of co-channel interfering cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.7 Splitting of congested seven-cell clusters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.8 A cell divided into three 120
o
sectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.9 A seven-cell cluster with 60
o
sectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.10 The micro-cell zone concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.11 The bufferless J-channel trunked radio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.12 Discrete-time Markov chain for the M/M/J/J trunked radio system. 49
4.1 Free space propagation model, showing the near and far fields. . . . 55
4.2 Two-ray reflection model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.3 Phasor diagram of electric fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ix
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
4.4 Equivalent phasor diagram of Figure 4.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.5 Huygen’s secondary wavelets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.6 Diffraction through a sharp edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.7 Fresnel zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.8 Knife-edge Diffraction Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.1 Illustration of Doppler effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2 A generic transmitted pulsed RF signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.3 Relationship among different channel functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.4 Direct RF pulsed channel IR measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.5 Frequency domain channel IR measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.6 Two ray NLoS multipath, resulting in Rayleigh fading. . . . . . . . . 91
5.7 Rayleigh probability density function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.8 Ricean probability density function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.9 Nakagami probability density function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.10 Schematic representation of level crossing with a Rayleigh fading en-
velope at 10 Hz Doppler spread. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.11 Clarke and Gan’s model for Rayleigh fading generation using quadra-
ture amplitude modulation with (a) RF Doppler filter, and, (b) base-
band Doppler filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.12 Rayleigh fading model to get both the flat and frequency selective
channel conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.13 Two-ray Rayleigh fading model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.1 BPSK signal constellation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.2 QPSK signal constellation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.3 QPSK transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.4 DQPSK constellation diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.5 Scematic of the line coding techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.6 Rectangular Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.7 Raised Cosine Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.8 Phase tree of 1101000 CPFSK sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.9 Spectrum of MSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
x
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.10 GMSK generation scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.11 A simple GMSK receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.12 Spectrum of GMSK scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.13 OFDM Transmitter and Receiver Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.1 A general framework of fading effects and their mitigation techniques. 130
7.2 A generic adaptive equalizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.3 Receiver selection diversity, with M receivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.4 Maximal ratio combining technique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.5 RAKE receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.6 A convolutional encoder with n=2 and k=1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.7 State diagram representation of a convolutional encoder. . . . . . . . 153
7.8 Tree diagram representation of a convolutional encoder. . . . . . . . 154
7.9 Trellis diagram of a convolutional encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
7.10 Block diagram of a turbo encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.1 The basic concept of FDMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.2 The basic concept of TDMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.3 The basic concept of CDMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
xi
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
List of Tables
2.1 Main WCDMA parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1 Finite field elements for US-CDPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.1 MA techniques in different wireless communication systems . . . . . 158
xii
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 1
Introductory Concepts
1.1 Introduction
Communication is one of the integral parts of science that has always been a focus
point for exchanging information among parties at locations physically apart. After
its discovery, telephones have replaced the telegrams and letters. Similarly, the term
‘mobile’ has completely revolutionized the communication by opening up innovative
applications that are limited to one’s imagination. Today, mobile communication
has become the backbone of the society. All the mobile system technologies have
improved the way of living. Its main plus point is that it has privileged a common
mass of society. In this chapter, the evolution as well as the fundamental techniques
of the mobile communication is discussed.
1.2 Evolution of Mobile Radio Communications
The first wireline telephone system was introduced in the year 1877. Mobile com-
munication systems as early as 1934 were based on Amplitude Modulation (AM)
schemes and only certain public organizations maintained such systems. With the
demand for newer and better mobile radio communication systems during the World
War II and the development of Frequency Modulation (FM) technique by Edwin
Armstrong, the mobile radio communication systems began to witness many new
changes. Mobile telephone was introduced in the year 1946. However, during its
initial three and a half decades it found very less market penetration owing to high
1
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 1.1: The worldwide mobile subscriber chart.
costs and numerous technological drawbacks. But with the development of the cel-
lular concept in the 1960s at the Bell Laboratories, mobile communications began to
be a promising field of expanse which could serve wider populations. Initially, mobile
communication was restricted to certain official users and the cellular concept was
never even dreamt of being made commercially available. Moreover, even the growth
in the cellular networks was very slow. However, with the development of newer and
better technologies starting from the 1970s and with the mobile users now connected
to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), there has been an astronomical
growth in the cellular radio and the personal communication systems. Advanced
Mobile Phone System (AMPS) was the first U.S. cellular telephone system and it
was deployed in 1983. Wireless services have since then been experiencing a 50%
per year growth rate. The number of cellular telephone users grew from 25000 in
1984 to around 3 billion in the year 2007 and the demand rate is increasing day by
day. A schematic of the subscribers is shown in Fig. 1.1.
2
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 1.2: Basic mobile communication structure.
1.3 Present Day Mobile Communication
Since the time of wireless telegraphy, radio communication has been used extensively.
Our society has been looking for acquiring mobility in communication since then.
Initially the mobile communication was limited between one pair of users on single
channel pair. The range of mobility was defined by the transmitter power, type of
antenna used and the frequency of operation. With the increase in the number of
users, accommodating them within the limited available frequency spectrum became
a major problem. To resolve this problem, the concept of cellular communication
was evolved. The present day cellular communication uses a basic unit called cell.
Each cell consists of small hexagonal area with a base station located at the center
of the cell which communicates with the user. To accommodate multiple users
Time Division multiple Access (TDMA), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA),
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) and their hybrids are used. Numerous
mobile radio standards have been deployed at various places such as AMPS, PACS,
3
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 1.3: The basic radio transmission techniques: (a) simplex, (b) half duplex
and (c) full duplex.
GSM, NTT, PHS and IS-95, each utilizing different set of frequencies and allocating
different number of users and channels.
1.4 Fundamental Techniques
By definition, mobile radio terminal means any radio terminal that could be moved
during its operation. Depending on the radio channel, there can be three differ-
ent types of mobile communication. In general, however, a Mobile Station (MS)
or subscriber unit communicates to a fixed Base Station (BS) which in turn com-
municates to the desired user at the other end. The MS consists of transceiver,
control circuitry, duplexer and an antenna while the BS consists of transceiver and
channel multiplexer along with antennas mounted on the tower. The BS are also
linked to a power source for the transmission of the radio signals for communication
and are connected to a fixed backbone network. Figure 1.2 shows a basic mobile
communication with low power transmitters/receivers at the BS, the MS and also
4
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The MSC is sometimes also called Mobile Tele-
phone Switching Office (MTSO). The radio signals emitted by the BS decay as the
signals travel away from it. A minimum amount of signal strength is needed in
order to be detected by the mobile stations or mobile sets which are the hand-held
personal units (portables) or those installed in the vehicles (mobiles). The region
over which the signal strength lies above such a threshold value is known as the
coverage area of a BS. The fixed backbone network is a wired network that links all
the base stations and also the landline and other telephone networks through wires.
1.4.1 Radio Transmission Techniques
Based on the type of channels being utilized, mobile radio transmission systems may
be classified as the following three categories which is also shown in Fig. 1.3:
• Simplex System: Simplex systems utilize simplex channels i.e., the commu-
nication is unidirectional. The first user can communicate with the second
user. However, the second user cannot communicate with the first user. One
example of such a system is a pager.
• Half Duplex System: Half duplex radio systems that use half duplex radio
channels allow for non-simultaneous bidirectional communication. The first
user can communicate with the second user but the second user can commu-
nicate to the first user only after the first user has finished his conversation.
At a time, the user can only transmit or receive information. A walkie-talkie
is an example of a half duplex system which uses ‘push to talk’ and ‘release to
listen’ type of switches.
• Full Duplex System: Full duplex systems allow two way simultaneous com-
munications. Both the users can communicate to each other simultaneously.
This can be done by providing two simultaneous but separate channels to both
the users. This is possible by one of the two following methods.
– Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD): FDD supports two-way radio
communication by using two distinct radio channels. One frequency chan-
nel is transmitted downstream from the BS to the MS (forward channel).
5
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 1.4: (a) Frequency division duplexing and (b) time division duplexing.
A second frequency is used in the upstream direction and supports trans-
mission from the MS to the BS (reverse channel). Because of the pairing of
frequencies, simultaneous transmission in both directions is possible. To
mitigate self-interference between upstream and downstream transmis-
sions, a minimum amount of frequency separation must be maintained
between the frequency pair, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
– Time Division Duplexing (TDD): TDD uses a single frequency band
to transmit signals in both the downstream and upstream directions.
TDD operates by toggling transmission directions over a time interval.
This toggling takes place very rapidly and is imperceptible to the user.
A full duplex mobile system can further be subdivided into two category: a
single MS for a dedicated BS, and many MS for a single BS. Cordless telephone
systems are full duplex communication systems that use radio to connect to a
portable handset to a single dedicated BS, which is then connected to a dedi-
cated telephone line with a specific telephone number on the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN). A mobile system, in general, on the other hand,
is the example of the second category of a full duplex mobile system where
many users connect among themselves via a single BS.
6
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 1.5: Basic Cellular Structure.
1.5 How a Mobile Call is Actually Made?
In order to know how a mobile call is made, we should first look into the basics of
cellular concept and main operational channels involved in making a call. These are
given below.
1.5.1 Cellular Concept
Cellular telephone systems must accommodate a large number of users over a large
geographic area with limited frequency spectrum, i.e., with limited number of chan-
nels. If a single transmitter/ receiver is used with only a single base station, then
sufficient amount of power may not be present at a huge distance from the BS.
For a large geographic coverage area, a high powered transmitter therefore has to
be used. But a high power radio transmitter causes harm to environment. Mobile
communication thus calls for replacing the high power transmitters by low power
transmitters by dividing the coverage area into small segments, called cells. Each
cell uses a certain number of the available channels and a group of adjacent cells
together use all the available channels. Such a group is called a cluster. This cluster
can repeat itself and hence the same set of channels can be used again and again.
Each cell has a low power transmitter with a coverage area equal to the area of the
7
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
cell. This technique of substituting a single high powered transmitter by several low
powered transmitters to support many users is the backbone of the cellular concept.
1.5.2 Operational Channels
In each cell, there are four types of channels that take active part during a mobile
call. These are:
• Forward Voice Channel (FVC): This channel is used for the voice trans-
mission from the BS to the MS.
• Reverse Voice Channel (RVC): This is used for the voice transmission
from the MS to the BS.
• Forward Control Channel (FCC): Control channels are generally used
for controlling the activity of the call, i.e., they are used for setting up calls
and to divert the call to unused voice channels. Hence these are also called
setup channels. These channels transmit and receive call initiation and service
request messages. The FCC is used for control signaling purpose from the BS
to MS.
• Reverse Control Channel (RCC): This is used for the call control purpose
from the MS to the BS. Control channels are usually monitored by mobiles.
1.5.3 Making a Call
When a mobile is idle, i.e., it is not experiencing the process of a call, then it searches
all the FCCs to determine the one with the highest signal strength. The mobile
then monitors this particular FCC. However, when the signal strength falls below
a particular threshold that is insufficient for a call to take place, the mobile again
searches all the FCCs for the one with the highest signal strength. For a particular
country or continent, the control channels will be the same. So all mobiles in that
country or continent will search among the same set of control channels. However,
when a mobile moves to a different country or continent, then the control channels
for that particular location will be different and hence the mobile will not work.
Each mobile has a mobile identification number (MIN). When a user wants to
make a call, he sends a call request to the MSC on the reverse control channel. He
8
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
also sends the MIN of the person to whom the call has to be made. The MSC then
sends this MIN to all the base stations. The base station transmits this MIN and all
the mobiles within the coverage area of that base station receive the MIN and match
it with their own. If the MIN matches with a particular MS, that mobile sends an
acknowledgment to the BS. The BS then informs the MSC that the mobile is within
its coverage area. The MSC then instructs the base station to access specific unused
voice channel pair. The base station then sends a message to the mobile to move to
the particular channels and it also sends a signal to the mobile for ringing.
In order to maintain the quality of the call, the MSC adjusts the transmitted
power of the mobile which is usually expressed in dB or dBm. When a mobile moves
from the coverage area of one base station to the coverage area of another base sta-
tion i.e., from one cell to another cell, then the signal strength of the initial base
station may not be sufficient to continue the call in progress. So the call has to be
transferred to the other base station. This is called handoff. In such cases, in order
to maintain the call, the MSC transfers the call to one of the unused voice channels
of the new base station or it transfers the control of the current voice channels to
the new base station.
Ex. 1: Suppose a mobile unit transmits 10 W power at a certain place. Express this
power in terms of dBm.
Solution: Usually, 1 mW power developed over a 100 Ω load is equivalently called
0 dBm power. 1 W is equivalent to 0 dB, i.e., 10 log
10
(1W) = 0dB. Thus,
1W = 10
3
mW = 30dBm = 0dB. This means, xdB = (x + 30)dBm. Hence,
10W = 10 log
10
(10W) = 10dB = 40dBm.
Ex. 2: Among a pager, a cordless phone and a mobile phone, which device would
have the (i) shortest, and, (ii) longest battery life? Justify.
Solution: The ‘pager’ would have the longest and the ‘mobile phone’ would have the
shortest battery life. (justification is left on the readers)
9
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
1.6 Future Trends
Tremendous changes are occurring in the area of mobile radio communications, so
much so that the mobile phone of yesterday is rapidly turning into a sophisticated
mobile device capable of more applications than PCs were capable of only a few
years ago. Rapid development of the Internet with its new services and applications
has created fresh challenges for the further development of mobile communication
systems. Further enhancements in modulation schemes will soon increase the In-
ternet access rates on the mobile from current 1.8 Mbps to greater than 10 Mbps.
Bluetooth is rapidly becoming a common feature in mobiles for local connections.
The mobile communication has provided global connectivity to the people at
a lower cost due to advances in the technology and also because of the growing
competition among the service providers. We would review certain major features
as well as standards of the mobile communication till the present day technology in
the next chapter.
1.7 References
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
2. K. Feher, Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum
Applications. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. J. G. Proakis, Digital Communications, 4th ed. NY: McGraw Hill, 2000.
10
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 2
Modern Wireless
Communication Systems
At the initial phase, mobile communication was restricted to certain official users and
the cellular concept was never even dreamt of being made commercially available.
Moreover, even the growth in the cellular networks was very slow. However, with
the development of newer and better technologies starting from the 1970s and with
the mobile users now connected to the PSTN, there has been a remarkable growth
in the cellular radio. However, the spread of mobile communication was very fast
in the 1990s when the government throughout the world provided radio spectrum
licenses for Personal Communication Service (PCS) in 1.8 - 2 GHz frequency band.
2.1 1G: First Generation Networks
The first mobile phone system in the market was AMPS. It was the first U.S. cellular
telephone system, deployed in Chicago in 1983. The main technology of this first
generation mobile system was FDMA/FDD and analog FM.
2.2 2G: Second Generation Networks
Digital modulation formats were introduced in this generation with the main tech-
nology as TDMA/FDD and CDMA/FDD. The 2G systems introduced three popular
TDMA standards and one popular CDMA standard in the market. These are as
11
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
follows:
2.2.1 TDMA/FDD Standards
(a) Global System for Mobile (GSM): The GSM standard, introduced by Groupe
Special Mobile, was aimed at designing a uniform pan-European mobile system. It
was the first fully digital system utilizing the 900 MHz frequency band. The initial
GSM had 200 KHz radio channels, 8 full-rate or 16 half-rate TDMA channels per
carrier, encryption of speech, low speed data services and support for SMS for which
it gained quick popularity.
(b) Interim Standard 136 (IS-136): It was popularly known as North American
Digital Cellular (NADC) system. In this system, there were 3 full-rate TDMA users
over each 30 KHz channel. The need of this system was mainly to increase the
capacity over the earlier analog (AMPS) system.
(c) Pacific Digital Cellular (PDC): This standard was developed as the counter-
part of NADC in Japan. The main advantage of this standard was its low transmis-
sion bit rate which led to its better spectrum utilization.
2.2.2 CDMA/FDD Standard
Interim Standard 95 (IS-95): The IS-95 standard, also popularly known as CDMA-
One, uses 64 orthogonally coded users and codewords are transmitted simultaneously
on each of 1.25 MHz channels. Certain services that have been standardized as a
part of IS-95 standard are: short messaging service, slotted paging, over-the-air
activation (meaning the mobile can be activated by the service provider without
any third party intervention), enhanced mobile station identities etc.
2.2.3 2.5G Mobile Networks
In an effort to retrofit the 2G standards for compatibility with increased throughput
rates to support modern Internet application, the new data centric standards were
developed to be overlaid on 2G standards and this is known as 2.5G standard.
Here, the main upgradation techniques are:
• supporting higher data rate transmission for web browsing
12
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
• supporting e-mail traffic
• enabling location-based mobile service
2.5G networks also brought into the market some popular application, a few of
which are: Wireless Application Protocol (WAP), General Packet Radio Service
(GPRS), High Speed Circuit Switched Dada (HSCSD), Enhanced Data rates for
GSM Evolution (EDGE) etc.
2.3 3G: Third Generation Networks
3G is the third generation of mobile phone standards and technology, supersed-
ing 2.5G. It is based on the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) family
of standards under the International Mobile Telecommunications-2000 (IMT-2000).
ITU launched IMT-2000 program, which, together with the main industry and stan-
dardization bodies worldwide, targets to implement a global frequency band that
would support a single, ubiquitous wireless communication standard for all coun-
tries,to provide the framework for the definition of the 3G mobile systems.Several
radio access technologies have been accepted by ITU as part of the IMT-2000 frame-
work.
3G networks enable network operators to offer users a wider range of more ad-
vanced services while achieving greater network capacity through improved spectral
efficiency. Services include wide-area wireless voice telephony, video calls, and broad-
band wireless data, all in a mobile environment. Additional features also include
HSPA data transmission capabilities able to deliver speeds up to 14.4Mbit/s on the
down link and 5.8Mbit/s on the uplink.
3G networks are wide area cellular telephone networks which evolved to incor-
porate high-speed internet access and video telephony. IMT-2000 defines a set of
technical requirements for the realization of such targets, which can be summarized
as follows:
• high data rates: 144 kbps in all environments and 2 Mbps in low-mobility and
indoor environments
• symmetrical and asymmetrical data transmission
13
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
• circuit-switched and packet-switched-based services
• speech quality comparable to wire-line quality
• improved spectral efficiency
• several simultaneous services to end users for multimedia services
• seamless incorporation of second-generation cellular systems
• global roaming
• open architecture for the rapid introduction of new services and technology.
2.3.1 3G Standards and Access Technologies
As mentioned before, there are several different radio access technologies defined
within ITU, based on either CDMA or TDMA technology. An organization called
3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) has continued that work by defining a
mobile system that fulfills the IMT-2000 standard. This system is called Universal
Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS). After trying to establish a single 3G
standard, ITU finally approved a family of five 3G standards, which are part of the
3G framework known as IMT-2000:
• W-CDMA
• CDMA2000
• TD-SCDMA
Europe, Japan, and Asia have agreed upon a 3G standard called the Universal
Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), which is WCDMA operating at 2.1
GHz. UMTS and WCDMA are often used as synonyms. In the USA and other
parts of America, WCDMA will have to use another part of the radio spectrum.
2.3.2 3G W-CDMA (UMTS)
WCDMA is based on DS-CDMA (direct sequencecode division multiple access) tech-
nology in which user-information bits are spread over a wide bandwidth (much
larger than the information signal bandwidth) by multiplying the user data with
14
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
the spreading code. The chip (symbol rate) rate of the spreading sequence is 3.84
Mcps, which, in the WCDMA system deployment is used together with the 5-MHz
carrier spacing. The processing gain term refers to the relationship between the
signal bandwidth and the information bandwidth. Thus, the name wideband is
derived to differentiate it from the 2G CDMA (IS-95), which has a chip rate of
1.2288 Mcps. In a CDMA system, all users are active at the same time on the same
frequency and are separated from each other with the use of user specific spreading
codes.
The wide carrier bandwidth of WCDMA allows supporting high user-data rates
and also has certain performance benefits, such as increased multipath diversity.
The actual carrier spacing to be used by the operator may vary on a 200-kHz grid
between approximately 4.4 and 5 MHz, depending on spectrum arrangement and
the interference situation.
In WCDMA each user is allocated frames of 10 ms duration, during which the
user-data rate is kept constant. However, the data rate among the users can change
from frame to frame. This fast radio capacity allocation (or the limits for variation in
the uplink) is controlled and coordinated by the radio resource management (RRM)
functions in the network to achieve optimum throughput for packet data services
and to ensure sufficient quality of service (QoS) for circuit-switched users. WCDMA
supports two basic modes of operation: FDD and TDD. In the FDD mode, separate
5-MHz carrier frequencies with duplex spacing are used for the uplink and downlink,
respectively, whereas in TDD only one 5-MHz carrier is time shared between the up-
link and the downlink. WCDMA uses coherent detection based on the pilot symbols
and/or common pilot. WCDMA allows many performance- enhancement methods
to be used, such as transmit diversity or advanced CDMA receiver concepts.Table
summaries the main WCDMA parameters.
The support for handovers (HO) between GSM and WCDMA is part of the first
standard version. This means that all multi-mode WCDMA/GSM terminals will
support measurements from the one system while camped on the other one. This
allows networks using both WCDMA and GSM to balance the load between the
networks and base the HO on actual measurements from the terminals for different
radio conditions in addition to other criteria available.
15
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Table 2.1: Main WCDMA parameters
Multiple access method DS-CDMA
Duplexing method Frequency division duplex/time division
duplex
Base station synchronisation Asynchronous operation
Chip rate 3.84 Mcps
Frame length 10 ms
Service multiplexing Multiple services with different quality of
service requirements multiplexed on one
connection
Multi-rate concept Variable spreading factor and multicode
Detection Coherent using pilot symbols or common
pilot
Multi-user detection, smart antennas Supported by the standard, optional in the
implementation
The world’s first commercial W-CDMA service, FoMA, was launched by NTT
DoCoMo in Japan in 2001. FoMA is the short name for Freedom of Mobile Mul-
timedia Access, is the brand name for the 3G services being offered by Japanese
mobile phone operator NTT DoCoMo. Elsewhere, W-CDMA deployments have
been exclusively UMTS based.
UMTS or W-CDMA, assures backward compatibility with the second generation
GSM, IS-136 and PDC TDMA technologies, as well as all 2.5G TDMA technologies.
The network structure and bit level packaging of GSM data is retained by W-CDMA,
with additional capacity and bandwidth provided by a new CDMA air interface.
2.3.3 3G CDMA2000
Code division multiple access 2000 is the natural evolution of IS-95 (cdmaOne). It
includes additional functionality that increases its spectral efficiency and data rate
capability.(code division multiple access) is a mobile digital radio technology where
channels are defined with codes (PN sequences). CDMA permits many simultaneous
transmitters on the same frequency channel. Since more phones can be served by
16
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
fewer cell sites, CDMA-based standards have a significant economic advantage over
TDMA- or FDMA-based standards. This standard is being developed by Telecom-
munications Industry Association (TIA) of US and is is standardized by 3GPP2.
The main CDMA2000 standards are: CDMA2000 1xRTT,CDMA2000 1xEV and
CDMA2000 EV-DV. These are the approved radio interfaces for the ITU’s IMT-2000
standard. In the following, a brief discussion about all these standards is given.
CDMA2000 1xRTT: RTT stands for Radio Transmission Technology and the
designation ”1x”, meaning ”1 times Radio Transmission Technology”, indicates the
same RF bandwidth as IS-95.The main features of CDMA2000 1X are as follows:
• Supports an instantaneous data rate upto 307kpbs for a user in packet mode
and a typical throughput rates of 144kbps per user,depending on the number
of user, the velociy of user and the propagating conditions.
• Supports up to twice as many voice users a the 2G CDMA standard
• Provides the subscriber unit with upto two times the standby time for longer
lasting battery life.
CDMA2000 EV: This is an evolutionary advancement of CDMA with the
following characteristics:
• Provides CDMA carriers with the option of installing radio channels with data
only (CDMA2000 EV-DO) and with data and voice (CDMA2000 EV-DV) .
• The cdma2000 1xEV-DO supports greater than 2.4Mbps of instantaneous
high-speed packet throughput per user on a CDMA channel, although the
user data rates are much lower and highly dependent on other factors.
• CDMA2000 EV-DV can offer data rates upto 144kbps with about twice as
many voice channels as IS-95B.
CDMA2000 3x is (also known as EV-DO Rev B) is a multi-carrier evolution.
• It has higher rates per carrier (up to 4.9 Mbit/s on the downlink per carrier).
Typical deployments are expected to include 3 carriers for a peak rate of 14.7
Mbit/s.Higher rates are possible by bundling multiple channels together. It
17
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
enhances the user experience and enables new services such as high definition
video streaming.
• Uses statistical multiplexing across channels to further reduce latency, en-
hancing the experience for latency-sensitive services such as gaming, video
telephony, remote console sessions and web browsing.
• It provides increased talk-time and standby time.
• The interference from the adjacent sectors is reduced by hybrid frequency re-
use and improves the rates that can be offered, especially to users at the edge
of the cell.
• It has efficient support for services that have asymmetric download and upload
requirements (i.e. different data rates required in each direction) such as file
transfers, web browsing, and broadband multimedia content delivery.
2.3.4 3G TD-SCDMA
Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, or TD-SCDMA, is a
3G mobile telecommunications standard, being pursued in the People’s Republic of
China by the Chinese Academy of Telecommunications Technology (CATT). This
proposal was adopted by ITU as one of the 3G options in late 1999. TD-SCDMA is
based on spread spectrum technology.
TD-SCDMA uses TDD, in contrast to the FDD scheme used by W-CDMA.
By dynamically adjusting the number of timeslots used for downlink and uplink,
the system can more easily accommodate asymmetric traffic with different data
rate requirements on downlink and uplink than FDD schemes. Since it does not
require paired spectrum for downlink and uplink, spectrum allocation flexibility is
also increased. Also, using the same carrier frequency for uplink and downlink means
that the channel condition is the same on both directions, and the base station can
deduce the downlink channel information from uplink channel estimates, which is
helpful to the application of beamforming techniques.
TD-SCDMA also uses TDMA in addition to the CDMA used in WCDMA. This
reduces the number of users in each timeslot, which reduces the implementation
18
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
complexity of multiuser detection and beamforming schemes, but the non-continuous
transmission also reduces coverage (because of the higher peak power needed), mo-
bility (because of lower power control frequency) and complicates radio resource
management algorithms.
The ”S” in TD-SCDMA stands for ”synchronous”, which means that uplink sig-
nals are synchronized at the base station receiver, achieved by continuous timing
adjustments. This reduces the interference between users of the same timeslot using
different codes by improving the orthogonality between the codes, therefore increas-
ing system capacity, at the cost of some hardware complexity in achieving uplink
synchronization.
2.4 Wireless Transmission Protocols
There are several transmission protocols in wireless manner to achieve different
application oriented tasks. Below, some of these applications are given.
2.4.1 Wireless Local Loop (WLL) and LMDS
Microwave wireless links can be used to create a wireless local loop. The local loop
can be thought of as the ”last mile” of the telecommunication network that resides
between the central office (CO) and the individual homes and business in close
proximity to the CO. An advantage of WLL technology is that once the wireless
equipment is paid for, there are no additional costs for transport between the CO
and the customer premises equipment. Many new services have been proposed and
this includes the concept of Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), which
provides broadband telecommunication access in the local exchange.
2.4.2 Bluetooth
• Facilitates ad-hoc data transmission over short distances from fixed and mobile
devices as shown in Figure 2.1
• Uses a radio technology called frequency hopping spread spectrum. It chops up
the data being sent and transmits chunks of it on up to 79 different frequencies.
19
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 2.1: Data transmission with Bluetooth.
In its basic mode, the modulation is Gaussian frequency shift keying (GFSK).
It can achieve a gross data rate of 1 Mb/s
• Primarily designed for low power consumption, with a short range (power-
class-dependent: 1 meter, 10 meters, 100 meters) based on low-cost transceiver
microchips in each device
2.4.3 Wireless Local Area Networks (W-LAN)
• IEEE 802.11 WLAN uses ISM band (5.275-5.825GHz)
• Uses 11Mcps DS-SS spreading and 2Mbps user data rates (will fallback to
1Mbps in noisy conditions)
• IEEE 802.11a stndard provides upto 54Mbps throughput in the 5GHz band.
The DS-SS IEEE 802.11b has been called Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi networks have limited
range. A typical Wi-Fi home router using 802.11b or 802.11g with a stock
antenna might have a range of 32 m (120 ft) indoors and 95 m (300 ft) outdoors.
Range also varies with frequency band.
• IEEE 802.11g uses Complementary Code Keying Orthogonal Frequency Divi-
sion Multiplexing (CCK-OFDM) standards in both 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands.
20
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
2.4.4 WiMax
• Provides upto 70 Mb/sec symmetric broadband speed without the need for
cables. The technology is based on the IEEE 802.16 standard (also called
WirelessMAN)
• WiMAX can provide broadband wireless access (BWA) up to 30 miles (50 km)
for fixed stations, and 3 - 10 miles (5 - 15 km) for mobile stations. In contrast,
the WiFi/802.11 wireless local area network standard is limited in most cases
to only 100 - 300 feet (30 - 100m)
• The 802.16 specification applies across a wide range of the RF spectrum, and
WiMAX could function on any frequency below 66 GHz (higher frequencies
would decrease the range of a Base Station to a few hundred meters in an
urban environment).
2.4.5 Zigbee
• ZigBee is the specification for a suite of high level communication protocols us-
ing small, low-power digital radios based on the IEEE 802.15.4-2006 standard
for wireless personal area networks (WPANs), such as wireless headphones
connecting with cell phones via short-range radio.
• This technology is intended to be simpler and cheaper. ZigBee is targeted at
radio-frequency (RF) applications that require a low data rate, long battery
life, and secure networking.
• ZigBee operates in the industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio bands;
868 MHz in Europe, 915 MHz in countries such as USA and Australia, and
2.4 GHz in most worldwide.
2.4.6 Wibree
• Wibree is a digital radio technology (intended to become an open standard of
wireless communications) designed for ultra low power consumption (button
cell batteries) within a short range (10 meters / 30 ft) based around low-cost
transceiver microchips in each device.
21
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
• Wibree is known as Bluetooth with low energy technology.
• It operates in 2.4 GHz ISM band with physical layer bit rate of 1 Mbps.
2.5 Conclusion: Beyond 3G Networks
Beyond 3G networks, or 4G (Fourth Generation), represent the next complete evo-
lution in wireless communications. A 4G system will be able to provide a compre-
hensive IP solution where voice, data and streamed multimedia can be given to users
at higher data rates than previous generations.There is no formal definition for 4G ;
however, there are certain objectives that are projected for 4G. It will be capable of
providing between 100 Mbit/s and 1 Gbit/s speeds both indoors and outdoors, with
premium quality and high security. It would also support systems like multicarrier
communication, MIMO and UWB.
2.6 References
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
2. W. C. Lee, Mobile Communications Engineering, 2nd ed. New Delhi: Tata
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. R. Pandya, Mobile and Personal Communication Systems and Services, 4th
ed. New Delhi: PHI, 2004.
22
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 3
The Cellular Engineering
Fundamentals
3.1 Introduction
In Chapter 1, we have seen that the technique of substituting a single high power
transmitter by several low power transmitters to support many users is the backbone
of the cellular concept. In practice, the following four parameters are most important
while considering the cellular issues: system capacity, quality of service, spectrum
efficiency and power management. Starting from the basic notion of a cell, we would
deal with these parameters in the context of cellular engineering in this chapter.
3.2 What is a Cell?
The power of the radio signals transmitted by the BS decay as the signals travel
away from it. A minimum amount of signal strength (let us say, x dB) is needed in
order to be detected by the MS or mobile sets which may the hand-held personal
units or those installed in the vehicles. The region over which the signal strength
lies above this threshold value x dB is known as the coverage area of a BS and
it must be a circular region, considering the BS to be isotropic radiator. Such a
circle, which gives this actual radio coverage, is called the foot print of a cell (in
reality, it is amorphous). It might so happen that either there may be an overlap
between any two such side by side circles or there might be a gap between the
23
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.1: Footprint of cells showing the overlaps and gaps.
coverage areas of two adjacent circles. This is shown in Figure 3.1. Such a circular
geometry, therefore, cannot serve as a regular shape to describe cells. We need a
regular shape for cellular design over a territory which can be served by 3 regular
polygons, namely, equilateral triangle, square and regular hexagon, which can cover
the entire area without any overlap and gaps. Along with its regularity, a cell must
be designed such that it is most reliable too, i.e., it supports even the weakest mobile
with occurs at the edges of the cell. For any distance between the center and the
farthest point in the cell from it, a regular hexagon covers the maximum area. Hence
regular hexagonal geometry is used as the cells in mobile communication.
3.3 Frequency Reuse
Frequency reuse, or, frequency planning, is a technique of reusing frequencies and
channels within a communication system to improve capacity and spectral efficiency.
Frequency reuse is one of the fundamental concepts on which commercial wireless
systems are based that involve the partitioning of an RF radiating area into cells.
The increased capacity in a commercial wireless network, compared with a network
with a single transmitter, comes from the fact that the same radio frequency can be
reused in a different area for a completely different transmission.
Frequency reuse in mobile cellular systems means that frequencies allocated to
24
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.2: Frequency reuse technique of a cellular system.
the service are reused in a regular pattern of cells, each covered by one base station.
The repeating regular pattern of cells is called cluster. Since each cell is designed
to use radio frequencies only within its boundaries, the same frequencies can be
reused in other cells not far away without interference, in another cluster. Such cells
are called ‘co-channel’ cells. The reuse of frequencies enables a cellular system to
handle a huge number of calls with a limited number of channels. Figure 3.2 shows
a frequency planning with cluster size of 7, showing the co-channels cells in different
clusters by the same letter. The closest distance between the co-channel cells (in
different clusters) is determined by the choice of the cluster size and the layout of
the cell cluster. Consider a cellular system with S duplex channels available for
use and let N be the number of cells in a cluster. If each cell is allotted K duplex
channels with all being allotted unique and disjoint channel groups we have S = KN
under normal circumstances. Now, if the cluster are repeated M times within the
total area, the total number of duplex channels, or, the total number of users in the
system would be T = MS = KMN. Clearly, if K and N remain constant, then
T ∝ M (3.1)
and, if T and K remain constant, then
N ∝
1
M
. (3.2)
Hence the capacity gain achieved is directly proportional to the number of times
a cluster is repeated, as shown in (3.1), as well as, for a fixed cell size, small N
25
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
decreases the size of the cluster with in turn results in the increase of the number
of clusters (3.2) and hence the capacity. However for small N, co-channel cells are
located much closer and hence more interference. The value of N is determined by
calculating the amount of interference that can be tolerated for a sufficient quality
communication. Hence the smallest N having interference below the tolerated limit
is used. However, the cluster size N cannot take on any value and is given only by
the following equation
N = i
2
+ij +j
2
, i ≥ 0, j ≥ 0, (3.3)
where i and j are integer numbers.
Ex. 1: Find the relationship between any two nearest co-channel cell distance D
and the cluster size N.
Solution: For hexagonal cells, it can be shown that the distance between two adjacent
cell centers =

3R, where R is the radius of any cell. The normalized co-channel
cell distance D
n
can be calculated by traveling ’i’ cells in one direction and then
traveling ’j’ cells in anticlockwise 120
o
of the primary direction. Using law of vector
addition,
D
2
n
= j
2
cos
2
(30
o
) + (i +j sin(30
o
))
2
(3.4)
which turns out to be
D
n
=
_
i
2
+ij +j
2
=

N. (3.5)
Multiplying the actual distance

3R between two adjacent cells with it, we get
D = D
n

3R =

3NR. (3.6)
Ex. 2: Find out the surface area of a regular hexagon with radius R, the surface
area of a large hexagon with radius D, and hence compute the total number of cells
in this large hexagon.
Hint: In general, this large hexagon with radius D encompasses the center cluster of
N cells and one-third of the cells associated with six other peripheral large hexagons.
Thus, the answer must be N + 6(
N
3
) = 3N.
26
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
3.4 Channel Assignment Strategies
With the rapid increase in number of mobile users, the mobile service providers
had to follow strategies which ensure the effective utilization of the limited radio
spectrum. With increased capacity and low interference being the prime objectives,
a frequency reuse scheme was helpful in achieving this objectives. A variety of
channel assignment strategies have been followed to aid these objectives. Channel
assignment strategies are classified into two types: fixed and dynamic, as discussed
below.
3.4.1 Fixed Channel Assignment (FCA)
In fixed channel assignment strategy each cell is allocated a fixed number of voice
channels. Any communication within the cell can only be made with the designated
unused channels of that particular cell. Suppose if all the channels are occupied,
then the call is blocked and subscriber has to wait. This is simplest of the channel
assignment strategies as it requires very simple circuitry but provides worst channel
utilization. Later there was another approach in which the channels were borrowed
from adjacent cell if all of its own designated channels were occupied. This was
named as borrowing strategy. In such cases the MSC supervises the borrowing pro-
cess and ensures that none of the calls in progress are interrupted.
3.4.2 Dynamic Channel Assignment (DCA)
In dynamic channel assignment strategy channels are temporarily assigned for use
in cells for the duration of the call. Each time a call attempt is made from a cell the
corresponding BS requests a channel from MSC. The MSC then allocates a channel
to the requesting the BS. After the call is over the channel is returned and kept in
a central pool. To avoid co-channel interference any channel that in use in one cell
can only be reassigned simultaneously to another cell in the system if the distance
between the two cells is larger than minimum reuse distance. When compared to the
FCA, DCA has reduced the likelihood of blocking and even increased the trunking
capacity of the network as all of the channels are available to all cells, i.e., good
quality of service. But this type of assignment strategy results in heavy load on
switching center at heavy traffic condition.
27
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Ex. 3: A total of 33 MHz bandwidth is allocated to a FDD cellular system with
two 25 KHz simplex channels to provide full duplex voice and control channels.
Compute the number of channels available per cell if the system uses (i) 4 cell, (ii)
7 cell, and (iii) 8 cell reuse technique. Assume 1 MHz of spectrum is allocated to
control channels. Give a distribution of voice and control channels.
Solution: One duplex channel = 2 x 25 = 50 kHz of spectrum. Hence the total
available duplex channels are = 33 MHz / 50 kHz = 660 in number. Among these
channels, 1 MHz / 50 kHz = 20 channels are kept as control channels.
(a) For N = 4, total channels per cell = 660/4 = 165.
Among these, voice channels are 160 and control channels are 5 in number.
(b) For N = 7, total channels per cell are 660/7 ≈ 94. Therefore, we have to go for
a more exact solution. We know that for this system, a total of 20 control channels
and a total of 640 voice channels are kept. Here, 6 cells can use 3 control channels
and the rest two can use 2 control channels each. On the other hand, 5 cells can use
92 voice channels and the rest two can use 90 voice channels each. Thus the total
solution for this case is:
6 x 3 + 1 x 2 = 20 control channels, and,
5 x 92 + 2 x 90 = 640 voice channels.
This is one solution, there might exist other solutions too.
(c) The option N = 8 is not a valid option since it cannot satisfy equation (3.3) by
two integers i and j.
3.5 Handoff Process
When a user moves from one cell to the other, to keep the communication between
the user pair, the user channel has to be shifted from one BS to the other without
interrupting the call, i.e., when a MS moves into another cell, while the conversation
is still in progress, the MSC automatically transfers the call to a new FDD channel
without disturbing the conversation. This process is called as handoff. A schematic
diagram of handoff is given in Figure 3.3.
Processing of handoff is an important task in any cellular system. Handoffs
must be performed successfully and be imperceptible to the users. Once a signal
28
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.3: Handoff scenario at two adjacent cell boundary.
level is set as the minimum acceptable for good voice quality (P
r
min
), then a slightly
stronger level is chosen as the threshold (P
r
H
)at which handoff has to be made, as
shown in Figure 3.4. A parameter, called power margin, defined as
∆ = P
r
H
−P
r
min
(3.7)
is quite an important parameter during the handoff process since this margin ∆ can
neither be too large nor too small. If ∆ is too small, then there may not be enough
time to complete the handoff and the call might be lost even if the user crosses the
cell boundary.
If ∆ is too high o the other hand, then MSC has to be burdened with unnecessary
handoffs. This is because MS may not intend to enter the other cell. Therefore ∆
should be judiciously chosen to ensure imperceptible handoffs and to meet other
objectives.
3.5.1 Factors Influencing Handoffs
The following factors influence the entire handoff process:
(a) Transmitted power: as we know that the transmission power is different for dif-
ferent cells, the handoff threshold or the power margin varies from cell to cell.
(b) Received power: the received power mostly depends on the Line of Sight (LoS)
path between the user and the BS. Especially when the user is on the boundary of
29
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.4: Handoff process associated with power levels, when the user is going
from i-th cell to j-th cell.
the two cells, the LoS path plays a critical role in handoffs and therefore the power
margin ∆ depends on the minimum received power value from cell to cell.
(c) Area and shape of the cell: Apart from the power levels, the cell structure also
a plays an important role in the handoff process.
(d) Mobility of users: The number of mobile users entering or going out of a partic-
ular cell, also fixes the handoff strategy of a cell.
To illustrate the reasons (c) and (d), let us consider a rectangular cell with sides R
1
and R
2
inclined at an angle θ with horizon, as shown in the Figure 3.5. Assume N
1
users are having handoff in horizontal direction and N
2
in vertical direction per unit
length.
The number of crossings along R
1
side is : (N
1
cosθ +N
2
sinθ)R
1
and the number of
crossings along R
2
side is : (N
1
sinθ +N
2
cosθ)R
2
.
Then the handoff rate λ
H
can be written as
λ
H
= (N
1
cosθ +N
2
sinθ)R
1
+ (N
1
sinθ +N
2
cosθ)R
2
. (3.8)
30
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.5: Handoff process with a rectangular cell inclined at an angle θ.
Now, given the fixed area A = R
1
R
2
, we need to find λ
min
H
for a given θ. Replacing
R
1
by
A
R
2
and equating

H
dR
1
to zero, we get
R
2
1
= A(
N
1
sinθ +N
2
cosθ
N
1
cosθ +N
2
sinθ
). (3.9)
Similarly, for R
2
, we get
R
2
2
= A(
N
1
cosθ +N
2
sinθ
N
1
sinθ +N
2
cosθ
). (3.10)
From the above equations, we have λ
H
= 2
_
A(N
1
N
2
+ (N
2
1
+N
2
2
)cosθsinθ) which
means it it minimized at θ = 0
o
. Hence λ
min
H
= 2

AN
1
N
2
. Putting the value of θ
in (3.9) or (3.10), we have
R
1
R
2
=
N
1
N
2
. This has two implications: (i) that handoff is
minimized if rectangular cell is aligned with X-Y axis, i.e., θ = 0
o
, and, (ii) that the
number of users crossing the cell boundary is inversely proportional to the dimension
of the other side of the cell. The above analysis has been carried out for a simple
square cell and it changes in more complicated way when we consider a hexagonal
cell.
3.5.2 Handoffs In Different Generations
In 1G analog cellular systems, the signal strength measurements were made by
the BS and in turn supervised by the MSC. The handoffs in this generation can
be termed as Network Controlled Hand-Off (NCHO). The BS monitors the signal
31
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
strengths of voice channels to determine the relative positions of the subscriber.
The special receivers located on the BS are controlled by the MSC to monitor the
signal strengths of the users in the neighboring cells which appear to be in need
of handoff. Based on the information received from the special receivers the MSC
decides whether a handoff is required or not. The approximate time needed to make
a handoff successful was about 5-10 s. This requires the value of ∆ to be in the
order of 6dB to 12dB.
In the 2G systems, the MSC was relieved from the entire operation. In this
generation, which started using the digital technology, handoff decisions were mobile
assisted and therefore it is called Mobile Assisted Hand-Off (MAHO). In MAHO,
the mobile center measures the power changes received from nearby base stations
and notifies the two BS. Accordingly the two BS communicate and channel transfer
occurs. As compared to 1G, the circuit complexity was increased here whereas the
delay in handoff was reduced to 1-5 s. The value of ∆ was in the order of 0-5 dB.
However, even this amount of delay could create a communication pause.
In the current 3G systems, the MS measures the power from adjacent BS and
automatically upgrades the channels to its nearer BS. Hence this can be termed as
Mobile Controlled Hand-Off (MCHO). When compared to the other generations,
delay during handoff is only 100 ms and the value of ∆ is around 20 dBm. The
Quality Of Service (QoS) has improved a lot although the complexity of the circuitry
has further increased which is inevitable.
All these types of handoffs are usually termed as hard handoff as there is a shift
in the channels involved. There is also another kind of handoff, called soft handoff,
as discussed below.
Handoff in CDMA: In spread spectrum cellular systems, the mobiles share the same
channels in every cell. The MSC evaluates the signal strengths received from different
BS for a single user and then shifts the user from one BS to the other without actually
changing the channel. These types of handoffs are called as soft handoff as there is
no change in the channel.
32
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
3.5.3 Handoff Priority
While assigning channels using either FCA or DCA strategy, a guard channel concept
must be followed to facilitate the handoffs. This means, a fraction of total available
channels must be kept for handoff requests. But this would reduce the carried
traffic and only fewer channels can be assigned for the residual users of a cell. A
good solution to avoid such a dead-lock is to use DCA with handoff priority (demand
based allocation).
3.5.4 A Few Practical Problems in Handoff Scenario
(a) Different speed of mobile users: with the increase of mobile users in urban areas,
microcells are introduced in the cells to increase the capacity (this will be discussed
later in this chapter). The users with high speed frequently crossing the micro-cells
become burdened to MSC as it has to take care of handoffs. Several schemes thus
have been designed to handle the simultaneous traffic of high speed and low speed
users while minimizing the handoff intervention from the MSC, one of them being
the ‘Umbrella Cell’ approach. This technique provides large area coverage to high
speed users while providing small area coverage to users traveling at low speed. By
using different antenna heights and different power levels, it is possible to provide
larger and smaller cells at a same location. As illustrated in the Figure 3.6, umbrella
cell is co-located with few other microcells. The BS can measure the speed of the
user by its short term average signal strength over the RVC and decides which cell
to handle that call. If the speed is less, then the corresponding microcell handles
the call so that there is good corner coverage. This approach assures that handoffs
are minimized for high speed users and provides additional microcell channels for
pedestrian users.
(b) Cell dragging problem: this is another practical problem in the urban area with
additional microcells. For example, consider there is a LOS path between the MS
and BS1 while the user is in the cell covered by BS2. Since there is a LOS with the
BS1, the signal strength received from BS1 would be greater than that received from
BS2. However, since the user is in cell covered by BS2, handoff cannot take place
and as a result, it experiences a lot of interferences. This problem can be solved by
judiciously choosing the handoff threshold along with adjusting the coverage area.
33
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
(c) Inter-system handoff: if one user is leaving the coverage area of one MSC and is
entering the area of another MSC, then the call might be lost if there is no handoff in
this case too. Such a handoff is called inter-system handoff and in order to facilitate
this, mobiles usually have roaming facility.
3.6 Interference & System Capacity
Susceptibility and interference problems associated with mobile communications
equipment are because of the problem of time congestion within the electromag-
netic spectrum. It is the limiting factor in the performance of cellular systems. This
interference can occur from clash with another mobile in the same cell or because
of a call in the adjacent cell. There can be interference between the base stations
operating at same frequency band or any other non-cellular system’s energy leaking
inadvertently into the frequency band of the cellular system. If there is an interfer-
ence in the voice channels, cross talk is heard will appear as noise between the users.
The interference in the control channels leads to missed and error calls because of
digital signaling. Interference is more severe in urban areas because of the greater
RF noise and greater density of mobiles and base stations. The interference can be
divided into 2 parts: co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference.
3.6.1 Co-channel interference (CCI)
For the efficient use of available spectrum, it is necessary to reuse frequency band-
width over relatively small geographical areas. However, increasing frequency reuse
also increases interference, which decreases system capacity and service quality. The
cells where the same set of frequencies is used are call co-channel cells. Co-channel
interference is the cross talk between two different radio transmitters using the same
radio frequency as is the case with the co-channel cells. The reasons of CCI can be
because of either adverse weather conditions or poor frequency planning or overly-
crowded radio spectrum.
If the cell size and the power transmitted at the base stations are same then CCI
will become independent of the transmitted power and will depend on radius of the
cell (R) and the distance between the interfering co-channel cells (D). If D/R ratio
is increased, then the effective distance between the co-channel cells will increase
34
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
and interference will decrease. The parameter Q is called the frequency reuse ratio
and is related to the cluster size. For hexagonal geometry
Q = D/R =

3N. (3.11)
From the above equation, small of ‘Q’ means small value of cluster size ‘N’ and
increase in cellular capacity. But large ‘Q’ leads to decrease in system capacity
but increase in transmission quality. Choosing the options is very careful for the
selection of ‘N’, the proof of which is given in the first section.
The Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) for a mobile receiver which monitors the
forward channel can be calculated as
S
I
=
S

i
0
i=1
I
i
(3.12)
where i
0
is the number of co-channel interfering cells, S is the desired signal power
from the baseband station and I
i
is the interference power caused by the i-th interfer-
ing co-channel base station. In order to solve this equation from power calculations,
we need to look into the signal power characteristics. The average power in the
mobile radio channel decays as a power law of the distance of separation between
transmitter and receiver. The expression for the received power P
r
at a distance d
can be approximately calculated as
P
r
= P
0
(
d
d
0
)
−n
(3.13)
and in the dB expression as
P
r
(dB) = P
0
(dB) −10nlog(
d
d
0
) (3.14)
where P
0
is the power received at a close-in reference point in the far field region at
a small distance do from the transmitting antenna, and ‘n’ is the path loss exponent.
Let us calculate the SIR for this system. If D
i
is the distance of the i-th interferer
from the mobile, the received power at a given mobile due to i-th interfering cell
is proportional to (D
i
)
−n
(the value of ’n’ varies between 2 and 4 in urban cellular
systems).
Let us take that the path loss exponent is same throughout the coverage area
and the transmitted power be same, then SIR can be approximated as
S
I
=
R
−n

i
0
i=1
D
−n
i
(3.15)
35
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
where the mobile is assumed to be located at R distance from the cell center. If
we consider only the first layer of interfering cells and we assume that the interfer-
ing base stations are equidistant from the reference base station and the distance
between the cell centers is ’D’ then the above equation can be converted as
S
I
=
(D/R)
n
i
0
=
(

3N)
n
i
0
(3.16)
which is an approximate measure of the SIR. Subjective tests performed on AMPS
cellular system which uses FM and 30 kHz channels show that sufficient voice quality
can be obtained by SIR being greater than or equal to 18 dB. If we take n=4
, the value of ’N’ can be calculated as 6.49. Therefore minimum N is 7. The
above equations are based on hexagonal geometry and the distances from the closest
interfering cells can vary if different frequency reuse plans are used.
We can go for a more approximate calculation for co-channel SIR. This is the
example of a 7 cell reuse case. The mobile is at a distance of D-R from 2 closest
interfering cells and approximately D+R/2, D, D-R/2 and D+R distance from other
interfering cells in the first tier. Taking n = 4 in the above equation, SIR can be
approximately calculated as
S
I
=
R
−4
2(D −R)
−4
+ (D +R)
−4
+ (D)
−4
+ (D +R/2)
−4
+ (D −R/2)
−4
(3.17)
which can be rewritten in terms frequency reuse ratio Q as
S
I
=
1
2(Q−1)
−4
+ (Q+ 1)
−4
+ (Q)
−4
+ (Q+ 1/2)
−4
+ (Q−1/2)
−4
. (3.18)
Using the value of N equal to 7 (this means Q = 4.6), the above expression yields
that worst case SIR is 53.70 (17.3 dB). This shows that for a 7 cell reuse case the
worst case SIR is slightly less than 18 dB. The worst case is when the mobile is at
the corner of the cell i.e., on a vertex as shown in the Figure 3.6. Therefore N = 12
cluster size should be used. But this reduces the capacity by 7/12 times. Therefore,
co-channel interference controls link performance, which in a way controls frequency
reuse plan and the overall capacity of the cellular system. The effect of co-channel
interference can be minimized by optimizing the frequency assignments of the base
stations and their transmit powers. Tilting the base-station antenna to limit the
spread of the signals in the system can also be done.
36
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.6: First tier of co-channel interfering cells
3.6.2 Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI)
This is a different type of interference which is caused by adjacent channels i.e.
channels in adjacent cells. It is the signal impairment which occurs to one frequency
due to presence of another signal on a nearby frequency. This occurs when imperfect
receiver filters allow nearby frequencies to leak into the passband. This problem is
enhanced if the adjacent channel user is transmitting in a close range compared to
the subscriber’s receiver while the receiver attempts to receive a base station on the
channel. This is called near-far effect. The more adjacent channels are packed into
the channel block, the higher the spectral efficiency, provided that the performance
degradation can be tolerated in the system link budget. This effect can also occur
if a mobile close to a base station transmits on a channel close to one being used
by a weak mobile. This problem might occur if the base station has problem in
discriminating the mobile user from the ”bleed over” caused by the close adjacent
channel mobile.
Adjacent channel interference occurs more frequently in small cell clusters and heav-
ily used cells. If the frequency separation between the channels is kept large this
interference can be reduced to some extent. Thus assignment of channels is given
37
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
such that they do not form a contiguous band of frequencies within a particular
cell and frequency separation is maximized. Efficient assignment strategies are very
much important in making the interference as less as possible. If the frequency fac-
tor is small then distance between the adjacent channels cannot put the interference
level within tolerance limits. If a mobile is 10 times close to the base station than
other mobile and has energy spill out of its passband, then SIR for weak mobile is
approximately
S
I
= 10
−n
(3.19)
which can be easily found from the earlier SIR expressions. If n = 4, then SIR is
−52 dB. Perfect base station filters are needed when close-in and distant users share
the same cell. Practically, each base station receiver is preceded by a high Q cavity
filter in order to remove adjacent channel interference. Power control is also very
much important for the prolonging of the battery life for the subscriber unit but also
reduces reverse channel SIR in the system. Power control is done such that each
mobile transmits the lowest power required to maintain a good quality link on the
reverse channel.
3.7 Enhancing Capacity And Cell Coverage
3.7.1 The Key Trade-off
Previously, we have seen that the frequency reuse technique in cellular systems
allows for almost boundless expansion of geographical area and the number of mobile
system users who could be accommodated. In designing a cellular layout, the two
parameters which are of great significance are the cell radius R and the cluster size
N, and we have also seen that co-channel cell distance D =

3NR. In the following,
a brief description of the design trade-off is given, in which the above two parameters
play a crucial role.
The cell radius governs both the geographical area covered by a cell and also
the number of subscribers who can be serviced, given the subscriber density. It is
easy to see that the cell radius must be as large as possible. This is because, every
cell requires an investment in a tower, land on which the tower is placed, and radio
transmission equipment and so a large cell size minimizes the cost per subscriber.
38
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Eventually, the cell radius is determined by the requirement that adequate signal
to noise ratio be maintained over the coverage area. The SNR is determined by
several factors such as the antenna height, transmitter power, receiver noise figure
etc. Given a cell radius R and a cluster size N, the geographic area covered by a
cluster is
A
cluster
= NA
cell
= N3

3R
2
/2. (3.20)
If the total serviced area is A
total
, then the number of clusters M that could be
accommodated is given by
M = A
total
/A
cluster
= A
total
/(N3

3R
2
/2). (3.21)
Note that all of the available channels N, are reused in every cluster. Hence, to make
the maximum number of channels available to subscribers, the number of clusters
M should be large, which, by Equation (3.21), shows that the cell radius should
be small. However, cell radius is determined by a trade-off: R should be as large
as possible to minimize the cost of the installation per subscriber, but R should
be as small as possible to maximize the number of customers that the system can
accommodate. Now, if the cell radius R is fixed, then the number of clusters could be
maximized by minimizing the size of a cluster N. We have seen earlier that the size
of a cluster depends on the frequency reuse ratio Q. Hence, in determining the value
of N, another trade-off is encountered in that N must be small to accommodate
large number of subscribers, but should be sufficiently large so as to minimize the
interference effects.
Now, we focus on the issues regarding system expansion. The history of cellular
phones has been characterized by a rapid growth and expansion in cell subscribers.
Though a cellular system can be expanded by simply adding cells to the geographical
area, the way in which user density can be increased is also important to look at.
This is because it is not always possible to counter the increasing demand for cellular
systems just by increasing the geographical coverage area due to the limitations in
obtaining new land with suitable requirements. We discuss here two methods for
dealing with an increasing subscriber density: Cell Splitting and Sectoring. The
other method, microcell zone concept can treated as enhancing the QoS in a cellular
system.
39
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
The basic idea of adopting the cellular approach is to allow space for the growth
of mobile users. When a new system is deployed, the demand for it is fairly low and
users are assumed to be uniformly distributed over the service area. However, as new
users subscribe to the cellular service, the demand for channels may begin to exceed
the capacity of some base stations. As discussed previously,the number of channels
available to customers (equivalently, the channel density per square kilometer) could
be increased by decreasing the cluster size. However, once a system has been initially
deployed, a system-wide reduction in cluster size may not be necessary since user
density does not grow uniformly in all parts of the geographical area. It might be
that an increase in channel density is required only in specific parts of the system
to support an increased demand in those areas. Cell-splitting is a technique which
has the capability to add new smaller cells in specific areas of the system.
3.7.2 Cell-Splitting
Cell Splitting is based on the cell radius reduction and minimizes the need to modify
the existing cell parameters. Cell splitting involves the process of sub-dividing a
congested cell into smaller cells, each with its own base station and a corresponding
reduction in antenna size and transmitting power. This increases the capacity of
a cellular system since it increases the number of times that channels are reused.
Since the new cells have smaller radii than the existing cells, inserting these smaller
cells, known as microcells, between the already existing cells results in an increase
of capacity due to the additional number of channels per unit area. There are few
challenges in increasing the capacity by reducing the cell radius. Clearly, if cells
are small, there would have to be more of them and so additional base stations
will be needed in the system. The challenge in this case is to introduce the new
base stations without the need to move the already existing base station towers.
The other challenge is to meet the generally increasing demand that may vary quite
rapidly between geographical areas of the system. For instance, a city may have
highly populated areas and so the demand must be supported by cells with the
smallest radius. The radius of cells will generally increase as we move from urban to
sub urban areas, because the user density decreases on moving towards sub-urban
areas. The key factor is to add as minimum number of smaller cells as possible
40
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.7: Splitting of congested seven-cell clusters.
wherever an increase in demand occurs. The gradual addition of the smaller cells
implies that, at least for a time, the cellular system operates with cells of more than
one size.
Figure 3.7 shows a cellular layout with seven-cell clusters. Consider that the cells
in the center of the diagram are becoming congested, and cell A in the center has
reached its maximum capacity. Figure also shows how the smaller cells are being
superimposed on the original layout. The new smaller cells have half the cell radius
of the original cells. At half the radius, the new cells will have one-fourth of the area
and will consequently need to support one-fourth the number of subscribers. Notice
that one of the new smaller cells lies in the center of each of the larger cells. If
we assume that base stations are located in the cell centers, this allows the original
base stations to be maintained even in the new system layout. However, new base
stations will have to be added for new cells that do not lie in the center of the larger
cells. The organization of cells into clusters is independent of the cell radius, so that
the cluster size can be the same in the small-cell layout as it was in the large-cell
layout. Also the signal-to-interference ratio is determined by cluster size and not by
cell radius. Consequently, if the cluster size is maintained, the signal-to-interference
ratio will be the same after cell splitting as it was before. If the entire system is
41
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
replaced with new half-radius cells, and the cluster size is maintained, the number
of channels per cell will be exactly as it was before, and the number of subscribers
per cell will have been reduced.
When the cell radius is reduced by a factor, it is also desirable to reduce the
transmitted power. The transmit power of the new cells with radius half that of the
old cells can be found by examining the received power PR at the new and old cell
boundaries and setting them equal. This is necessary to maintain the same frequency
re-use plan in the new cell layout as well. Assume that PT1 and PT2 are the transmit
powers of the larger and smaller base stations respectively. Then, assuming a path
loss index n=4, we have power received at old cell boundary = P
T1
/R
4
and the
power received at new cell boundary = P
T2
/(R/2)
4
. On equating the two received
powers, we get P
T2
= P
T1
/ 16. In other words, the transmit power must be reduced
by 12 dB in order to maintain the same S/I with the new system lay-out.
At the beginning of this channel splitting process, there would be fewer channels
in the smaller power groups. As the demand increases, more and more channels need
to be accommodated and hence the splitting process continues until all the larger
cells have been replaced by the smaller cells, at which point splitting is complete
within the region and the entire system is rescaled to have a smaller radius per cell.
If a cellular layout is replaced entirety by a new layout with a smaller cell radius,
the signal-to-interference ratio will not change, provided the cluster size does not
change. Some special care must be taken, however, to avoid co-channel interference
when both large and small cell radii coexist. It turns out that the only way to
avoid interference between the large-cell and small-cell systems is to assign entirely
different sets of channels to the two systems. So, when two sizes of cells co-exist in
a system, channels in the old cell must be broken down into two groups, one that
corresponds to larger cell reuse requirements and the other which corresponds to the
smaller cell reuse requirements. The larger cell is usually dedicated to high speed
users as in the umbrella cell approach so as to minimize the number of hand-offs.
Ex. 4: When the AMPS cellular system was first deployed, the aim of the
system designers was to guarantee coverage. Initially the number of users was not
significant. Consequently cells were configured with an eight-mile radius, and a
12-cell cluster size was chosen. The cell radius was chosen to guarantee a 17 dB
42
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.8: A cell divided into three 120
o
sectors.
signal-to-noise ratio over 90% of the coverage area. Although a 12-cell cluster size
provided more than adequate co-channel separation to meet a requirement for a
17 dB signal-to-interference ratio in an interference-limited environment, it did not
provide adequate frequency reuse to service an explosively growing customer base.
The system planners reasoned that a subsequent shift to a 7-cell cluster size would
provide an adequate number of channels. It was estimated that a 7-cell cluster
size should provide an adequate 18.7 dB signal-to-interference ratio. The margin,
however, is slim, and the 17 dB signal-to-interference ratio requirement could not
be met over 90 % of the coverage area.
3.7.3 Sectoring
Sectoring is basically a technique which can increase the SIR without necessitating
an increase in the cluster size. Till now, it has been assumed that the base station is
located in the center of a cell and radiates uniformly in all the directions behaving as
an omni-directional antenna. However it has been found that the co-channel inter-
ference in a cellular system may be decreased by replacing a single omni-directional
antenna at the base station by several directional antennas, each radiating within a
specified sector. In the Figure 3.8, a cell is shown which has been split into three
120
o
sectors. The base station feeds three 120
o
directional antennas, each of which
radiates into one of the three sectors. The channel set serving this cell has also been
divided, so that each sector is assigned one-third of the available number cell of
channels. This technique for reducing co-channel interference wherein by using suit-
43
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.9: A seven-cell cluster with 60
o
sectors.
able directional antennas, a given cell would receive interference and transmit with
a fraction of available co-channel cells is called ’sectoring’. In a seven-cell-cluster
layout with 120
o
sectored cells, it can be easily understood that the mobile units in
a particular sector of the center cell will receive co-channel interference from only
two of the first-tier co-channel base stations, rather than from all six. Likewise, the
base station in the center cell will receive co-channel interference from mobile units
in only two of the co-channel cells. Hence the signal to interference ratio is now
modified to
S
I
=
(

3N)
n
2
(3.22)
where the denominator has been reduced from 6 to 2 to account for the reduced
number of interfering sources. Now, the signal to interference ratio for a seven-cell
cluster layout using 120
o
sectored antennas can be found from equation (3.24) to be
23.4 dB which is a significant improvement over the Omni-directional case where the
worst-case S/I is found to be 17 dB (assuming a path-loss exponent, n=4). Some
cellular systems divide the cells into 60
o
sectors. Similar analysis can be performed
on them as well.
Ex. 5: A cellular system having a seven-cell cluster layout with omni-directional
antennas has been performing satisfactorily for a required signal to interference ratio
of 15 dB. However due to the need for increasing the number of available channels, a
60
o
sectoring of the cells has been introduced. By what percentage can the number
of channels N
total
be increased assuming a path-loss component n=4?
Solution: The seven-cell cluster layout with 60
o
sectoring is shown in the Figure 3.9.
44
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
It is easy to see that the shaded region in the center receives interference from just
one first-tier cell and hence the signal to interference ratio can be obtained suitably
as
S
I
=
(

3N)
n
1
=
(
_
(3)(7))
4
1
= 26.4dB. (3.23)
Since the SIR exceeds 15 dB, one can try reducing the cluster size from seven to
four. Now, the SIR for this reduced cluster size layout can be found to be
S
I
=
(

3N)
n
1
=
(
_
(3)(4))
4
1
= 21.6dB. (3.24)
The S/I ratio is still above the requirement and so a further reduction in the cell
cluster size is possible. For a 3-cell cluster layout, there are two interfering sources
and hence the S/I ratio is found to be
S
I
=
(

3N)
n
1
=
(

33)
4
2
= 16.07dB. (3.25)
This is just above the adequate S/I ratio and further reduction in cluster size is
not possible. So, a 3-cluster cell layout could be used for meeting the growth re-
quirements. Thus, when the cluster size is reduced from 7 to 3, the total number of
channels increased by a factor of 7/3.
The calculations in the above example are actually an idealization for several
reasons. Firstly, practical antennas have side lobes and cannot be used to focus a
transmitted beam into a perfect 120
o
sector or 60
o
sector. Due to this, additional
interference will be introduced. Next, it is also a cause of concern that a given
number of channels are not able to support as many subscribers when the pool
of channels is divided into small groups. This is due to a reduction in Trunking
Efficiency, a term which will be explained later on. Because sectoring involves using
more than one antenna per base station, the available channels in the cell are divided
and dedicated to a specific antenna. This breaks the available set of channels into
smaller sets, thus reducing the trunking efficiency. Moreover, dividing a cell into
sectors requires that a call in progress will have to be handed off (that is, assigned
a new channel) when a mobile unit travels into a new sector. This increases the
complexity of the system and also the load on the mobile switching center/base
station.
45
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
3.7.4 Microcell Zone Concept
The increased number of handoffs required when sectoring is employed results in an
increased load on the switching and control link elements of the mobile system. To
overcome this problem, a new microcell zone concept has been proposed. As shown
in Figure 3.10, this scheme has a cell divided into three microcell zones, with each
of the three zone sites connected to the base station and sharing the same radio
equipment. It is necessary to note that all the microcell zones, within a cell, use the
same frequency used by that cell; that is no handovers occur between microcells.
Thus when a mobile user moves between two microcell zones of the cell, the BS
simply switches the channel to a different zone site and no physical re-allotment of
channel takes place.
Locating the mobile unit within the cell: An active mobile unit sends a signal to all
zone sites, which in turn send a signal to the BS. A zone selector at the BS uses that
signal to select a suitable zone to serve the mobile unit - choosing the zone with the
strongest signal.
Base Station Signals: When a call is made to a cellular phone, the system already
knows the cell location of that phone. The base station of that cell knows in which
zone, within that cell, the cellular phone is located. Therefore when it receives the
signal, the base station transmits it to the suitable zone site. The zone site receives
the cellular signal from the base station and transmits that signal to the mobile
phone after amplification. By confining the power transmitted to the mobile phone,
co-channel interference is reduced between the zones and the capacity of system is
increased.
Benefits of the micro-cell zone concept: 1) Interference is reduced in this case as
compared to the scheme in which the cell size is reduced.
2) Handoffs are reduced (also compared to decreasing the cell size) since the micro-
cells within the cell operate at the same frequency; no handover occurs when the
mobile unit moves between the microcells.
3) Size of the zone apparatus is small. The zone site equipment being small can be
mounted on the side of a building or on poles.
4) System capacity is increased. The new microcell knows where to locate the mo-
bile unit in a particular zone of the cell and deliver the power to that zone. Since
46
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.10: The micro-cell zone concept.
the signal power is reduced, the microcells can be closer and result in an increased
system capacity. However, in a microcellular system, the transmitted power to a
mobile phone within a microcell has to be precise; too much power results in inter-
ference between microcells, while with too little power the signal might not reach
the mobile phone.This is a drawback of microcellular systems, since a change in the
surrounding (a new building, say, within a microcell) will require a change of the
transmission power.
3.8 Trunked Radio System
In the previous sections, we have discussed the frequency reuse plan, the design
trade-offs and also explored certain capacity expansion techniques like cell-splitting
and sectoring. Now, we look at the relation between the number of radio channels
a cell contains and the number of users a cell can support. Cellular systems use
the concept of trunking to accommodate a large number of users in a limited radio
spectrum. It was found that a central office associated with say, 10,000 telephones
47
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
requires about 50 million connections to connect every possible pair of users. How-
ever, a worst case maximum of 5000 connections need to be made among these
telephones at any given instant of time, as against the possible 50 million connec-
tions. In fact, only a few hundreds of lines are needed owing to the relatively short
duration of a call. This indicates that the resources are shared so that the number of
lines is much smaller than the number of possible connections. A line that connects
switching offices and that is shared among users on an as-needed basis is called a
trunk.
The fact that the number of trunks needed to make connections between offices
is much smaller than the maximum number that could be used suggests that at
times there might not be sufficient facilities to allow a call to be completed. A call
that cannot be completed owing to a lack of resources is said to be blocked. So one
important to be answered in mobile cellular systems is: How many channels per cell
are needed in a cellular telephone system to ensure a reasonably low probability that
a call will be blocked?
In a trunked radio system, a channel is allotted on per call basis. The perfor-
mance of a radio system can be estimated in a way by looking at how efficiently the
calls are getting connected and also how they are being maintained at handoffs.
Some of the important factors to take into consideration are (i) Arrival statistics,
(ii)Service statistics, (iii)Number of servers/channels.
Let us now consider the following assumptions for a bufferless system handling ’L’
users as shown in Figure 3.11:
(i) The number of users L is large when compared to 1.
(ii) Arrival statistics is Poisson distributed with a mean parameter λ.
(iii) Duration of a call is exponentially distributed with a mean rate µ
1
.
(iv) Residence time of each user is exponentially distributed with a rate parameter
µ
2
.
(v) The channel holding rate therefore is exponentially distributed with a parameter
µ = µ
1

2
.
(vi) There is a total of ’J’ number of channels (J ≤ L).
To analyze such a system, let us recapitulate a queuing system in brief. Consider an
M/M/m/m system which is an m-server loss system. The name M/M/m/m reflects
48
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 3.11: The bufferless J-channel trunked radio system.
Figure 3.12: Discrete-time Markov chain for the M/M/J/J trunked radio system.
49
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
standard queuing theory nomenclature whereby:
(i) the first letter indicates the nature of arrival process(e.g. M stands for memory-
less which here means a Poisson process).
(ii) the second letter indicates the nature of probability distribution of service
times.(e.g M stands for exponential distribution). In all cases,successive inter ar-
rival times and service times are assumed to be statistically independent of each
other.
(iii) the third letter indicates the number of servers.
(iv) the last letter indicates that if an arrival finds all ’m’ users to be busy, then it
will not enter the system and is lost.
In view of the above, the bufferless system as shown in Figure 3.11 can be modeled
as M/M/J/J system and the discrete-time Markov chain of this system is shown in
Figure 3.12.
Trunking mainly exploits the statistical behavior of users so that a fixed number
of channels can be used to accommodate a large, random user community. As the
number of telephone lines decrease, it becomes more likely that all channels are
busy for a particular user. As a result, the call gets rejected and in some systems,
a queue may be used to hold the caller’s request until a channel becomes available.
In the telephone system context the term Grade of Service (GoS) is used to mean
the probability that a user’s request for service will be blocked because a required
facility, such as a trunk or a cellular channel, is not available. For example, a GoS of
2 % implies that on the average a user might not be successful in placing a call on 2
out of every 100 attempts. In practice the blocking frequency varies with time. One
would expect far more call attempts during business hours than during the middle of
the night. Telephone operating companies maintain usage records and can identify a
”busy hour”, that is, the hour of the day during which there is the greatest demand
for service. Typically, telephone systems are engineered to provide a specified grade
of service during a specified busy hour.
User calling can be modeled statistically by two parameters: the average number
of call requests per unit time λ
user
and the average holding time H. The parameter
λ
user
is also called the average arrival rate, referring to the rate at which calls from
a single user arrive. The average holding time is the average duration of a call. The
50
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
product:
A
user
= λ
user
H (3.26)
that is, the product of the average arrival rate and the average holding time–is called
the offered traffic intensity or offered load. This quantity represents the average
traffic that a user provides to the system. Offered traffic intensity is a quantity that
is traditionally measured in Erlangs. One Erlang represents the amount of traffic
intensity carried by a channel that is completely occupied. For example, a channel
that is occupied for thirty minutes during an hour carries 0.5 Erlang of traffic.
Call arrivals or requests for service are modeled as a Poisson random process. It
is based on the assumption that there is a large pool of users who do not cooperate
in deciding when to place calls. Holding times are very well predicted using an
exponential probability distribution. This implies that calls of long duration are
much less frequent than short calls. If the traffic intensity offered by a single user is
A
user
, then the traffic intensity offered by N users is A = NA
user
. The purpose of
the statistical model is to relate the offered traffic intensity A, the grade of service
P
b
, and the number of channels or trunks C needed to maintain the desired grade
of service.
Two models are widely used in traffic engineering to represent what happens
when a call is blocked. The blocked calls cleared model assumes that when a channel
or trunk is not available to service an arriving call, the call is cleared from the
system. The second model is known as blocked calls delayed. In this model a call
that cannot be serviced is placed on a queue and will be serviced when a channel or
trunk becomes available.
Use of the blocked-calls-cleared statistical model leads to the Erlang B formula
that relates offered traffic intensity A, grade of service P
b
, and number of channels
K. The Erlang B formula is:
P
b
=
A
K
/K!

K
n=0
A
n
/n!
(3.27)
When the blocked-calls-delayed model is used, the ”grade of service” refers to the
probability that a call will be delayed. In this case the statistical model leads to the
Erlang C formula,
P[delay] =
A
K
/[(K −A)(K −1)]!
A
K
/[(K −A)(K −1)]! +

K
n=0
A
n
/n!
. (3.28)
51
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Ex. 6: In a certain cellular system, an average subscriber places two calls per
hour during a busy hour and the average holding time is 3 min. Each cell has 100
channels. If the blocked calls are cleared, how many subscribers can be serviced by
each cell at 2 % GoS?
Solution: Using Erlang B table, it can be seen that for C = 100 and GoS = P
b
= 2%,
the total offered load A=87.972 Erlangs. Since an individual subscriber offers a load
of A
user
= (2 calls / 60 min)3 min = 0.1 Erlang, the maximum number of subscribers
served is
N = A/A
user
= 87.972/0.1 ≈ 880. (3.29)
Ex. 4: In the previous example, suppose that the channels have been divided into
two groups of 50 channels each. Each subscriber is assigned to a group and can be
served only by that group. How many subscribers can be served by the two group
cell?
Solution: Using the Erlang B table with C = 50 and GOS = P
b
= 2%, the total
offered load per group is
A = 40.255Erlangs (3.30)
Thus the maximum number of users per group is
N
group
= A/A
user
≈ 403. (3.31)
Thus, counting both the groups, maximum number of users in the two group cell is
806.
The above example indicates that the number of subscribers that can be sup-
ported by a given number of channels decreases as the pool of channels is sub-divided.
We can express this in terms of the trunking efficiency, defined as the carrier load
per channel, that is,
ξ = (1 −P
b
)A/C. (3.32)
This explains why the sectoring of a cell into either 120
o
or 60
o
sectors reduces
the trunking efficiency of the system. Thus the system growth due to sectoring is
impacted by trunking efficiency considerations.
52
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
3.9 References
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
2. K. Feher, Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum
Applications. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. S. Haykin and M. Moher, Modern Wireless Communications. Singapore: Pear-
son Education, Inc., 2002.
4. J. W. Mark and W. Zhuang, Wireless Communications and Networking. New
Delhi: PHI, 2005.
53
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 4
Free Space Radio Wave
Propagation
4.1 Introduction
There are two basic ways of transmitting an electro-magnetic (EM) signal, through a
guided medium or through an unguided medium. Guided mediums such as coaxial
cables and fiber optic cables, are far less hostile toward the information carrying
EM signal than the wireless or the unguided medium. It presents challenges and
conditions which are unique for this kind of transmissions. A signal, as it travels
through the wireless channel, undergoes many kinds of propagation effects such as
reflection, diffraction and scattering, due to the presence of buildings, mountains and
other such obstructions. Reflection occurs when the EM waves impinge on objects
which are much greater than the wavelength of the traveling wave. Diffraction
is a phenomena occurring when the wave interacts with a surface having sharp
irregularities. Scattering occurs when the medium through the wave is traveling
contains objects which are much smaller than the wavelength of the EM wave.
These varied phenomena’s lead to large scale and small scale propagation losses. Due
to the inherent randomness associated with such channels they are best described
with the help of statistical models. Models which predict the mean signal strength
for arbitrary transmitter receiver distances are termed as large scale propagation
models. These are termed so because they predict the average signal strength for
large Tx-Rx separations, typically for hundreds of kilometers.
54
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 4.1: Free space propagation model, showing the near and far fields.
4.2 Free Space Propagation Model
Although EM signals when traveling through wireless channels experience fading
effects due to various effects, but in some cases the transmission is with a direct
line of sight such as in satellite communication. Free space model predicts that
the received power decays as negative square root of the distance. Friis free space
equation is given by
P
r
(d) =
P
t
G
t
G
r
λ
2
(4π)
2
d
2
L
(4.1)
where P
t
is the transmitted power, P
r
(d) is the received power, G
t
is the transmitter
antenna gain, G
r
is the receiver antenna gain, d is the Tx-Rx separation and L is the
system loss factor depended upon line attenuation, filter losses and antenna losses
and not related to propagation. The gain of the antenna is related to the effective
aperture of the antenna which in turn is dependent upon the physical size of the
antenna as given below
G = 4πA
e

2
. (4.2)
The path loss, representing the attenuation suffered by the signal as it travels
through the wireless channel is given by the difference of the transmitted and re-
ceived power in dB and is expressed as:
PL(dB) = 10 log P
t
/P
r
. (4.3)
55
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
The fields of an antenna can broadly be classified in two regions, the far field and
the near field. It is in the far field that the propagating waves act as plane waves
and the power decays inversely with distance. The far field region is also termed
as Fraunhofer region and the Friis equation holds in this region. Hence, the Friis
equation is used only beyond the far field distance, d
f
, which is dependent upon the
largest dimension of the antenna as
d
f
= 2D
2
/λ. (4.4)
Also we can see that the Friis equation is not defined for d=0. For this reason, we
use a close in distance, d
o
, as a reference point. The power received, P
r
(d), is then
given by:
P
r
(d) = P
r
(d
o
)(d
o
/d)
2
. (4.5)
Ex. 1: Find the far field distance for a circular antenna with maximum dimension
of 1 m and operating frequency of 900 MHz.
Solution: Since the operating frequency f = 900 Mhz, the wavelength
λ =
3 10
8
m/s
900 10
6
Hz
m
. Thus, with the largest dimension of the antenna, D=1m, the far field distance is
d
f
=
2D
2
λ
=
2(1)
2
0.33
= 6m
.
Ex. 2: A unit gain antenna with a maximum dimension of 1 m produces 50 W
power at 900 MHz. Find (i) the transmit power in dBm and dB, (ii) the received
power at a free space distance of 5 m and 100 m.
Solution:
(i) Tx power = 10log(50) = 17 dB = (17+30) dBm = 47 dBm
(ii) d
f
=
2×D
2
λ
=
2×1
2
1/3
= 6m
Thus the received power at 5 m can not be calculated using free space distance
formula.
At 100 m ,
P
R
=
P
T
G
T
G
R
λ
2
4πd
2
=
50 1 (1/3)
2
4π100
2
56
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
= 3.5 10
−3
mW
P
R
(dBm) = 10logP
r
(mW) = −24.5dBm
4.3 Basic Methods of Propagation
Reflection, diffraction and scattering are the three fundamental phenomena that
cause signal propagation in a mobile communication system, apart from LoS com-
munication. The most important parameter, predicted by propagation models based
on above three phenomena, is the received power. The physics of the above phe-
nomena may also be used to describe small scale fading and multipath propagation.
The following subsections give an outline of these phenomena.
4.3.1 Reflection
Reflection occurs when an electromagnetic wave falls on an object, which has very
large dimensions as compared to the wavelength of the propagating wave. For ex-
ample, such objects can be the earth, buildings and walls. When a radio wave falls
on another medium having different electrical properties, a part of it is transmitted
into it, while some energy is reflected back. Let us see some special cases. If the
medium on which the e.m. wave is incident is a dielectric, some energy is reflected
back and some energy is transmitted. If the medium is a perfect conductor, all
energy is reflected back to the first medium. The amount of energy that is reflected
back depends on the polarization of the e.m. wave.
Another particular case of interest arises in parallel polarization, when no re-
flection occurs in the medium of origin. This would occur, when the incident angle
would be such that the reflection coefficient is equal to zero. This angle is the
Brewster’s angle. By applying laws of electro-magnetics, it is found to be
sin(θ
B
) =
_

1

1
+
2
. (4.6)
Further, considering perfect conductors, the electric field inside the conductor is
always zero. Hence all energy is reflected back. Boundary conditions require that
θ
i
= θ
r
(4.7)
and
E
i
= E
r
(4.8)
57
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
for vertical polarization, and
E
i
= −E
r
(4.9)
for horizontal polarization.
4.3.2 Diffraction
Diffraction is the phenomenon due to which an EM wave can propagate beyond the
horizon, around the curved earth’s surface and obstructions like tall buildings. As
the user moves deeper into the shadowed region, the received field strength decreases.
But the diffraction field still exists an it has enough strength to yield a good signal.
This phenomenon can be explained by the Huygen’s principle, according to
which, every point on a wavefront acts as point sources for the production of sec-
ondary wavelets, and they combine to produce a new wavefront in the direction of
propagation. The propagation of secondary wavelets in the shadowed region results
in diffraction. The field in the shadowed region is the vector sum of the electric field
components of all the secondary wavelets that are received by the receiver.
4.3.3 Scattering
The actual received power at the receiver is somewhat stronger than claimed by the
models of reflection and diffraction. The cause is that the trees, buildings and lamp-
posts scatter energy in all directions. This provides extra energy at the receiver.
Roughness is tested by a Rayleigh criterion, which defines a critical height h
c
of
surface protuberances for a given angle of incidence θ
i
, given by,
h
c
=
λ
8sinθ
i
. (4.10)
A surface is smooth if its minimum to maximum protuberance h is less than h
c
,
and rough if protuberance is greater than h
c
. In case of rough surfaces, the surface
reflection coefficient needs to be multiplied by a scattering loss factor ρ
S
, given by
ρ
S
= exp(−8(
πσ
h
sinθ
i
λ
)
2
) (4.11)
where σ
h
is the standard deviation of the Gaussian random variable h. The following
result is a better approximation to the observed value
ρ
S
= exp(−8(
πσ
h
sinθ
i
λ
)
2
)I
0
[−8(
πσ
h
sinθ
i
λ
)
2
] (4.12)
58
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 4.2: Two-ray reflection model.
which agrees very well for large walls made of limestone. The equivalent reflection
coefficient is given by,
Γ
rough
= ρ
S
Γ. (4.13)
4.4 Two Ray Reflection Model
Interaction of EM waves with materials having different electrical properties than
the material through which the wave is traveling leads to transmitting of energy
through the medium and reflection of energy back in the medium of propagation.
The amount of energy reflected to the amount of energy incidented is represented
by Fresnel reflection coefficient Γ, which depends upon the wave polarization, angle
of incidence and frequency of the wave. For example, as the EM waves can not pass
through conductors, all the energy is reflected back with angle of incidence equal to
the angle of reflection and reflection coefficient Γ = −1. In general, for parallel and
perpendicular polarizations, Γ is given by:
Γ
||
= E
r
/E
i
= η
2
sin θ
t
−η
1
sin θ
i

2
sin θ
t

1
sin θ
i
(4.14)
59
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Γ

= E
r
/E
i
= η
2
sin θ
i
−η
1
sin θ
t

2
sin θ
i

1
sin θ
t
. (4.15)
Seldom in communication systems we encounter channels with only LOS paths and
hence the Friis formula is not a very accurate description of the communication link.
A two-ray model, which consists of two overlapping waves at the receiver, one direct
path and one reflected wave from the ground gives a more accurate description as
shown in Figure 4.2. A simple addition of a single reflected wave shows that power
varies inversely with the forth power of the distance between the Tx and the Rx.
This is deduced via the following treatment. From Figure 4.2, the total transmitted
and received electric fields are
E
TOT
T
= E
i
+E
LOS
, (4.16)
E
TOT
R
= E
g
+E
LOS
. (4.17)
Let E
0
is the free space electric field (in V/m) at a reference distance d
0
. Then
E(d, t) =
E
0
d
0
d
cos(ω
c
t −φ) (4.18)
where
φ = ω
c
d
c
(4.19)
and d > d
0
. The envelop of the electric field at d meters from the transmitter at
any time t is therefore
[E(d, t)[ =
E
0
d
0
d
. (4.20)
This means the envelop is constant with respect to time.
Two propagating waves arrive at the receiver, one LOS wave which travels a
distance of d

and another ground reflected wave, that travels d

. Mathematically,
it can be expressed as:
E(d

, t) =
E
0
d
0
d

cos(ω
c
t −φ

) (4.21)
where
φ

= ω
c
d

c
(4.22)
and
E(d

, t) =
E
0
d
0
d

cos(ω
c
t −φ

) (4.23)
where
φ

= ω
c
d

c
. (4.24)
60
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 4.3: Phasor diagram of electric
fields.
Figure 4.4: Equivalent phasor diagram of
Figure 4.3.
According to the law of reflection in a dielectric, θ
i
= θ
0
and E
g
= ΓE
i
which means
the total electric field,
E
t
= E
i
+E
g
= E
i
(1 + Γ). (4.25)
For small values of θ
i
, reflected wave is equal in magnitude and 180
o
out of phase
with respect to incident wave. Assuming perfect horizontal electric field polarization,
i.e.,
Γ

= −1 =⇒E
t
= (1 −1)E
i
= 0, (4.26)
the resultant electric field is the vector sum of E
LOS
and E
g
. This implies that,
E
TOT
R
= [E
LOS
+E
g
[. (4.27)
It can be therefore written that
E
TOT
R
(d, t) =
E
0
d
0
d

cos(ω
c
t −φ

) + (−1)
E
0
d
0
d

cos(ω
c
t −φ

) (4.28)
In such cases, the path difference is
∆ = d

−d

=
_
(h
t
+h
r
)
2
+d
2

_
(h
t
−h
r
)
2
+d
2
. (4.29)
However, when T-R separation distance is very large compared to (h
t
+h
r
), then
∆ ≈
2h
t
h
r
d
(4.30)
Ex 3: Prove the above two equations, i.e., equation (4.29) and (4.30).
Once the path difference is known, the phase difference is
θ

=
2π∆
λ
=
∆ω
c
λ
(4.31)
61
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
and the time difference,
τ
d
=

c
=
θ

2πf
c
. (4.32)
When d is very large, then ∆ becomes very small and therefore E
LOS
and E
g
are
virtually identical with only phase difference,i.e.,
[
E
0
d
0
d
[ ≈ [
E
0
d
0
d

[ ≈ [
E
0
d
0
d

[. (4.33)
Say, we want to evaluate the received E-field at any t =
d

c
. Then,
E
TOT
R
(d, t =
d

c
) =
E
0
d
0
d

cos(ω
c
d

c
−ω
c
d

c
) −
E
0
d
0
d

cos(ω
c
d

c
−ω
c
d

c
) (4.34)
=
E
0
d
0
d

cos(
∆ω
c
c
) −
E
0
d
0
d

cos(0
o
) (4.35)
=
E
0
d
0
d

θ


E
0
d
0
d

(4.36)

E
0
d
0
d
(

θ

−1). (4.37)
Using phasor diagram concept for vector addition as shown in Figures 4.3 and 4.4,
we get
[E
TOT
R
(d)[ =
¸
(
E
0
d
0
d
+
E
0
d
0
d
cos(θ

))
2
+ (
E
0
d
0
d
sin(θ

))
2
(4.38)
=
E
0
d
0
d
_
(cos(θ

) −1)
2
+sin
2


) (4.39)
=
E
0
d
0
d
_
2 −2cosθ

(4.40)
= 2
E
0
d
0
d
sin(
θ

2
). (4.41)
For
θ

2
< 0.5rad, sin(
θ

2
) ≈
θ

2
. Using equation (4.31) and further equation (4.30),
we can then approximate that
sin(
θ

2
) ≈
π
λ
∆ =
2πh
t
h
r
λd
< 0.5rad. (4.42)
This raises the wonderful concept of ‘cross-over distance’ d
c
, defined as
d > d
c
=
20πh
t
h
r

=
4πh
t
h
r
λ
. (4.43)
The corresponding approximate received electric field is
E
TOT
R
(d) ≈ 2
E
0
d
0
d
2πh
t
h
r
λd
= k
h
t
h
r
d
2
. (4.44)
62
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Therefore, using equation (4.43) in (4.1), we get the received power as
P
r
=
P
t
G
t
G
r
h
2
t
h
2
r
Ld
4
. (4.45)
The cross-over distance shows an approximation of the distance after which the
received power decays with its fourth order. The basic difference between equation
(4.1) and (4.45) is that when d < d
c
, equation (4.1) is sufficient to calculate the
path loss since the two-ray model does not give a good result for a short distance
due to the oscillation caused by the constructive and destructive combination of the
two rays, but whenever we distance crosses the ‘cross-over distance’, the power falls
off rapidly as well as two-ray model approximation gives better result than Friis
equation.
Observations on Equation (4.45): The important observations from this
equation are:
1. This equation gives fair results when the T-R separation distance crosses the
cross-over distance.
1. In that case, the power decays as the fourth power of distance
P
r
(d) =
K
d
4
, (4.46)
with K being a constant.
2. Path loss is independent of frequency (wavelength).
3. Received power is also proportional to h
2
t
and h
2
r
, meaning, if height of any of the
antennas is increased, received power increases.
4.5 Diffraction
Diffraction is the phenomena that explains the digression of a wave from a straight
line path, under the influence of an obstacle, so as to propagate behind the obstacle.
It is an inherent feature of a wave be it longitudinal or transverse. For e.g the
sound can be heard in a room, where the source of the sound is another room
without having any line of sight. The similar phenomena occurs for light also but
the diffracted light intensity is not noticeable. This is because the obstacle or slit
need to be of the order of the wavelength of the wave to have a significant effect.
Thus radiation from a point source radiating in all directions can be received at any
63
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 4.5: Huygen’s secondary wavelets.
point, even behind an obstacle (unless it is not completely enveloped by it), as shown
in Figure 4.5. Though the intensity received gets smaller as receiver is moved into the
shadowed region. Diffraction is explained by Huygens-Fresnel principle which states
that all points on a wavefront can be considered as the point source for secondary
wavelets which form the secondary wavefront in the direction of the prorogation.
Normally, in absence of an obstacle, the sum of all wave sources is zero at a point
not in the direct path of the wave and thus the wave travels in the straight line. But
in the case of an obstacle, the effect of wave source behind the obstacle cannot be
felt and the sources around the obstacle contribute to the secondary wavelets in the
shadowed region, leading to bending of wave. In mobile communication, this has a
great advantage since, by diffraction (and scattering, reflection), the receiver is able
to receive the signal even when not in line of sight of the transmitter. This we show
in the subsection given below.
4.5.1 Knife-Edge Diffraction Geometry
As shown in Figure 4.6, consider that there’s an impenetrable obstruction of hight
h at a distance of d
1
from the transmitter and d
2
from the receiver. The path
difference between direct path and the diffracted path is
δ =
_
d
2
1
+h
2
+
_
d
2
2
+h
2
−(d
1
+d
2
) (4.47)
64
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 4.6: Diffraction through a sharp edge.
which can be further simplified as
δ = d
1
(1 +h
2
/2d
2
1
) +d
2
(1 +h
2
/2d
2
2
) −(d
1
+d
2
)
= h
2
/(2d
1
) +h
2
/(2d
2
) = h
2
(d
1
+d
2
)/(2d
1
d
2
). (4.48)
Thus the phase difference equals
φ = 2πδ/λ = 2πh
2
(d
1
+d
2
)/λ2(d
1
d
2
). (4.49)
With the following considerations that
α = β +γ (4.50)
and
α ≈ tanα (4.51)
we can write,
αtanα = tanβ + tanγ = h/d
1
+h/d
2
= h(d
1
+d
2
)/d
1
d
2
. (4.52)
In order to normalize this, we usually use a Fresnel-Kirchoff diffraction parameter
v, expressed as
v = h
_
2(d
1
+d
2
)/(λd
1
d
2
) = α
_
(2d
1
d
2
)/(λ(d
1
+d
2
)) (4.53)
65
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 4.7: Fresnel zones.
and therefore the phase difference becomes
φ = πv
2
/2. (4.54)
From this, we can observe that: (i) phase difference is a function of the height of
the obstruction, and also, (ii) phase difference is a function of the position of the
obstruction from transmitter and receiver.
4.5.2 Fresnel Zones: the Concept of Diffraction Loss
As mentioned before, the more is the object in the shadowed region greater is the
diffraction loss of the signal. The effect of diffraction loss is explained by Fresnel
zones as a function of the path difference. The successive Fresnel zones are limited
by the circular periphery through which the path difference of the secondary waves
is nλ/2 greater than total length of the LOS path, as shown in Figure 4.7. Thus
successive Fresnel zones have phase difference of π which means they alternatively
66
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
provide constructive and destructive interference to the received the signal. The
radius of the each Fresnel zone is maximum at middle of transmitter and receiver
(i.e. when d
1
= d
2
) and decreases as moved to either side. It is seen that the loci
of a Fresnel zone varied over d1 and d2 forms an ellipsoid with the transmitter and
receiver at its focii. Now, if there’s no obstruction, then all Fresnel zones result in
only the direct LOS prorogation and no diffraction effects are observed. But if an
obstruction is present, depending on its geometry, it obstructs contribution from
some of the secondary wavelets, resulting in diffraction and also the loss of energy,
which is the vector sum of energy from unobstructed sources. please note that height
of the obstruction can be positive zero and negative also. The diffraction losses are
minimum as long as obstruction doesn’t block volume of the 1st Fresnel zone. As a
rule of thumb, diffraction effects are negligible beyond 55% of 1st Fresnel zone.
Ex 4: Calculate the first Fresnel zone obstruction height maximum for f = 800
MHz.
Solution:
λ =
c
f
=
3 10
8
8 10
2
10
6
=
3
8
m
H =
_
λ(d
1
+d
2
)
d
1
+d
2
H
1
=
_
3
8
250×250
500
= 6.89m
Thus H
1
= 10 + 6.89 = 16.89m
(b)
H
2
=
¸
3
8
100 400
500
= 10
_
(0.3) = 5.48m
Thus
H
2
= 10 + 5.6 = 15.48m
. To have good power strength, obstacle should be within the 60% of the first fresnel
zone.
Ex 5: Given f=900 MHz, d
1
= d
2
= 1 km, h = 25m, where symbols have usual
meaning. Compute the diffraction loss. Also find out in which Fresnel zone the tip
of the obstruction lies.
67
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 4.8: Knife-edge Diffraction Model
Given,
G
d
(dB) = 20 log(0.5 −0.62v) −1 < v <= 0
G
d
(dB) = 20 log(0.225/v) v > 2.24
Solution:
v = h
¸
2(d
1
+d
2
)
λd
1
d
2
= 25
¸
2 2000
1
3
10
= 2.74
G
d
(dB) = 20 log(
225
v
) = −21.7dB
Since loss = -G
d
(dB) = 21.7 dB
n =
(2.74)
2
2
= 3.5
Thus n=4.
4.5.3 Knife-edge diffraction model
Knife-edge diffraction model is one of the simplest diffraction model to estimate the
diffraction loss. It considers the object like hill or mountain as a knife edge sharp
68
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
object. The electric field strength, E
d
of a knife-edge diffracted wave is given by
E
d
/E
o
= F(v) = (1 +j)/2
_

v
(exp((−jπt
2
)/2)dt. (4.55)
The diffraction gain due to presence of knife edge can be given as
G
d
(db) = 20log[F(v)[ (4.56)
G
d
(db) = 0v <= −1 (4.57)
G
d
(db) = 20log(0.5 −0.62) −1 <= v <= 0 (4.58)
G
d
(db) = 20log(0.5exp(−0.95v)) 0 <= v <= 1 (4.59)
G
d
(db) = 20log(0.4 −sqrt(0.1184 −(0.38 −0.1v
2
))) 1 <= v <= 2.4 (4.60)
G
d
(db) = 20log(0.225/v) v > 2.4 (4.61)
When there are more than one obstruction, then the equivalent model can be found
by one knife-edge diffraction model as shown in Figure 4.8.
4.6 Link Budget Analysis
4.6.1 Log-distance Path Loss Model
According to this model the received power at distance d is given by,
PL(d)(
d
d
0
)
n
=⇒PL(dB) = PL(d
0
) + 10nlog(
d
d
0
) (4.62)
The value of n varies with propagation environments. The value of n is 2 for free
space. The value of n varies from 4 to 6 for obstruction of building, and 3 to 5 for
urban scenarios. The important factor is to select the correct reference distance d
0
.
For large cell area it is 1 Km, while for micro-cell system it varies from 10m-1m.
Limitations:
Surrounding environmental clutter may be different for two locations having
the same transmitter to receiver separation. Moreover it does not account for the
shadowing effects.
69
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
4.6.2 Log Normal Shadowing
The equation for the log normal shadowing is given by,
PL(dB) = PL(dB) +X
σ
= PL(d
0
) + 10nlog(
d
d
0
) +X
σ
(4.63)
where X
σ
is a zero mean Gaussian distributed random variable in dB with standard
deviation σ also in dB. In practice n and σ values are computed from measured
data.
Average received power
The ‘Q’ function is given by,
Q(z) = 0.5(1 −erf(
z

2
)) (4.64)
and
Q(z) = 1 −Q(−z) (4.65)
So the probability that the received signal level (in dB) will exceed a certain value
γ is
P(P
d
> γ) = Q(
γ −P
r
σ
). (4.66)
4.7 Outdoor Propagation Models
There are many empirical outdoor propagation models such as Longley-Rice model,
Durkin’s model, Okumura model, Hata model etc. Longley-Rice model is the most
commonly used model within a frequency band of 40 MHz to 100 GHz over different
terrains. Certain modifications over the rudimentary model like an extra urban
factor (UF) due to urban clutter near the reciever is also included in this model.
Below, we discuss some of the outdoor models, followed by a few indoor models too.
4.7.1 Okumura Model
The Okumura model is used for Urban Areas is a Radio propagation model that is
used for signal prediction.The frequency coverage of this model is in the range of
200 MHz to 1900 MHz and distances of 1 Km to 100 Km.It can be applicable for
base station effective antenna heights (h
t
) ranging from 30 m to 1000 m.
70
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Okumura used extensive measurements of base station-to-mobile signal attenua-
tion throughout Tokyo to develop a set of curves giving median attenuation relative
to free space (A
mu
) of signal propogation in irregular terrain. The empirical path-
loss formula of Okumura at distance d parameterized by the carrier frequency f
c
is
given by
P
L
(d)dB = L(f
c
, d) +A
mu
(f
c
, d) −G(h
t
) −G(h
r
) −G
AREA
(4.67)
where L(f
c
, d) is free space path loss at distance d and carrier frequency f
c
, A
mu
(f
c
, d)
is the median attenuation in addition to free-space path loss across all environments,G(h
t
)
is the base station antenna height gain factor,G(h
r
) is the mobile antenna height gain
factor,G
AREA
is the gain due to type of environment. The values of A
mu
(f
c
, d) and
G
AREA
are obtained from Okumura’s empirical plots. Okumura derived empirical
formulas for G(h
t
) and G(h
r
) as follows:
G(h
t
) = 20 log
10
(h
t
/200), 30m < h
t
< 1000m (4.68)
G(h
r
) = 10 log
10
(h
r
/3), h
r
≤ 3m (4.69)
G(h
r
) = 20 log
10
(h
r
/3), 3m < h
r
< 10m (4.70)
Correlation factors related to terrain are also developed in order to improve the
models accuracy. Okumura’s model has a 10-14 dB empirical standard deviation
between the path loss predicted by the model and the path loss associated with one
of the measurements used to develop the model.
4.7.2 Hata Model
The Hata model is an empirical formulation of the graphical path-loss data provided
by the Okumura and is valid over roughly the same range of frequencies, 150-1500
MHz. This empirical formula simplifies the calculation of path loss because it is
closed form formula and it is not based on empirical curves for the different param-
eters. The standard formula for empirical path loss in urban areas under the Hata
model is
P
L,urban
(d)dB = 69.55+26.16 log
10
(f
c
)−13.82 log
10
(h
t
)−a(h
r
)+(44.9−6.55 log
10
(h
t
)) log
10
(d)
(4.71)
71
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
The parameters in this model are same as in the Okumura model,and a(h
r
) is a
correction factor for the mobile antenna height based on the size of coverage area.For
small to medium sized cities this factor is given by
a(h
r
) = (1.11 log
10
(f
c
) −0.7)h
r
−(1.56 log
10
(f
c
) −0.8)dB
and for larger cities at a frequencies f
c
> 300 MHz by
a(h
r
) = 3.2(log
10
(11.75h
r
))
2
−4.97dB
else it is
a(h
r
) = 8.29(log
10
(1.54h
r
))
2
−1.1dB
Corrections to the urban model are made for the suburban, and is given by
P
L,suburban
(d)dB = P
L,urban
(d)dB −2(log
10
(f
c
/28))
2
−5.4 (4.72)
Unlike the Okumura model,the Hata model does not provide for any specific path-
correlation factors. The Hata model well approximates the Okumura model for
distances d > 1 Km. Hence it is a good model for first generation cellular systems,
but it does not model propogation well in current cellular systems with smaller cell
sizes and higher frequencies. Indoor environments are also not captured by the Hata
model.
4.8 Indoor Propagation Models
The indoor radio channel differs from the traditional mobile radio channel in ways
- the distances covered are much smaller ,and the variability of the environment
is much greater for smaller range of Tx-Rx separation distances.Features such as
lay-out of the building,the construction materials,and the building type strongly in-
fluence the propagation within the building.Indoor radio propagation is dominated
by the same mechanisms as outdoor: reflection, diffraction and scattering with vari-
able conditions. In general,indoor channels may be classified as either line-of-sight
or obstructed.
4.8.1 Partition Losses Inside a Floor (Intra-floor)
The internal and external structure of a building formed by partitions and obstacles
vary widely.Partitions that are formed as a part of building structure are called
72
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
hard partitions , and partitions that may be moved and which do not span to
the ceiling are called soft partitions. Partitions vary widely in their physical and
electrical characteristics,making it difficult to apply general models to specific indoor
installations.
4.8.2 Partition Losses Between Floors (Inter-floor)
The losses between floors of a building are determined by the external dimensions
and materials of the building,as well as the type of construction used to create the
floors and the external surroundings. Even the number of windows in a building
and the presence of tinting can impact the loss between floors.
4.8.3 Log-distance Path Loss Model
It has been observed that indoor path loss obeys the distance power law given by
PL(dB) = PL(d
0
) + 10nlog
10
(d/d
0
) +X
σ
(4.73)
where n depends on the building and surrounding type, and X
σ
represents a normal
random variable in dB having standard deviation of σ dB.
4.9 Summary
In this chapter, three principal propagation models have been identified: free-space
propagation, reflection and diffraction, which are common terrestrial models and
these mainly explains the large scale path loss. Regarding path-loss, one important
factor introduced in this chapter is log-distance path loss model. These, however,
may be insignificant when we consider the small-scale rapid path losses. This is
discussed in the next chapter.
4.10 References
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
2. S. Haykin and M. Moher, Modern Wireless Communications. Singapore: Pear-
son Education, Inc., 2002.
73
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
3. J. W. Mark and W. Zhuang, Wireless Communications and Networking. New
Delhi: PHI, 2005.
74
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 5
Multipath Wave Propagation
and Fading
5.1 Multipath Propagation
In wireless telecommunications, multipath is the propagation phenomenon that re-
sults in radio signals reaching the receiving antenna by two or more paths. Causes
of multipath include atmospheric ducting, ionospheric reflection and refraction, and
reflection from water bodies and terrestrial objects such as mountains and buildings.
The effects of multipath include constructive and destructive interference, and phase
shifting of the signal. In digital radio communications (such as GSM) multipath can
cause errors and affect the quality of communications. We discuss all the related
issues in this chapter.
5.2 Multipath & Small-Scale Fading
Multipath signals are received in a terrestrial environment, i.e., where different forms
of propagation are present and the signals arrive at the receiver from transmitter via
a variety of paths. Therefore there would be multipath interference, causing multi-
path fading. Adding the effect of movement of either Tx or Rx or the surrounding
clutter to it, the received overall signal amplitude or phase changes over a small
amount of time. Mainly this causes the fading.
75
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
5.2.1 Fading
The term fading, or, small-scale fading, means rapid fluctuations of the amplitudes,
phases, or multipath delays of a radio signal over a short period or short travel
distance. This might be so severe that large scale radio propagation loss effects
might be ignored.
5.2.2 Multipath Fading Effects
In principle, the following are the main multipath effects:
1. Rapid changes in signal strength over a small travel distance or time interval.
2. Random frequency modulation due to varying Doppler shifts on different mul-
tipath signals.
3. Time dispersion or echoes caused by multipath propagation delays.
5.2.3 Factors Influencing Fading
The following physical factors influence small-scale fading in the radio propagation
channel:
(1) Multipath propagation – Multipath is the propagation phenomenon that re-
sults in radio signals reaching the receiving antenna by two or more paths.
The effects of multipath include constructive and destructive interference, and
phase shifting of the signal.
(2) Speed of the mobile – The relative motion between the base station and the
mobile results in random frequency modulation due to different doppler shifts
on each of the multipath components.
(3) Speed of surrounding objects – If objects in the radio channel are in mo-
tion, they induce a time varying Doppler shift on multipath components. If
the surrounding objects move at a greater rate than the mobile, then this effect
dominates fading.
(4) Transmission Bandwidth of the signal – If the transmitted radio signal
bandwidth is greater than the “bandwidth” of the multipath channel (quanti-
fied by coherence bandwidth), the received signal will be distorted.
76
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
5.3 Types of Small-Scale Fading
The type of fading experienced by the signal through a mobile channel depends
on the relation between the signal parameters (bandwidth, symbol period) and the
channel parameters (rms delay spread and Doppler spread). Hence we have four
different types of fading. There are two types of fading due to the time dispersive
nature of the channel.
5.3.1 Fading Effects due to Multipath Time Delay Spread
Flat Fading
Such types of fading occurs when the bandwidth of the transmitted signal is less than
the coherence bandwidth of the channel. Equivalently if the symbol period of the
signal is more than the rms delay spread of the channel, then the fading is flat fading.
So we can say that flat fading occurs when
B
S
¸B
C
(5.1)
where B
S
is the signal bandwidth and B
C
is the coherence bandwidth. Also
T
S
¸σ
τ
(5.2)
where T
S
is the symbol period and σ
τ
is the rms delay spread. And in such a case,
mobile channel has a constant gain and linear phase response over its bandwidth.
Frequency Selective Fading
Frequency selective fading occurs when the signal bandwidth is more than the co-
herence bandwidth of the mobile radio channel or equivalently the symbols duration
of the signal is less than the rms delay spread.
B
S
¸B
C
(5.3)
and
T
S
¸σ
τ
(5.4)
77
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
At the receiver, we obtain multiple copies of the transmitted signal, all attenuated
and delayed in time. The channel introduces inter symbol interference. A rule of
thumb for a channel to have flat fading is if
σ
τ
T
S
≤ 0.1 (5.5)
5.3.2 Fading Effects due to Doppler Spread
Fast Fading
In a fast fading channel, the channel impulse response changes rapidly within the
symbol duration of the signal. Due to Doppler spreading, signal undergoes frequency
dispersion leading to distortion. Therefore a signal undergoes fast fading if
T
S
¸T
C
(5.6)
where T
C
is the coherence time and
B
S
¸B
D
(5.7)
where B
D
is the Doppler spread. Transmission involving very low data rates suffer
from fast fading.
Slow Fading
In such a channel, the rate of the change of the channel impulse response is much
less than the transmitted signal. We can consider a slow faded channel a channel in
which channel is almost constant over atleast one symbol duration. Hence
T
S
¸T
C
(5.8)
and
B
S
¸B
D
(5.9)
We observe that the velocity of the user plays an important role in deciding whether
the signal experiences fast or slow fading.
78
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.1: Illustration of Doppler effect.
5.3.3 Doppler Shift
The Doppler effect (or Doppler shift) is the change in frequency of a wave for an
observer moving relative to the source of the wave. In classical physics (waves in
a medium), the relationship between the observed frequency f and the emitted
frequency f
o
is given by:
f =
_
v ±v
r
v ±v
s
_
f
0
(5.10)
where v is the velocity of waves in the medium, v
s
is the velocity of the source
relative to the medium and v
r
is the velocity of the receiver relative to the medium.
In mobile communication, the above equation can be slightly changed according
to our convenience since the source (BS) is fixed and located at a remote elevated
level from ground. The expected Doppler shift of the EM wave then comes out to
be ±
v
r
c
f
o
or, ±
v
r
λ
. As the BS is located at an elevated place, a cos φ factor would
also be multiplied with this. The exact scenario, as given in Figure 5.1, is illustrated
below.
Consider a mobile moving at a constant velocity v, along a path segment length
d between points A and B, while it receives signals from a remote BS source S. The
difference in path lengths traveled by the wave from source S to the mobile at points
A and B is ∆l = d cos θ = v∆t cos θ, where ∆t is the time required for the mobile
to travel from A to B, and θ is assumed to be the same at points A and B since the
79
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
source is assumed to be very far away. The phase change in the received signal due
to the difference in path lengths is therefore
∆ϕ =
2π∆l
λ
=
2πv∆t
λ
cos θ (5.11)
and hence the apparent change in frequency, or Doppler shift (f
d
) is
f
d
=
1

.
∆ϕ
∆t
=
v
λ
. cos θ. (5.12)
Example 1
An aircraft is heading towards a control tower with 500 kmph, at an elevation of
20

. Communication between aircraft and control tower occurs at 900 MHz. Find
out the expected Doppler shift.
Solution As given here,
v = 500 kmph
the horizontal component of the velocity is
v

= v cos θ = 500 cos 20

= 130 m/s
Hence, it can be written that
λ =
900 10
6
3 10
8
=
1
3
m
f
d
=
130
1
/
3
= 390 Hz
If the plane banks suddenly and heads for other direction, the Doppler shift change
will be 390 Hz to −390 Hz.
5.3.4 Impulse Response Model of a Multipath Channel
Mobile radio channel may be modeled as a linear filter with time varying impulse
response in continuous time. To show this, consider time variation due to receiver
motion and time varying impulse response h(d, t) and x(t), the transmitted signal.
The received signal y(d, t) at any position d would be
y(d, t) = x(t) ∗ h(d, t) =
_

−∞
x(τ) h(d, t −τ) dτ (5.13)
For a causal system: h(d, t) = 0, for t < 0 and for a stable system
_

−∞
[h(d, t)[ dt <

80
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Applying causality condition in the above equation, h(d, t − τ) = 0 for t − τ < 0
⇒τ > t, i.e., the integral limits are changed to
y(d, t) =
_
t
−∞
x(τ) h(d, t −τ) dτ.
Since the receiver moves along the ground at a constant velocity v, the position of
the receiver is d = vt, i.e.,
y(vt, t) =
_
t
−∞
x(τ) h(vt, t −τ) dτ.
Since v is a constant, y(vt, t) is just a function of t. Therefore the above equation
can be expressed as
y(t) =
_
t
−∞
x(τ) h(vt, t −τ) dτ = x(t) ∗ h(vt, t) = x(t) ∗ h(d, t) (5.14)
It is useful to discretize the multipath delay axis τ of the impulse response into equal
time delay segments called excess delay bins, each bin having a time delay width
equal to ( τ
i+1
−τ
i
) = ∆τ and τ
i
= i∆τ for i ∈ ¦0, 1, 2, ..N −1¦, where N represents
the total number of possible equally-spaced multipath components, including the
first arriving component. The useful frequency span of the model is
2
/
∆τ
. The
model may be used to analyze transmitted RF signals having bandwidth less than
2
/
∆τ
.
If there are N multipaths, maximum excess delay is given by N∆τ.
¦y(t) = x(t) ∗ h(t, τ
i
)[i = 0, 1, ...N −1¦ (5.15)
Bandpass channel impulse response model is
x(t) →h(t, τ) = Re¦h
b
(t, τ)e

c
t
→y(t) = Re¦r(t)e

c
t
¦ (5.16)
Baseband equivalent channel impulse response model is given by
c(t) →
1
2
h
b
(t, τ) →r(t) = c(t) ∗
1
2
h
b
(t, τ) (5.17)
Average power is
x
2
(t) =
1
2
[c(t)[
2
(5.18)
81
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
The baseband impulse response of a multipath channel can be expressed as
h
b
(t, τ) =
N−1

i=0
a
i
(t, τ) exp[j(2πf
c
τ
i
(t) +ϕ
i
(t, τ))]δ(τ −τ
i
(t)) (5.19)
where a
i
(t, τ) and τ
i
(t) are the real amplitudes and excess delays, respectively, of
the ith multipath component at time t. The phase term 2πf
c
τ
i
(t) +ϕ
i
(t, τ) in the
above equation represents the phase shift due to free space propagation of the ith
multipath component, plus any additional phase shifts which are encountered in the
channel.
If the channel impulse response is wide sense stationary over a small-scale time or
distance interval, then
h
b
(τ) =
N−1

i=0
a
i
exp[jθ
i
]δ(τ −τ
i
) (5.20)
For measuring h
b
(τ), we use a probing pulse to approximate δ(t) i.e.,
p(t) ≈ δ(t −τ) (5.21)
Power delay profile is taken by spatial average of [h
b
(t, τ)[
2
over a local area. The
received power delay profile in a local area is given by
p(τ) ≈ k[h
b
(t; τ)[
2
. (5.22)
5.3.5 Relation Between Bandwidth and Received Power
In actual wireless communications, impulse response of a multipath channel is mea-
sured using channel sounding techniques. Let us consider two extreme channel
sounding cases.
Consider a pulsed, transmitted RF signal
x(t) = Re¦p(t)e
j2πf
c
t
¦ (5.23)
where p(t) =
_

max
T
bb
for 0 ≤ t ≤ T
bb
and 0 elsewhere. The low pass channel output
is
r(t) =
1
2
N−1

i=0
a
i
exp[jθ
i
]p(t −τ
i
)
=
N−1

i=0
a
i
exp[jθ
i
].
_
τ
max
T
bb
rect(t −
T
b
2
−τ
i
).
82
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.2: A generic transmitted pulsed RF signal.
The received power at any time t
0
is
[r(t
0
)[
2
=
1
τ
max
τ
max
_
0
r(t)r

(t)dt
=
1
τ
max
τ
max
_
0
1
4
_
N−1

k=0
a
2
k
(t
0
)p
2
(t −τ
k
)
_
dt
=
1
τ
max
N−1

k=0
a
2
k
(t
0
)
τ
max
_
0
__
τ
max
T
bb
rect(t −
T
b
2
−τ
i
)
_
2
dt
=
N−1

k=0
a
2
k
(t
0
).
Interpretation: If the transmitted signal is able to resolve the multipaths, then
average small-scale receiver power is simply sum of average powers received from
each multipath components.
E
a,θ
[P
WB
] = E
a,θ
[
N−1

i=0
[a
i
exp(jθ
i
)[
2
] ≈
N−1

i=0
a
2
i
(5.24)
Now instead of a pulse, consider a CW signal, transmitted into the same channel
and for simplicity, let the envelope be c(t) = 2. Then
r(t) =
N−1

i=0
a
i
exp[jθ
i
(t, τ)] (5.25)
83
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
and the instantaneous power is
[r(t)[
2
= [
N−1

i=0
a
i
exp[jθ
i
(t, τ)][
2
(5.26)
Over local areas, a
i
varies little but θ
i
varies greatly resulting in large fluctuations.
E
a,θ
[P
CW
] = E
a,θ
[
N−1

i=0
[a
i
exp(jθ
i
)[
2
]

N−1

i=0
a
2
i
+ 2
N−1

i=0
N

i,j=i
r
ij
cos(θ
i
−θ
j
)
where r
ij
= E
a
[a
i
a
j
].
If, r
ij
= cos(θ
i
−θ
j
) = 0, then E
a,θ
[P
CW
] = E
a,θ
[P
WB
]. This occurs if multipath
components are uncorrelated or if multipath phases are i.i.d over [0, 2π].
Bottomline:
1. If the signal bandwidth is greater than multipath channel bandwidth then
fading effects are negligible
2. If the signal bandwidth is less than the multipath channel bandwidth, large
fading occurs due to phase shift of unresolved paths.
5.3.6 Linear Time Varying Channels (LTV)
The time variant transfer function(TF) of an LTV channel is FT of h(t, τ) w.r.t. τ.
H(f, t) = FT[h(τ, t)] =
_

−∞
h(τ, t)e
−j2πfτ
dτ (5.27)
h(τ, t) = FT
−1
[H(f, t)] =
_

−∞
H(f, t)e
j2πfτ
df (5.28)
The received signal
r(t) =
_

−∞
R(f, t)e
j2πft
df (5.29)
where R(f, t) = H(f, t)X(f).
For flat fading channel, h(τ, t) = Z(t)δ(τ −τ
i
) where Z(t) =

α
n
(t)e
−j2πf
c
τ
n
(t)
. In
this case, the received signal is
r(t) =
_

−∞
h(τ, t)x(t −τ) dτ = Z(t)x(t −τ
i
) (5.30)
84
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.3: Relationship among different channel functions.
where the channel becomes multiplicative.
Doppler spread functions:
H(f, ν) = FT[H(f, t)] =
_

−∞
H(f, t)e
−j2πνt
dt (5.31)
and
H(f, t) = FT
−1
[H(f, ν)] =
_

−∞
H(f, ν)e
j2πνt
dν (5.32)
Delay Doppler spread:
H(τ, ν) = FT[h(τ, t)] =
_

−∞
h(τ, t)e
−j2πνt
dt (5.33)
5.3.7 Small-Scale Multipath Measurements
Direct RF Pulse System
A wideband pulsed bistatic radar usually transmits a repetitive pulse of width T
bb
s,
and uses a receiver with a wide bandpass filter (BW =
2
T
bb
Hz). The signal is then
amplified, envelope detected, and displayed and stored on a high speed oscilloscope.
Immediate measurements of the square of the channel impulse response convolved
with the probing pulse can be taken. If the oscilloscope is set on averaging mode,
then this system provides a local average power delay profile.
85
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.4: Direct RF pulsed channel IR measurement.
This system is subject to interference noise. If the first arriving signal is blocked
or fades, severe fading occurs, and it is possible the system may not trigger properly.
Frequency Domain Channel Sounding
In this case we measure the channel in the frequency domain and then convert it
into time domain impulse response by taking its inverse discrete Fourier transform
(IDFT). A vector network analyzer controls a swept frequency synthesizer. An S-
parameter test set is used to monitor the frequency response of the channel. The
sweeper scans a particular frequency band, centered on the carrier, by stepping
through discrete frequencies. The number and spacing of the frequency step impacts
the time resolution of the impulse response measurement. For each frequency step,
the S-parameter test set transmits a known signal level at port 1 and monitors
the received signal at port 2. These signals allow the analyzer to measure the
complex response, S
21
(ω), of the channel over the measured frequency range. The
S
21
(ω) measure is the measure of the signal flow from transmitter antenna to receiver
86
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.5: Frequency domain channel IR measurement.
antenna (i.e., the channel).
This system is suitable only for indoor channel measurements. This system is
also non real-time. Hence, it is not suitable for time-varying channels unless the
sweep times are fast enough.
5.4 Multipath Channel Parameters
To compare the different multipath channels and to quantify them, we define some
parameters. They all can be determined from the power delay profile. These pa-
rameters can be broadly divided in to two types.
5.4.1 Time Dispersion Parameters
These parameters include the mean excess delay,rms delay spread and excess delay
spread. The mean excess delay is the first moment of the power delay profile and is
87
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
defined as
¯ τ =

a
2
k
τ
k

a
2
k
=

P(τ
k

k

P(τ
k
)
(5.34)
where a
k
is the amplitude, τ
k
is the excess delay and P(τ
k
) is the power of the
individual multipath signals.
The mean square excess delay spread is defined as
¯
τ
2
=

P(τ
k

2
k

P(τ
k
)
(5.35)
Since the rms delay spread is the square root of the second central moment of the
power delay profile, it can be written as
σ
τ
=
_
¯
τ
2
−(¯ τ)
2
(5.36)
As a rule of thumb, for a channel to be flat fading the following condition must be
satisfied
σ
τ
T
S
≤ 0.1 (5.37)
where T
S
is the symbol duration. For this case, no equalizer is required at the
receiver.
Example 2
1. Sketch the power delay profile and compute RMS delay spread for the follow-
ing:
P(τ) =
1

n=0
δ(τ −n 10
−6
) (in watts)
2. If BPSK modulation is used, what is the maximum bit rate that can be sent
through the channel without needing an equalizer?
Solution
1. P(0) = 1 watt, P(1) = 1 watt
τ =
(1)(0) + (1)(1)
1 + 1
= 0.5µs
τ
2
= 0.5µs
2
σ
τ
= 0.5µs
88
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
2. For flat fading channel, we need
σ
τ
T
s
0.1 ⇒R
s
=
1
T
s
= 0.2 10
4
= 200 kbps
For BPSK we need R
b
= R
s
= 200 kbps
Example 3 A simple delay spread bound: Feher’s upper bound
Consider a simple worst-case delay spread scenario as shown in figure below.
Here d
min
= d
0
and d
max
= d
i
+d
r
Transmitted power = P
T
, Minimum received power = P
R
min
= P
Threshold
P
R
min
P
T
= G
T
G
R
(
λ
4πd
max
)
2
Put G
T
= G
R
= 1 i.e., considering omni-directional unity gain antennas
d
max
= (
λ

)(
P
T
P
R
min
)
1
2
τ
max
=
d
max
c
= (
λ
4πc
)(
P
T
P
R
min
)
1
2
τ
max
= (
1
4πf
)(
P
T
P
R
min
)
1
2
5.4.2 Frequency Dispersion Parameters
To characterize the channel in the frequency domain, we have the following param-
eters.
89
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
(1) Coherence bandwidth: it is a statistical measure of the range of frequencies
over which the channel can be considered to pass all the frequency components with
almost equal gain and linear phase. When this condition is satisfied then we say the
channel to be flat.
Practically, coherence bandwidth is the minimum separation over which the two
frequency components are affected differently. If the coherence bandwidth is con-
sidered to be the bandwidth over which the frequency correlation function is above
0.9, then it is approximated as
B
C

1
50σ
τ
. (5.38)
However, if the coherence bandwidth is considered to be the bandwidth over which
the frequency correlation function is above 0.5, then it is defined as
B
C

1

τ
. (5.39)
The coherence bandwidth describes the time dispersive nature of the channel in the
local area. A more convenient parameter to study the time variation of the channel
is the coherence time. This variation may be due to the relative motion between the
mobile and the base station or the motion of the objects in the channel.
(2) Coherence time: this is a statistical measure of the time duration over which
the channel impulse response is almost invariant. When channel behaves like this,
it is said to be slow faded. Essentially it is the minimum time duration over which
two received signals are affected differently. For an example, if the coherence time
is considered to be the bandwidth over which the time correlation is above 0.5, then
it can be approximated as
T
C

9
16πf
m
(5.40)
where f
m
is the maximum doppler spread given be f
m
=
ν
λ
.
Another parameter is the Doppler spread (B
D
) which is the range of frequencies
over which the received Doppler spectrum is non zero.
5.5 Statistical models for multipath propagation
Many multipath models have been proposed to explain the observed statistical na-
ture of a practical mobile channel. Both the first order and second order statistics
90
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.6: Two ray NLoS multipath, resulting in Rayleigh fading.
have been examined in order to find out the effective way to model and combat the
channel effects. The most popular of these models are Rayleigh model, which de-
scribes the NLoS propagation. The Rayleigh model is used to model the statistical
time varying nature of the received envelope of a flat fading envelope. Below, we
discuss about the main first order and second order statistical models.
5.5.1 NLoS Propagation: Rayleigh Fading Model
Let there be two multipath signals S
1
and S
2
received at two different time instants
due to the presence of obstacles as shown in Figure 5.6. Now there can either be
constructive or destructive interference between the two signals.
Let E
n
be the electric field and Θ
n
be the relative phase of the various multipath
signals.So we have
˜
E =
N

n=1
E
n
e

n
(5.41)
Now if N→ ∞(i.e. are sufficiently large number of multipaths) and all the E
n
are
IID distributed, then by Central Limit Theorem we have,
lim
N→∞
˜
E = lim
N→∞
N

n=1
E
n
e

n
(5.42)
= Z
r
+jZ
i
= Re

(5.43)
91
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
where Z
r
and Z
i
are Gaussian Random variables. For the above case
R =
_
Z
2
r
+Z
2
i
(5.44)
and
φ = tan
−1
Z
i
Z
r
(5.45)
For all practical purposes we assume that the relative phase Θ
n
is uniformaly dis-
tributed.
E[e

n
] =
1


_
0
e

dθ = 0 (5.46)
It can be seen that E
n
and Θ
n
are independent. So,
E[
˜
E] = E[

E
n
e

n
] = 0 (5.47)
E[
¸
¸
¸
˜
E
¸
¸
¸
2
] = E[

E
n
e

n

E

n
e
−jθ
n
] = E[

m

n
E
n
E
m
e
j(θ
n
−θ
m
)
] =
N

n=1
E
2
n
= P
0
(5.48)
where P
0
is the total power obtained. To find the Cumulative Distribution Func-
tion(CDF) of R, we proceed as follows.
F
R
(r) = P
r
(R ≤ r) =
_
A
_
f
Z
i
,Z
r
(z
i
, z
r
)dz
i
dz
r
(5.49)
where A is determined by the values taken by the dummy variable r. Let Z
i
and Z
r
be zero mean Gaussian RVs. Hence the CDF can be written as
F
R
(r) =
_
A
_
1

2πσ
2
e
−(Z
2
r
+Z
2
i
)

2
dZ
i
dZ
r
(5.50)
Let Z
r
= p cos(Θ) and Z
i
= p sin(Θ) So we have
F
R
(r) =

_
0

_
0
1

2πσ
2
e
−p
2

2
pdpdθ (5.51)
= 1 −e
−r
2

2
(5.52)
Above equation is valid for all r ≥ 0. The pdf can be written as
f
R
(r) =
r
σ
2
e

r
2

2
(5.53)
and is shown in Figure 5.7 with different σ values. This equation too is valid for all
r ≥ 0. Above distribution is known as Rayleigh distribution and it has been derived
92
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.7: Rayleigh probability density function.
for slow fading. However, if f
D
¸ 1 Hz, we call it as Quasi-stationary Rayleigh
fading. We observe the following:
E[R] =
_
π
2
σ (5.54)
E[R
2
] = 2σ
2
(5.55)
var[R] = (2 −
π
2

2
(5.56)
median[R] = 1.77σ. (5.57)
5.5.2 LoS Propagation: Rician Fading Model
Rician Fading is the addition to all the normal multipaths a direct LOS path.
Figure 5.8: Ricean probability density function.
93
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
f
R
(r) =
r
σ
2
e
−(r
2
+A
2
)

2
I
0
(
A
r
σ
2
) (5.58)
for all A ≥ 0 and r ≥ 0. Here A is the peak amplitude of the dominant signal and
I
0
(.) is the modified Bessel function of the first kind and zeroth order.
A factor K is defined as
K
dB
= 10 log
A
2

2
(5.59)
As A →0 then K
dB
→∞.
5.5.3 Generalized Model: Nakagami Distribution
A generalization of the Rayleigh and Rician fading is the Nakagami distribution.
Figure 5.9: Nakagami probability density function.
Its pdf is given as,
f
R
(r) =
2r
m−1
Γ(m)
(
m
m

m
)e
−mr
2

(5.60)
where,
Γ(m) is the gamma function
Ω is the average signal power and
m is the fading factor.It is always greater than or equal to 0.5.
When m=1, Nakagami model is the Rayleigh model.
When
m =
(M + 1)
2
2M + 1
94
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.10: Schematic representation of level crossing with a Rayleigh fading enve-
lope at 10 Hz Doppler spread.
where
M =
A

Nakagami fading is the Rician fading.
As m →∞ Nakagami fading is the impulse channel and no fading occurs.
5.5.4 Second Order Statistics
To design better error control codes, we have two important second order param-
eters of fading model, namely the level crossing rate (LCR) and average fade
duration (AFD). These parameters can be utilized to assess the speed of the user
by measuring them through the reverse channel. The LCR is the expected rate at
which the Rayleigh fading envelope normalized to the local rms amplitude crosses a
specific level ’R’ in a positive going direction.
N
R
=

_
0
˙ rp(R, ˙ r)d ˙ r =

2πf
D
ρe
−ρ
2
(5.61)
where ˙ r is the time derivative of r(t), f
D
is the maximum Doppler shift and ρ is the
value of the specified level R, normalized to the local rms amplitude of the fading
envelope.
The other important parameter, AFD, is the average period time for which the
95
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
receiver power is below a specified level R.
¯ τ =
1
N
r
P
r
(r ≤ R) (5.62)
As
P
r
(r ≤ R) =
R
_
0
p(r)dr = 1 −e
−ρ
2
, (5.63)
therefore,
¯ τ =
1 −e
−ρ
2

2πf
D
ρe
−ρ
2
(5.64)
=
e
−ρ
2
−1

2πf
D
ρ
. (5.65)
Apart from LCR, another parameter is fading rate, which is defined as the number of
times the signal envelope crosses the middle value (r
m
) in a positive going direction
per unit time. The average rate is expressed as
N(r
m
) =
2v
λ
. (5.66)
Another statistical parameter, sometimes used in the mobile communication, is
called as depth of fading. It is defined as the ratio between the minimum value
and the mean square value of the faded signal. Usually, an average value of 10% as
depth of fading gives a marginal fading scenario.
5.6 Simulation of Rayleigh Fading Models
5.6.1 Clarke’s Model: without Doppler Effect
In it, two independent Gaussian low pass noise sources are used to produce in-phase
and quadrature fading branches. This is the basic model and is useful for slow fading
channel. Also the Doppler effect is not accounted for.
5.6.2 Clarke and Gans’ Model: with Doppler Effect
In this model, the output of the Clarke’s model is passed through Doppler filter in
the RF or through two initial baseband Doppler filters for baseband processing as
shown in Figure 5.11. Here, the obtained Rayleigh output is flat faded signal but
not frequency selective.
96
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.11: Clarke and Gan’s model for Rayleigh fading generation using quadra-
ture amplitude modulation with (a) RF Doppler filter, and, (b) baseband Doppler
filter.
5.6.3 Rayleigh Simulator with Wide Range of Channel Conditions
To get a frequency selective output we have the following simulator through which
both the frequency selective and flat faded Rayleigh signal may be obtained. This
is achieved through varying the parameters a
i
and τ
i
, as given in Figure 5.12.
5.6.4 Two-Ray Rayleigh Faded Model
The above model is, however, very complex and difficult to implement. So, we have
the two ray Rayleigh fading model which can be easily implemented in software as
shown in Figure 5.13.
h
b
(t) = α
1
e

1
δ(t) +α
2
e

2
δ(t −τ) (5.67)
where α
1
and α
2
are independent Rayleigh distributed and φ
1
and φ
2
are indepen-
dent and uniformaly distributed over 0 to 2π. By varying τ it is possible to create
a wide range of frequency selective fading effects.
97
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.12: Rayleigh fading model to get both the flat and frequency selective
channel conditions.
5.6.5 Saleh and Valenzuela Indoor Statistical Model
This method involved averaging the square law detected pulse response while sweep-
ing the frequency of the transmitted pulse. The model assumes that the multipath
components arrive in clusters. The amplitudes of the received components are in-
dependent Rayleigh random variables with variances that decay exponentially with
cluster delay as well as excess delay within a cluster. The clusters and multipath
components within a cluster form Poisson arrival processes with different rates.
5.6.6 SIRCIM/SMRCIM Indoor/Outdoor Statistical Models
SIRCIM (Simulation of Indoor Radio Channel Impulse-response Model) generates
realistic samples of small-scale indoor channel impulse response measurements. Sub-
98
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 5.13: Two-ray Rayleigh fading model.
sequent work by Huang produced SMRCIM (Simulation of Mobile Radio Channel
Impulse-response Model), a similar program that generates small-scale urban cellu-
lar and micro-cellular channel impulse responses.
5.7 Conclusion
In this chapter, the main channel impairment, i.e., fading, has been introduced which
becomes so severe sometimes that even the large scale path loss becomes insignificant
in comparison to it. Some statistical propagation models have been presented based
on the fading characteristics. Mainly the frequency selective fading, fast fading and
deep fading can be considered the major obstruction from the channel severity view
point. Certain efficient signal processing techniques to mitigate these effects will be
discussed in Chapter 7.
5.8 References
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
2. S. Haykin and M. Moher, Modern Wireless Communications. Singapore: Pear-
son Education, Inc., 2002.
3. J. W. Mark and W. Zhuang, Wireless Communications and Networking. New
Delhi: PHI, 2005.
99
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
4. K. Feher, Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum
Applications. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1995.
5. R. Blake, Wireless Communications Technology. Delmar, Singapore: Thom-
son Asia Pvt Ltd, 2004.
6. D. P. Agarwal and Q-A. Zeng, Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems.
Nelson, India: Thomson Learning, 2007.
100
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 6
Transmitter and Receiver
Techniques
6.1 Introduction
Electrical communication transmitter and receiver techniques strive toward obtain-
ing reliable communication at a low cost, with maximum utilization of the channel
resources. The information transmitted by the source is received by the destina-
tion via a physical medium called a channel. This physical medium, which may be
wired or wireless, introduces distortion, noise and interference in the transmitted
information bearing signal. To counteract these effects is one of the requirements
while designing a transmitter and receiver end technique. The other requirements
are power and bandwidth efficiency at a low implementation complexity.
6.2 Modulation
Modulation is a process of encoding information from a message source in a man-
ner suitable for transmission. It involves translating a baseband message signal to
a passband signal. The baseband signal is called the modulating signal and the
passband signal is called the modulated signal. Modulation can be done by varying
certain characteristics of carrier waves according to the message signal. Demodu-
lation is the reciprocal process of modulation which involves extraction of original
baseband signal from the modulated passband signal.
101
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.2.1 Choice of Modulation Scheme
Several factors influence the choice of a digital modulation scheme. A desirable
modulation scheme provides low bit error rates at low received signal to noise ratios,
performs well in multipath and fading conditions, occupies a minimum of bandwidth,
and is easy and cost-effective to implement. The performance of a modulation
scheme is often measured in terms of its power efficiency and bandwidth efficiency.
Power efficiency describes the ability of a modulation technique to preserve the
fidelity of the digital message at low power levels. In a digital communication system,
in order to increase noise immunity, it is necessary to increase the signal power.
Bandwidth efficiency describes the ability of a modulation scheme to accommodate
data within a limited bandwidth.
The system capacity of a digital mobile communication system is directly related
to the bandwidth efficiency of the modulation scheme, since a modulation with a
greater value of η
b
(=
R
B
) will transmit more data in a given spectrum allocation.
There is a fundamental upper bound on achievable bandwidth efficiency. Shan-
non’s channel coding theorem states that for an arbitrarily small probability of error,
the maximum possible bandwidth efficiency is limited by the noise in the channel,
and is given by the channel capacity formula
η
Bmax
=
C
B
= log
2
(1 +
S
N
) (6.1)
6.2.2 Advantages of Modulation
1. Facilitates multiple access: By translating the baseband spectrum of signals
from various users to different frequency bands, multiple users can be accom-
modated within a band of the electromagnetic spectrum.
2. Increases the range of communication: Low frequency baseband signals suffer
from attenuation and hence cannot be transmitted over long distances. So
translation to a higher frequency band results in long distance transmission.
3. Reduction in antenna size: The antenna height and aperture is inversely pro-
portional to the radiated signal frequency and hence high frequency signal
radiation result in smaller antenna size.
102
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.2.3 Linear and Non-linear Modulation Techniques
The mathematical relation between the message signal (applied at the modulator
input) and the modulated signal (obtained at the modulator output) decides whether
a modulation technique can be classified as linear or non-linear. If this input-output
relation satisfies the principle of homogeneity and superposition then the modulation
technique is said to be linear. The principle of homogeneity states that if the input
signal to a system (in our case the system is a modulator) is scaled by a factor then
the output must be scaled by the same factor. The principle of superposition states
that the output of a linear system due to many simultaneously applied input signals
is equal to the summation of outputs obtained when each input is applied one at a
time.
For example an amplitude modulated wave consists of the addition two terms: the
message signal multiplied with the carrier and the carrier itself. If m(t) is the
message signal and s
AM
(t) is the modulated signal given by:
s
AM
(t) = A
c
[1 +km(t)] cos(2πf
c
t) (6.2)
Then,
1. From the principle of homogeneity: Let us scale the input by a factor a. So
m(t) = am
1
(t) and the corresponding output becomes :
s
AM1
(t) = A
c
[1 +am
1
(t)] cos(2πf
c
t) (6.3)
,= as
AM1
(t)
2. From the principle of superposition: Let m(t) = m
1
(t) + m
2
(t) be applied
simultaneously at the input of the modulator. The resulting output is:
s
AM
(t) = A
c
[1 +m
1
(t) +m
2
(t)] cos(2πf
c
t) (6.4)
,= s
AM1
(t) +s
AM2
(t)
= A
c
[2 +m
1
(t) +m
2
(t)] cos(2πf
c
t)
Here, s
AM1
(t) and s
AM2
(t) are the outputs obtained when m
1
(t) and m
2
(t)
are applied one at a time.
Hence AM is a nonlinear technique but DSBSC modulation is a linear technique
since it satisfies both the above mentioned principles.
103
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.2.4 Amplitude and Angle Modulation
Depending on the parameter of the carrier (amplitude or angle) that is changed
in accordance with the message signal, a modulation scheme can be classified as
an amplitude or angle modulation. Amplitude modulation involves variation of
amplitude of the carrier wave with changes in the message signal. Angle modulation
varies a sinusoidal carrier signal in such a way that the angle of the carrier is varied
according to the amplitude of the modulating baseband signal.
6.2.5 Analog and Digital Modulation Techniques
The nature of the information generating source classifies a modulation technique as
an analog or digital modulation technique. When analog messages generated from
a source passe through a modulator, the resulting amplitude or angle modulation
technique is called analog modulation. When digital messages undergo modulation
the resulting modulation technique is called digital modulation.
6.3 Signal Space Representation of Digitally Modulated
Signals
Any arbitrary signal can be expressed as the linear combination of a set of orthog-
onal signals or equivalently as a point in an M dimensional signal space, where M
denotes the cardinality of the set of orthogonal signals. These orthogonal signals are
normalized with respect to their energy content to yield an orthonormal signal set
having unit energy. These orthonormal signals are independent of each other and
form a basis set of the signal space.
Generally a digitally modulated signal s(t), having a symbol duration T, is ex-
pressed as a linear combination of two orthonormal signals φ
1
(t) and φ
2
(t), consti-
tuting the two orthogonal axis in this two dimensional signal space and is expressed
mathematically as,
s(t) = s
1
φ
1
(t) +s
2
φ
2
(t) (6.5)
where φ
1
(t) and φ
2
(t) are given by,
φ
1
(t) =
_
2
T
cos(2πf
c
t) (6.6)
104
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
φ
2
(t) =
_
2
T
cos(2πf
c
t) (6.7)
The coefficients s
1
and s
2
form the coordinates of the signal s(t) in the two dimen-
sional signal space.
6.4 Complex Representation of Linear Modulated Sig-
nals and Band Pass Systems
A band-pass signal s(t) can be resolved in terms of two sinusoids in phase quadrature
as follows:
s(t) = s
I
(t)cos(2πf
c
t) −s
Q
(t)sin(2πf
c
t) (6.8)
Hence s
I
(t) and s
Q
(t) are known as the in-phase and quadrature-phase components
respectively. When s
I
(t) and s
Q
(t) are incorporated in the formation of the following
complex signal,
˜ s(t) = s
I
(t) +s
Q
(t) (6.9)
then s(t) can be expressed in a more compact form as:
s(t) = Re¦˜ s(t)e
(j2πf
c
t)
¦ (6.10)
where ˜ s(t) is called the complex envelope of s(t).
Analogously, band-pass systems characterized by an impulse response h(t) can
be expressed in terms of its in-phase and quadrature-phase components as:
h(t) = h
I
(t)cos(2πf
c
t) −h
Q
(t)sin(2πf
c
t) (6.11)
The complex baseband model for the impulse response therefore becomes,
˜
h(t) = h
I
(t) +h
Q
(t) (6.12)
h(t) can therefore be expressed in terms of its complex envelope as
h(t) = Re¦
˜
h(t)e
j2πf
c
t
¦. (6.13)
When s(t) passes through h(t), then in the complex baseband domain, the output
˜ r(t) of the bandpass system is given by the following convolution
˜ r(t) =
1
2
˜ s(t) ⊗
˜
h(t) (6.14)
105
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.5 Linear Modulation Techniques
6.5.1 Amplitude Modulation (DSBSC)
Generally, in amplitude modulation, the amplitude of a high frequency carrier signal,
cos(2πf
c
t), is varied in accordance to the instantaneous amplitude of the modulat-
ing message signal m(t). The resulting modulated carrier or AM signal can be
represented as:
s
AM
(t) = A
c
[1 +km(t)] cos(2πf
c
t). (6.15)
The modulation index k of an AM signal is defined as the ratio of the peak message
signal amplitude to the peak carrier amplitude. For a sinusoidal modulating signal
m(t) =
A
m
A
c
cos(2πf
m
t), the modulation index is given by
k =
A
m
A
c
. (6.16)
This is a nonlinear technique and can be made linear by multiplying the carrier with
the message signal.The resulting modulation scheme is known as DSBSC modula-
tion. In DSBSC the amplitude of the transmitted signal, s(t), varies linearly with
the modulating digital signal, m(t). Linear modulation techniques are bandwidth
efficient and hence are very attractive for use in wireless communication systems
where there is an increasing demand to accommodate more and more users within
a limited spectrum. The transmitted signal DSBSC signal s(t) can be expressed as:
s(t) = Am(t)exp(j2πf
c
t). (6.17)
If m(t) is scaled by a factor of a, then s(t), the output of the modulator, is also
scaled by the same factor as seen from the above equation. Hence the principle of
homogeneity is satisfied. Moreover,
s
12
(t) = A[m
1
(t) +m
2
(t)]cos(2πf
c
t) (6.18)
= Am
1
(t)cos(2πf
c
t) +Am
2
(t)cos(2πf
c
t)
= s
1
(t) +s
2
(t)
where A is the carrier amplitude and f
c
is the carrier frequency. Hence the principle
of superposition is also satisfied. Thus DSBSC is a linear modulation technique.
AM demodulation techniques may be broadly divided into two categories: co-
herent and non-coherent demodulation. Coherent demodulation requires knowledge
106
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.1: BPSK signal constellation.
of the transmitted carrier frequency and phase at the receiver, whereas non-coherent
detection requires no phase information.
6.5.2 BPSK
In binary phase shift keying (BPSK), the phase of a constant amplitude carrier
signal is switched between two values according to the two possible signals m1 and
m2 corresponding to binary 1 and 0, respectively. Normally, the two phases are
separated by 180
o
. If the sinusoidal carrier has an amplitude A, and energy per bit
E
o
=
1
2
A
2
c
T
b
then the transmitted BPSK signal is
s
BPSK
(t) = m(t)
¸
2E
b
T
b
cos(2πf
c
t +θ
c
). (6.19)
A typical BPSK signal constellation diagram is shown in Figure 6.1.
The probability of bit error for many modulation schemes in an AWGN channel
is found using the Q-function of the distance between the signal points. In case of
BPSK,
P
eBPSK
= Q(
¸
2E
b
N
0
). (6.20)
6.5.3 QPSK
The Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a 4-ary PSK signal. The phase of
the carrier in the QPSK takes 1 of 4 equally spaced shifts. Although QPSK can
be viewed as a quaternary modulation, it is easier to see it as two independently
modulated quadrature carriers. With this interpretation, the even (or odd) bits are
107
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.2: QPSK signal constellation.
Figure 6.3: QPSK transmitter.
used to modulate the in-phase component of the carrier, while the odd (or even)
bits are used to modulate the quadrature-phase component of the carrier.
The QPSK transmitted signal is defined by:
s
i
(t) = Acos(ωt + (i −1)π/2), i = (1, 2, 3, 4) (6.21)
and the constellation disgram is shown in Figure 6.2.
6.5.4 Offset-QPSK
As in QPSK, as shown in Figure 6.3, the NRZ data is split into two streams of odd
and even bits. Each bit in these streams has a duration of twice the bit duration,
108
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.4: DQPSK constellation diagram.
T
b
, of the original data stream. These odd (d
1
(t)) and even bit streams (d
2
(t)) are
then used to modulate two sinusoidals in phase quadrature,and hence these data
streams are also called the in-phase and and quadrature phase components. After
modulation they are added up and transmitted. The constellation diagram of Offset-
QPSK is the same as QPSK. Offset-QPSK differs from QPSK in that the d
1
(t) and
d
2
(t) are aligned such that the timing of the pulse streams are offset with respect
to each other by T
b
seconds. From the constellation diagram it is observed that a
signal point in any quadrant can take a value in the diagonally opposite quadrant
only when two pulses change their polarities together leading to an abrupt 180 degree
phase shift between adjacent symbol slots. This is prevented in O-QPSK and the
allowed phase transitions are ± 90 degree.
Abrupt phase changes leading to sudden changes in the signal amplitude in the
time domain corresponds to significant out of band high frequency components in
the frequency domain. Thus to reduce these sidelobes spectral shaping is done at
baseband. When high efficiency power amplifiers, whose non-linearity increases as
the efficiency goes high, are used then due to distortion, harmonics are generated
and this leads to what is known as spectral regrowth. Since sudden 180 degree phase
changes cannot occur in OQPSK, this problem is reduced to a certain extent.
109
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.5.5 π/4 DQPSK
The data for π/4 DQPSK like QPSK can be thought to be carried in the phase of a
single modulated carrier or on the amplitudes of a pair of quadrature carriers. The
modulated signal during the time slot of kT < t < (k + 1)T given by:
s(t) = cos(2πf
c
t +ψ
k+1
) (6.22)
Here, ψ
k+1
= ψ
k
+ ∆ψ
k
and ∆ψ
k
can take values π/4 for 00, 3π/4 for 01, −3π/4
for 11 and −π/4 for 10. This corresponds to eight points in the signal constellation
but at any instant of time only one of the four points are possible: the four points
on axis or the four points off axis. The constellation diagram along with possible
transitions are shown in Figure 6.4.
6.6 Line Coding
Specific waveforms are required to represent a zero and a one uniquely so that a
sequence of bits is coded into electrical pulses. This is known as line coding. There
are various ways to accomplish this and the different forms are summarized below.
1. Non-return to zero level (NRZ-L): 1 forces a a high while 0 forces a low.
2. Non-return to zero mark (NRZ-M): 1 forces negative and positive transitions
while 0 causes no transitions.
3. Non-return to zero space (NRZ-S): 0 forces negative and positive transitions
while 1 causes no transitions.
4. Return to zero (RZ): 1 goes high for half a period while 0 remains at zero
state.
5. Biphase-L: Manchester 1 forces positive transition while 0 forces negative tran-
sition. In case of consecutive bits of same type a transition occurs in the
beginning of the bit period.
6. Biphase-M: There is always a transition in the beginning of a bit interval. 1
forces a transition in the middle of the bit while 0 does nothing.
110
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.5: Scematic of the line coding techniques.
7. Biphase-S: There is always a transition in the beginning of a bit interval. 0
forces a transition in the middle of the bit while 1 does nothing.
8. Differential Manchester: There is always a transition in the middle of a bit
interval. 0 forces a transition in the beginning of the bit while 1 does nothing.
9. Bipolar/Alternate mark inversion (AMI): 1 forces a positive or negative pulse
for half a bit period and they alternate while 0 does nothing.
All these schemes are shown in Figure 6.5.
6.7 Pulse Shaping
Let us think about a rectangular pulse as defined in BPSK. Such a pulse is not
desirable for two fundamental reasons:
111
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.6: Rectangular Pulse
(a) the spectrum of a rectangular pulse is infinite in extent. Correspondingly, its
frequency content is also infinite. But a wireless channel is bandlimited, means it
would introduce signal distortion to such type of pulses,
(b) a wireless channel has memory due to multipath and therefore it introduces ISI.
In order to mitigate the above two effects, an efficient pulse shaping funtion or
a premodulation filter is used at the Tx side so that QoS can be maintained to the
mobile users during communication. This type of technique is called pulse shaping
technique. Below, we start with the fundamental works of Nyquist on pulse shaping
and subsequently, we would look into another type of pulse shaping technique.
6.7.1 Nyquist pulse shaping
There are a number of well known pulse shaping techniques which are used to simul-
taneously to reduce the inter-symbol effects and the spectral width of a modulated
digital signal. We discuss here about the fundamental works of Nyquist. As pulse
shaping is difficult to directly manipulate the transmitter spectrum at RF frequen-
cies, spectral shaping is usually done through baseband or IF processing.
Let the overall frequency response of a communication system (the transmitter,
channel and receiver) be denoted as H
eff
(f) and according to Nyquist it must be
given by:
H
eff
(f) =
1
f
s
rect(
f
f
s
) (6.23)
Hence, the ideal pulse shape for zero ISI, given by h
eff
(t), such that,
H
eff
(f) ↔h
eff
(t) (6.24)
112
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.7: Raised Cosine Pulse.
is given by:
h
eff
(t) =
sin(
πt
T
s
)
πt
T
s
(6.25)
(6.26)
6.7.2 Raised Cosine Roll-Off Filtering
If we take a rectangular filter with bandwidth f
0

1
2T
s
and convolve it with any
arbitrary even function Z(f) with zero magnitude outside the passband of the rect-
angular filter then a zero ISI effect would be achieved. Mathematically,
H
eff
(f) = rect(
f
f
0
) ∗ Z(f), (6.27)
h
eff
(t) =
sin(
πt
T
s
)
πt
T
s
z(t), (6.28)
z(t) =
cos(πρt/T
s
)
1 −(∆ρt/2T
s
)
2
. (6.29)
with ρ being the roll off factor ∈ [0, 1]. As ρ increases roll off in frequency domain
increases but that in time domain decreases.
6.7.3 Realization of Pulse Shaping Filters
Since h
eff
(t) is non-causal, pulse shaping filters are usually truncated within ±6T
s
about t = 0 for each symbol. Digital communication systems thus often store several
symbols at a time inside the modulator and then clock out a group of symbols by
113
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
using a look up table that represents discrete time waveforms of stored symbols.
This is the way to realize the pulse shaping filters using real time processors.
Non-Nyquist pulse shaping are also useful, which would be discussed later in this
chapter while discussing GMSK.
6.8 Nonlinear Modulation Techniques
Many practical mobile radio communications use nonlinear modulation methods,where
the amplitude of the carrier is constant,regardless of the variations in the modulating
signal.The Constant envelope family of modulations has the following advantages :
1. Power efficient class C amplifiers without introducing degradation in the spec-
tral occupancy of the transmitted signal.
2. Low out-of-band radiation of the order of -60 dB to -70dB can be achieved.
3. Limiter-discriminator detection can be used,which simplifies receiver design
and provides high immunity against random FM noise and signal fluctuations
due to Rayleigh fading.
However, even if constant envelope has many advantages it still uses more BW
than linear modulation schemes.
6.8.1 Angle Modulation (FM and PM)
There are a number of ways in which the phase of a carrier signal may be varied
in accordance with the baseband signal; the two most important classes of angle
modulation being frequency modulation and phase modulation.
Frequency modulation (FM) involves changing of the frequency of the carrier
signal according to message signal. As the information in frequency modulation is
in the frequency of modulated signal, it is a nonlinear modulation technique. In this
method, the amplitude of the carrier wave is kept constant (this is why FM is called
constant envelope). FM is thus part of a more general class of modulation known
as angle modulation.
Frequency modulated signals have better noise immunity and give better perfor-
mance in fading scenario as compared to amplitude modulation.Unlike AM, in an
114
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
FM system, the modulation index, and hence bandwidth occupancy, can be varied
to obtain greater signal to noise performance.This ability of an FM system to trade
bandwidth for SNR is perhaps the most important reason for its superiority over
AM. However, AM signals are able to occupy less bandwidth as compared to FM
signals, since the transmission system is linear.
An FM signal is a constant envelope signal, due to the fact that the envelope of
the carrier does not change with changes in the modulating signal. The constant
envelope of the transmitted signal allows efficient Class C power amplifiers to be
used for RF power amplification of FM. In AM, however, it is critical to maintain
linearity between the applied message and the amplitude of the transmitted signal,
thus linear Class A or AB amplifiers, which are not as power efficient, must be used.
FM systems require a wider frequency band in the transmitting media (generally
several times as large as that needed for AM) in order to obtain the advantages of
reduced noise and capture effect. FM transmitter and receiver equipment is also
more complex than that used by amplitude modulation systems. Although frequency
modulation systems are tolerant to certain types of signal and circuit nonlinearities,
special attention must be given to phase characteristics. Both AM and FM may be
demodulated using inexpensive noncoherent detectors. AM is easily demodulated
using an envelope detector whereas FM is demodulated using a discriminator or
slope detector. In FM the instantaneous frequency of the carrier signal is varied
linearly with the baseband message signal m(t), as shown in following equation:
s
FM
(t) = A
c
cos[2πf
c
t +θ(t)] = A
c
cos[2πf
c
t + 2πk
f
_
m(η)dη] (6.30)
where A
c
, is the amplitude of the carrier, f
c
is the carrier frequency, and k
f
is the
frequency deviation constant (measured in units of Hz/V).
Phase modulation (PM) is a form of angle modulation in which the angle θ(t) of
the carrier signal is varied linearly with the baseband message signal m(t), as shown
in equation below.
s
PM
(t) = A
c
cos(2πf
c
t +k
θ
m(t)) (6.31)
The frequency modulation index β
f
, defines the relationship between the message
amplitude and the bandwidth of the transmitted signal, and is given by
β
f
=
k
f
A
m
W
=

W
(6.32)
115
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
where A
m
is the peak value of the modulating signal, ∆f is the peak frequency
deviation of the transmitter and W is the maximum bandwidth of the modulating
signal.
The phase modulation index β
p
is given by
β
p
= k
θ
A
m
= ∆θ (6.33)
where, ∆θ is the peak phase deviation of the transmitter.
6.8.2 BFSK
In Binary Frequency Shift keying (BFSK),the frequency of constant amplitude car-
rier signal is switched between two values according to the two possible message
states (called high and low tones) corresponding to a binary 1 or 0. Depending on
how the frequency variations are imparted into the transmitted waveform,the FSK
signal will have either a discontinuous phase or continuous phase between bits. In
general, an FSK signal may be represented as
S(t) =
_
(2E
b
/T) cos(2πf
i
t). (6.34)
where T is the symbol duration and E
b
is the energy per bit.
S
i
=
_
(E
b
)φ(t). (6.35)
φ(t) =
_
(2/T) cos(2πf
i
t). (6.36)
There are two FSK signals to represent 1 and 0, i.e.,
S
1
(t) =
_
(2E
b
/T) cos(2πf
1
t +θ(0)) →1 (6.37)
S
2
(t) =
_
(2E
b
/T) cos(2πf
2
t +θ(0)) →0 (6.38)
where θ(0) sums the phase up to t = 0. Let us now consider a continuous phase
FSK as
S(t) =
_
(2E
b
/T) cos(2πf
c
t +θ(t)). (6.39)
Expressing θ(t) in terms of θ(0) with a new unknown factor h, we get
θ(t) = θ(0) ±πht/T 0 ≤ t ≤ T (6.40)
116
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
and therefore
S(t) =
¸
2E
b
T
cos(2πf
c
t ±πht/T +θ(0)) =
¸
2E
b
T
cos(2π(f
c
±h/2T)t +θ(0)).(6.41)
It shows that we can choose two frequencies f
1
and f
2
such that
f
1
= f
c
+h/2T (6.42)
f
2
= f
c
−h/2T (6.43)
for which the expression of FSK conforms to that of CPFSK. On the other hand, f
c
and h can be expressed in terms of f
1
and f
2
as
f
c
= [f
1
+f
2
]/2 (6.44)
h =
(f
1
−f
2
)
1/T
. (6.45)
Therefore, the unknown factor h can be treated as the difference between f
1
and f
2
,
normalized with respect to bit rate 1/T. It is called the deviation ratio. We know
that θ(t) −θ(0) = ±πht/T, 0 ≤ t ≤ T. If we substitute t = T, we have
θ(T) −θ(0) = ±πh where (6.46)
= πh →1 (6.47)
= −πh →0 (6.48)
This type of CPFSK is advantageous since by looking only at the phase, the trans-
mitted bit can be predicted. In Figure 6.8, we show a phase tree of such a CPFSK
signal with the transmitted bit stream of 1101000.
A special case of CPFSK is achieved with h = 0.5, and the resulting scheme is
called Minimum Shift Keying (MSK) which is used in mobile communications. In
this case, the phase differences reduce to only ±π/2 and the phase tree is called the
phase trellis. An MSK signal can also be thought as a special case of OQPSK where
the baseband rectangular pulses are replaced by half sinusoidal pulses. Spectral
characteristics of an MSK signal is shown in Figure 6.9 from which it is clear that
ACI is present in the spectrum. Hence a pulse shaping technique is required. In
order to have a compact signal spectrum as well as maintaining the constant envelope
property, we use a pulse shaping filter with
117
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.8: Phase tree of 1101000 CPFSK sequence.
Figure 6.9: Spectrum of MSK
1. a narrow BW frequency and sharp cutoff characteristics (in order to suppress
the high frequency component of the signal);
2. an impulse response with relatively low overshoot (to limit FM instant fre-
quency deviation;
3. a phase trellis with ±π/2 for odd T and 0 or π values for even T.
6.9 GMSK Scheme
GMSK is a simple modulation scheme that may be taken as a derivative of MSK.
In GMSK, the sidelobe levels of the spectrum are further reduced by passing a non-
118
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.10: GMSK generation scheme.
return to zero (NRZ-L) data waveform through a premodulation Gaussian pulse
shaping filter. Baseband Gaussian pulse shaping smoothes the trajectory of the
MSK signals and hence stabilizes instantaneous frequency variations over time. This
has the effect of considerably reducing the sidelobes in the transmitted spectrum.
A GMSK generation scheme with NRZ-L data is shown in Figure 6.10 and a receiver
of the same scheme with some MSI gates is shown in Figure 6.11.
6.10 GMSK Generator
The GMSK premodulation filter has characteristic equation given by
H(f) = exp(−(ln 2/2)(f/B)
2
) (6.49)
H(f) = exp(−(αf)
2
)
where,
(α)
2
= ln 2/2(1/B)
2
. (6.50)
The premodulation Gaussian filtering introduces ISI in the transmitted signal, but
it can be shown that the degradation is not that great if the 3dB bandwidth-bit
duration product (BT) is greater than 0.5.
Spectrum of GMSK scheme is shown in Figure 6.12. From this figure, it is evident
that when we are decreasing BT product, the out of band response decreases but
119
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.11: A simple GMSK receiver.
on the other hand irreducible error rate of the LPF for ISI increases. Therefore, a
compromise between these two is required.
Problem: Find the 3dB BW for a Gaussian LPF used to produce 0.25 GMSK
with a channel data rate Rb=270 kbps.What is the 90 percent power BW of the RF
filter?
Solution: From the problem statement it is clear that
T = 1/R
b
= 1/270 ∗ (10
3
) = 3.7µsec (6.51)
Solving for B where BT = 0.25,
B = 0.25/T = 67.567kHz (6.52)
Thus the 3 - dB bandwidth is 67.567 kHz. We use below table fig 6 to find out that
90 % power bandwidth is 0.57 R
b
.
90 % RF BW = 0.57R
b
= 153.9 kHz.
120
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.12: Spectrum of GMSK scheme.
6.11 Two Practical Issues of Concern
6.11.1 Inter Channel Interference
In FDMA, subscribers are allotted frequency slots called channels in a given band
of the electromagnetic spectrum. The side lobes generated due to the transmission
of a symbol in a particular channel overlaps with the channels placed adjacently.
This is because of the fact that transmission of a time limited pulse leads to spectral
spreading in the frequency domain. During simultaneous use of adjacent channels,
when there is significant amount of power present in the side lobes, this kind of
interference becomes so severe that the required symbol in a particular frequency
slot is completely lost.
Moreover if two terminals transmit equal power then due to wave propagation
through different distances to the receiver, the received signal levels in the two
frequency slots will differ greatly. In such a case the side lobes of the stronger signal
will severely degrade the transmitted signal in the next frequency slot having low
power level. This is known as the near far problem.
121
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.11.2 Power Amplifier Nonlinearity
Power amplifiers may be designed as class A, class B, class AB, class C and class D.
They form an essential section of mobile radio terminals. Due to power constraints
on a transmitting terminal, an efficient power amplifier is required which can convert
most of the input power to RF power. Class A amplifier is a linear amplifier but
it has a power efficiency of only 25 %. As we go for subsequent amplifiers having
greater power efficiency, the nonlinearity of the amplifier increases.
In general, an amplifier has linear input output characteristics over a range
of input signal level, that is, it has a constant gain. However, beyond an input
threshold level, the gain of the amplifier starts decreasing. Thus the amplitude of
a signal applied at the input of an amplifier suffers from amplitude distortion and
the resulting waveform obtained at the output of the amplifier is of the form of
an amplitude modulated signal. Similarly, the phase characteristic of a practical
amplifier is not constant over all input levels and results in phase distortion of the
form of phase modulation.
The operating point of a practical amplifier is given in terms of either the input
back-off or the output back-off.
Input back −off = 10 log
1
0
_
V
in,rms
V
out,rms
_
(6.53)
Output back −off = 10 log
1
0
_
V
out,rms
V
out,rms
_
(6.54)
6.12 Receiver performance in multipath channels
For a flat fading channel, the probability of error for coherent BPSK and coherent
BFSK are respectively given as,
P
e,BPSK
=
1
2
_
1 −
_
γ
1 +γ
_
(6.55)
P
e,BFSK
=
1
2
_
1 −
_
γ
2 +γ
_
(6.56)
(6.57)
where γ is given by,
γ =
E
b
N
0
E(α
2
) (6.58)
122
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
α
2
represents the instantaneous power values of the Rayleigh fading channel and E
denotes the expectation operator.
Similarly, for differential BPSK and non coherent BFSK probability of error
expressions are
P
e,DPSK
=
1
2(1 +γ)
(6.59)
P
e,NCFSK
=
1
(2 +γ)
. (6.60)
For large values of SNR =
E
b
N
0
the error probability given above have the simplified
expression.
P
e,BPSK
=
1

(6.61)
P
e,BFSK
=
1

(6.62)
P
e,DPSK
=
1

(6.63)
P
e,NCFSK
=
1
γ
. (6.64)
From the above equations we observe that an inverse algebraic relation exists be-
tween the BER and SNR. This implies that if the required BER range is around
10
−3
to 10
−6
, then the SNR range must be around 30dB to 60dB.
6.12.1 Bit Error Rate and Symbol Error Rate
Bit error rate (P
eb
) is the same as symbol error rate (P
es
) when a symbol consists
of a single bit as in BPSK modulation. For an MPSK scheme employing gray coded
modulation, where N bits are mapped to a one of the M symbols, such that 2
N
= M,
P
eb
is given by
P
eb

P
es
log
2
M
(6.65)
And for M-ary orthogonal signalling P
eb
is given by
P
eb
=
M/2
M −1
P
es
. (6.66)
6.13 Example of a Multicarrier Modulation: OFDM
Multiplexing is an important signal processing operation in which a number of sig-
nals are combined and transmitted parallelly over a common channel. In order to
123
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
avoid interference during parallel transmission, the signals can be separated in fre-
quency and then the resulting technique is called Frequency Division Multiplexing
(FDM). In FDM, the adjacent bands are non overlapping but if overlap is allowed by
transmitting signals that are mutually orthogonal (that is, there is a precise math-
ematical relationship between the frequencies of the transmitted signals) such that
one signal has zero effect on another, then the resulting transmission technique is
known as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM).
OFDM is a technique of transmitting high bit rate data into several parallel
streams of low bit rate data. At any instant, the data transmitted simultaneously
in each of these parallel data streams is frequency modulated by carriers (called
subcarriers) which are orthogonal to each other. For high data rate communication
the bandwidth (which is limited) requirement goes on increasing as the data rate
increases or the symbol duration decreases. Thus in OFDM, instead of sending a
particular number of symbols, say P, in T seconds serially, the P symbols can be
sent in parallel with symbol duration now increased to T seconds instead of T/P
seconds as was previously.
This offers many advantages in digital data transmission through a wireless time
varying channel. The primary advantage of increasing the symbol duration is that
the channel experiences flat fading instead of frequency selective fading since it is
ensured that in the time domain the symbol duration is greater than the r.m.s.
delay spread of the channel. Viewed in the frequency domain this implies that the
bandwidth of the OFDM signal is less than coherent bandwidth of the channel.
Although the use of OFDM was initially limited to military applications due to
cost and complexity considerations, with the recent advances in large-scale high-
speed DSP, this is no longer a major problem. This technique is being used, in
digital audio broadcasting (DAB), high definition digital television broadcasting
(HDTV), digital video broadcasting terrestrial TV (DVB-T), WLAN systems based
on IEEE 802.11(a) or HiperLan2, asymmetric digital subscriber lines (ADSL) and
mobile communications. Very recently, the significance of the COFDM technique for
UWA (underwater acoustic channel) has also been indicated. Moreover related or
combined technology such as CDMA-OFDM, TDMA-OFDM, MIMO-OFDM, Vec-
tor OFDM (V-OFDM), wide-band OFDM (W-OFDM), flash OFDM (F-OFDM),
124
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
OFDMA, wavelet-OFDM have presented their great advantages in certain applica-
tion areas.
6.13.1 Orthogonality of Signals
Orthogonal signals can be viewed in the same perspective as we view vectors which
are perpendicular/orthogonal to each other. The inner product of two mutually
orthogonal vectors is equal to zero. Similarly the inner product of two orthogonal
signals is also equal to zero.
Let ψ
k
(t) = e
j2πf
k
t
and ψ
n
(t) = e
j2πf
n
t
be two complex exponential signals whose
inner product, over the time duration of T
s
, is given by:
N =
_
(i+1)T
s
iT
s
ψ
k
(t).ψ

n
(t)dt (6.67)
When this integral is evaluated, it is found that if f
k
and f
n
are integer multiples
of 1/T
s
then N equals zero. This implies that for two harmonics of an exponential
function having a fundamental frequency of 1/T
s
, the inner product becomes zero
.But if f
k
= f
n
then N equals T
s
which is nothing but the energy of the complex
exponential signal in the time duration of T
s
.
6.13.2 Mathematical Description of OFDM
Let us now consider the simultaneous or parallel transmission of P number of com-
plex symbols in the time slot of T
s
second (OFDM symbol time duration) and a set
of P orthogonal subcarriers, such that each subcarrier gets amplitude modulated
by a particular symbol from this set of P symbols. Let each orthogonal carrier
be of the form exp
_
j2πn
t
T
s
_
, where n varies as 0, 1, 2..(P − 1). Here the variable
‘n’ denotes the n
th
parallel path corresponding to the n
th
subcarrier. Mathemati-
cally, we can obtain the transmitted signal in T
s
seconds by summing up all the P
number of amplitude modulated subcarriers, thereby yielding the following equation:
p(t) =
P−1

n=0
c
n
g
n
(t)exp
_
j2πn
t
T
s
_
for 0 ≤ t ≤ T
s
(6.68)
125
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
If p(t) is sampled at t = kT
s
/P, then the resulting waveform, is:
p(k) =
P−1

n=0
c
n
g
n
(kT
s
/P)exp
_
j2πn
kT
s
/P
T
s
_
=
1

T
s
P−1

n=0
c
n
exp
_
j2πn
k
P
_
for 0 ≤ k ≤ P −1 (6.69)
This is nothing but the IDFT on the symbol block of P symbols. This can be realized
using IFFT but the constraint is that P has to be a power of 2. So at the receiver,
FFT can be done to get back the required block of symbols. This implementation is
better than using multiple oscillators for subcarrier generation which is uneconomical
and since digital technology has greatly advanced over the past few decades, IFFTs
and FFTs can be implemented easily. The frequency spectrum, therefore consists
of a set of P partially overlapping sinc pulses during any time slot of duration T
s
.
This is due to the fact that the Fourier Transform of a rectangular pulse is a sinc
function. The receiver can be visualized as consisting of a bank of demodulators,
translating each subcarrier down to DC, then integrating the resulting signal over a
symbol period to recover the raw data.
But the OFDM symbol structure so generated at the transmitter end needs to
be modified. Since inter symbol interference (ISI) is introduced by the transmission
channel due to multipaths and also due to the fact that when the bandwidth of
OFDM signal is truncated, its effect in the time domain is to cause symbol spreading
such that a part of the symbol overlaps with the adjacent symbols. In order to cope
with ISI as discussed previously the OFDM symbol duration can be increased. But
this might not be feasible from the implementation point of view specifically in terms
of FFT size and Doppler shifts.
A different approach is to keep a guard time interval between two OFDM symbols
in which part of the symbol is copied from the end of the symbol to the front and is
popularly known as the cyclic-prefix. If we denote the guard time interval as T
g
and
T
s
be the useful symbol duration, then after this cyclical extension the total symbol
duration becomes T = T
g
+ T
s
. When the guard interval is longer than the length
of the channel impulse response, or the multipath delay, then ISI can be eliminated.
However the disadvantage is the reduction in data rate or throughput and greater
power requirements at the transmitting end. The OFDM transmitter and receiver
126
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 6.13: OFDM Transmitter and Receiver Block Diagram.
sections are as given in the following diagram.
6.14 Conclusion
In this chapter, a major chunk has been devoted to digital communication systems
which obviously have certain distinction in comparison to their analog counterpart
due to their signal-space representation. The important modulation techniques for
wireless communication such as QPSK, MSK, GMSK were taken up at length. A
relatively new modulation technology, OFDM, has also been discussed. Certain
practical issues of concern are also discussed. It should be noted that albeit imple-
menting these efficient modulation techniques, the channel still introduces fading in
different ways. In order to prevent that, we need some additional signal processing
techniques mainly at the receiver side. These techniques are discussed in the next
chapter.
127
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
6.15 References
1. B. P. Lathi and Z. Ding, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems,
4th ed. NY: Oxford University Press, 2009.
2. B. Sklar, Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2005.
3. R. Blake, Electronic Communication Systems. Delmar, Singapore: Thomson
Asia Pvt Ltd, 2002.
4. J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, Communication Systems Engineering, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
5. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
6. S. Haykin and M. Moher, Modern Wireless Communications. Singapore: Pear-
son Education, Inc., 2002.
7. W. H. Tranter et. al., Principles of Communication Systems Simulation. Sin-
gapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2004.
128
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 7
Techniques to Mitigate Fading
Effects
7.1 Introduction
Apart from the better transmitter and receiver technology, mobile communications
require signal processing techniques that improve the link performance. Equaliza-
tion, Diversity and channel coding are channel impairment improvement techniques.
Equalization compensates for Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) created by multipath
within time dispersive channels. An equalizer within a receiver compensates for
the average range of expected channel amplitude and delay characteristics. In other
words, an equalizer is a filter at the mobile receiver whose impulse response is inverse
of the channel impulse response. As such equalizers find their use in frequency selec-
tive fading channels. Diversity is another technique used to compensate fast fading
and is usually implemented using two or more receiving antennas. It is usually em-
ployed to reduce the depths and duration of the fades experienced by a receiver in
a flat fading channel. Channel coding improves mobile communication link perfor-
mance by adding redundant data bits in the transmitted message.At the baseband
portion of the transmitter, a channel coder maps a digital message sequence in to
another specific code sequence containing greater number of bits than original con-
tained in the message. Channel Coding is used to correct deep fading or spectral
null. We discuss all three of these techniques in this chapter. A general framework
of the fading effects and their mitigation techniques is shown in Figure 7.1.
129
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.1: A general framework of fading effects and their mitigation techniques.
7.2 Equalization
ISI has been identified as one of the major obstacles to high speed data transmission
over mobile radio channels. If the modulation bandwidth exceeds the coherence
bandwidth of the radio channel (i.e., frequency selective fading), modulation pulses
are spread in time, causing ISI. An equalizer at the front end of a receiver compen-
sates for the average range of expected channel amplitude and delay characteristics.
As the mobile fading channels are random and time varying, equalizers must track
the time-varying characteristics of the mobile channel and therefore should be time-
varying or adaptive. An adaptive equalizer has two phases of operation: training
and tracking. These are as follows.
Training Mode:
• Initially a known, fixed length training sequence is sent by the transmitter so
that the receiver equalizer may average to a proper setting.
• Training sequence is typically a pseudo-random binary signal or a fixed, of
prescribed bit pattern.
• The training sequence is designed to permit an equalizer at the receiver to
acquire the proper filter coefficient in the worst possible channel condition.
An adaptive filter at the receiver thus uses a recursive algorithm to evaluate
130
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
the channel and estimate filter coefficients to compensate for the channel.
Tracking Mode:
• When the training sequence is finished the filter coefficients are near optimal.
• Immediately following the training sequence, user data is sent.
• When the data of the users are received, the adaptive algorithms of the equal-
izer tracks the changing channel.
• As a result, the adaptive equalizer continuously changes the filter characteris-
tics over time.
7.2.1 A Mathematical Framework
The signal received by the equalizer is given by
x(t) = d(t) ∗ h(t) +n
b
(t) (7.1)
where d(t) is the transmitted signal, h(t) is the combined impulse response of the
transmitter,channel and the RF/IF section of the receiver and n
b
(t) denotes the
baseband noise.
If the impulse response of the equalizer is h
eq
(t), the output of the equalizer is
ˆ y (t) = d (t) ∗ h(t) ∗ h
eq
(t) +n
b
(t) ∗ h
eq
(t) = d (t) ∗ g (t) +n
b
(t) ∗ h
eq
(t) . (7.2)
However, the desired output of the equalizer is d(t) which is the original source data.
Assuming n
b
(t)=0, we can write y(t) = d(t), which in turn stems the following
equation:
g (t) = h(t) ∗ h
eq
(t) = δ (t) (7.3)
The main goal of any equalization process is to satisfy this equation optimally. In
frequency domain it can be written as
H
eq
(f) H (f) = 1 (7.4)
which indicates that an equalizer is actually an inverse filter of the channel. If the
channel is frequency selective, the equalizer enhances the frequency components with
small amplitudes and attenuates the strong frequencies in the received frequency
131
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
spectrum in order to provide a flat, composite received frequency response and
linear phase response. For a time varying channel, the equalizer is designed to track
the channel variations so that the above equation is approximately satisfied.
7.2.2 Zero Forcing Equalization
In a zero forcing equalizer, the equalizer coefficients c
n
are chosen to force the samples
of the combined channel and equalizer impulse response to zero. When each of the
delay elements provide a time delay equal to the symbol duration T, the frequency
response H
eq
(f) of the equalizer is periodic with a period equal to the symbol rate
1/T. The combined response of the channel with the equalizer must satisfy Nyquist’s
criterion
H
ch
(f) H
eq
(f) = 1, [f[ <
1
/
2T
(7.5)
where H
ch
(f) is the folded frequency response of the channel. Thus, an infinite
length zero-forcing ISI equalizer is simply an inverse filter which inverts the folded
frequency response of the channel.
Disadvantage: Since H
eq
(f) is inverse of H
ch
(f) so inverse filter may excessively
amplify the noise at frequencies where the folded channel spectrum has high atten-
uation, so it is rarely used for wireless link except for static channels with high SNR
such as local wired telephone. The usual equalizer model follows a time varying or
adaptive structure which is given next.
7.2.3 A Generic Adaptive Equalizer
The basic structure of an adaptive filter is shown in Figure 7.2. This filter is called
the transversal filter, and in this case has N delay elements, N+1 taps and N+1
tunable complex multipliers, called weights. These weights are updated continuously
by an adaptive algorithm. In the figure the subscript k represents discrete time
index. The adaptive algorithm is controlled by the error signal e
k
. The error signal
is derived by comparing the output of the equalizer, with some signal d
k
which is
replica of transmitted signal. The adaptive algorithm uses e
k
to minimize the cost
function and uses the equalizer weights in such a manner that it minimizes the cost
function iteratively. Let us denote the received sequence vector at the receiver and
132
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.2: A generic adaptive equalizer.
the input to the equalizer as
x
k
= [x
k
, x
k−1
, ....., x
k−N
]
T
, (7.6)
and the tap coefficient vector as
w
k
= [w
0
k
, w
1
k
, ....., w
N
k
]
T
. (7.7)
Now, the output sequence of the equalizer y
k
is the inner product of x
k
and w
k
, i.e.,
y
k
= ¸x
k
, w
k
) = x
T
k
w
k
= w
T
k
x
k
. (7.8)
The error signal is defined as
e
k
= d
k
−y
k
= d
k
−x
T
k
w
k
. (7.9)
Assuming d
k
and x
k
to be jointly stationary, the Mean Square Error (MSE) is given
as
MSE = E[e
2
k
] = E[(d
k
−y
k
)
2
]
= E[(d
k
−x
T
k
w
k
)
2
]
= E[d
2
k
] +w
T
k
E[x
k
x
T
k
]w
k
−2E[d
k
x
T
k
]w
k
(7.10)
133
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
where w
k
is assumed to be an array of optimum values and therefore it has been
taken out of the E() operator. The MSE then can be expressed as
MSE = ξ = σ
2
k
+w
T
k
Rw
k
−2p
T
w
k
(7.11)
where the signal variance σ
2
d
= E[d
2
k
] and the cross correlation vector p between the
desired response and the input signal is defined as
p = E [d
k
x
k
] = E
_
d
k
x
k
d
k
x
k−1
d
k
x
k−2
d
k
x
k−N
_
. (7.12)
The input correlation matrix R is defined as an (N + 1) (N + 1) square matrix,
where
R = E
_
x
k
x
T
k
_
= E
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
x
2
k
x
k
x
k−1
x
k
x
k−2
x
k
x
k−N
x
k−1
x
k
x
2
k−1
x
k−1
x
k−2
x
k−1
x
k−N
x
k−2
x
k
x
k−2
x
k−1
x
2
k−2
x
k−2
x
k−N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
x
k−N
x
k
x
k−N
x
k−1
x
k−N
x
k−2
x
2
k−N
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
. (7.13)
Clearly, MSE is a function of w
k
. On equating
∂ξ
∂w
k
to 0, we get the condition for
minimum MSE (MMSE) which is known as Wiener solution:
w
k
= R
−1
p. (7.14)
Hence, MMSE is given by the equation
MMSE = ξ
min
= σ
2
d
−p
T
w
k
. (7.15)
7.2.4 Choice of Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization
Since an adaptive equalizer compensates for an unknown and time varying channel,
it requires a specific algorithm to update the equalizer coefficients and track the
channel variations. Factors which determine algorithm’s performance are:
Rate of convergence: Number of iterations required for an algorithm, in re-
sponse to a stationary inputs, to converge close enough to optimal solution. A fast
rate of convergence allows the algorithm to adapt rapidly to a stationary environ-
ment of unknown statistics.
Misadjustment: Provides a quantitative measure of the amount by which the
final value of mean square error, averaged over an ensemble of adaptive filters,
deviates from an optimal mean square error.
134
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Computational complexity: Number of operations required to make one com-
plete iteration of the algorithm.
Numerical properties: Inaccuracies like round-off noise and representation
errors in the computer, which influence the stability of the algorithm.
Three classic equalizer algorithms are primitive for most of today’s wireless stan-
dards. These include the Zero Forcing Algorithm (ZF), the Least Mean Square Algo-
rithm (LMS), and the Recursive Least Square Algorithm (RLS). Below, we discuss
a few of the adaptive algorithms.
Least Mean Square (LMS) Algorithm
LMS algorithm is the simplest algorithm based on minimization of the MSE between
the desired equalizer output and the actual equalizer output, as discussed earlier.
Here the system error, the MSE and the optimal Wiener solution remain the same
as given the adaptive equalization framework.
In practice, the minimization of the MSE is carried out recursively, and may be
performed by use of the stochastic gradient algorithm. It is the simplest equalization
algorithm and requires only 2N+1 operations per iteration. The filter weights are
updated by the update equation. Letting the variable n denote the sequence of
iteration, LMS is computed iteratively by
w
k
(n + 1) = w
k
(n) +µe
k
(n) x(n −k) (7.16)
where the subscript k denotes the kth delay stage in the equalizer and µ is the step
size which controls the convergence rate and stability of the algorithm.
The LMS equalizer maximizes the signal to distortion ratio at its output within
the constraints of the equalizer filter length. If an input signal has a time dispersion
characteristics that is greater than the propagation delay through the equalizer, then
the equalizer will be unable to reduce distortion. The convergence rate of the LMS
algorithm is slow due to the fact that there is only one parameter, the step size, that
controls the adaptation rate. To prevent the adaptation from becoming unstable,
the value of µ is chosen from
0 < µ < 2
_
N

i=1
λ
i
(7.17)
where λ
i
is the i-th eigenvalue of the covariance matrix R.
135
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Normalized LMS (NLMS) Algorithm
In the LMS algorithm, the correction that is applied to w
k
(n) is proportional to
the input sample x(n −k). Therefore when x(n −k) is large, the LMS algorithm
experiences gradient noise amplification. With the normalization of the LMS step
size by |x(n)|
2
in the NLMS algorithm, this problem is eliminated. Only when
x(n−k) becomes close to zero, the denominator term|x(n)|
2
in the NLMS equation
becomes very small and the correction factor may diverge. So, a small positive
number ε is added to the denominator term of the correction factor. Here, the step
size is time varying and is expressed as
µ(n) =
β
|x(n)|
2

. (7.18)
Therefore, the NLMS algorithm update equation takes the form of
w
k
(n + 1) = w
k
(n) +
β
|x(n)|
2

e
k
(n) x(n −k) . (7.19)
7.3 Diversity
Diversity is a method used to develop information from several signals transmitted
over independent fading paths. It exploits the random nature of radio propagation
by finding independent signal paths for communication. It is a very simple concept
where if one path undergoes a deep fade, another independent path may have a
strong signal. As there is more than one path to select from, both the instantaneous
and average SNRs at the receiver may be improved. Usually diversity decisions are
made by receiver. Unlike equalization, diversity requires no training overhead as a
training sequence is not required by transmitter. Note that if the distance between
two receivers is a multiple of λ/2, there might occur a destructive interference be-
tween the two signals. Hence receivers in diversity technique are used in such a
way that the signal received by one is independent of the other. Diversity can be of
various forms, starting from space diversity to time diversity. We take up the types
one by one in the sequel.
136
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.3: Receiver selection diversity, with M receivers.
7.3.1 Different Types of Diversity
Space Diversity
A method of transmission or reception, or both, in which the effects of fading are
minimized by the simultaneous use of two or more physically separated antennas,
ideally separated by one half or more wavelengths. Signals received from spatially
separated antennas have uncorrelated envelopes.
Space diversity reception methods can be classified into four categories: selection,
feedback or scanning, maximal ratio combining and equal gain combining.
(a) Selection Diversity:
The basic principle of this type of diversity is selecting the best signal among all
the signals received from different branches at the receiving end. Selection Diversity
is the simplest diversity technique. Figure 7.3 shows a block diagram of this method
where ’M’ demodulators are used to provide M diversity branches whose gains are
adjusted to provide the same average SNR for each branch. The receiver branches
having the highest instantaneous SNR is connected to the demodulator.
Let M independent Rayleigh fading channels are available at a receiver. Each
channel is called a diversity branch and let each branch has the same average SNR.
The signal to noise ratio is defined as
SNR = Γ =
E
b
N
0
α
2
(7.20)
137
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
where E
b
is the average carrier energy, N
0
is the noise PSD, α is a random variable
used to represent amplitude values of the fading channel.
The instantaneous SNR(γ
i
) is usually defined as γ
i
= instantaneous signal power
per branch/mean noise power per branch. For Rayleigh fading channels, α has a
Rayleigh distribution and so α
2
and consequently γ
i
have a chi-square distribution
with two degrees of freedom. The probability density function for such a channel is
p (γ
i
) =
1
Γ
e
−γ
i
Γ
. (7.21)
The probability that any single branch has an instantaneous SNR less than some
defined threshold γ is
Pr [γ
i
≤ γ] =
γ
_
0
p (γ
i
) dγ
i
=
γ
_
0
1
Γ
e
−γ
i
Γ

i
= 1 −e
−γ
Γ
= P(Γ). (7.22)
Similarly, the probability that all M independent diversity branches receive signals
which are simultaneously less than some specific SNR threshold γ is
Pr [γ
1
, γ
2
, . . . , γ
M
≤ γ] =
_
1 −e
−γ
Γ
_
M
= P
M
(γ) (7.23)
where P
M
(γ) is the probability of all branches failing to achieve an instantaneous
SNR = γ. Quite clearly, P
M
(Γ) < P(Γ). If a single branch achieves SNR > γ, then
the probability that SNR > γ for one or more branches is given by
Pr [γ
i
> γ] = 1 −P
M
(γ) = 1 −
_
1 −e
−γ
Γ
_
M
(7.24)
which is more than the required SNR for a single branch receiver. This expression
shows the advantage when a selection diversity is used.
To determine of average signal to noise ratio, we first find out the pdf of γ as
p
M
(γ) =
d

P
M
(γ) =
M
Γ
_
1 −e

γ
/
Γ
_
M−1
e

γ
/
Γ
. (7.25)
The average SNR, ¯ γ, can be then expressed as
¯ γ =

_
0
γp
M
(γ) dγ = Γ

_
0
Mx
_
1 −e
−x
_
M−1
e
−x
dx (7.26)
where x = γ/Γ and Γ is the average SNR for a single branch, when no diversity is
used.
138
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
This equation shows an average improvement in the link margin without requir-
ing extra transmitter power or complex circuitry, and it is easy to implement as
it needed a monitoring station and an antenna switch at the receiver. It is not an
optimal diversity technique as it doesn’t use all the possible branches simultaneously.
(b) Feedback or Scanning Diversity:
Scanning all the signals in a fixed sequence until the one with SNR more than a
predetermined threshold is identified. Feedback or scanning diversity is very similar
to selection diversity except that instead of always using the best of N signals, the N
signals are scanned in a fixed sequence until one is found to be above a predetermined
threshold. This signal is then received until it falls below threshold and the scanning
process is again initiated. The resulting fading statistics are somewhat inferior, but
the advantage is that it is very simple to implement(only one receiver is required).
(c) Maximal Ratio Combining:
Signals from all of the m branches are weighted according to their individual
signal voltage to noise power ratios and then summed. Individual signals must be
cophased before being summed, which generally requires an individual receiver and
phasing circuit for each antenna element. Produces an output SNR equal to the
sum of all individual SNR. Advantage of producing an output with an acceptable
SNR even when none of the individual signals are themselves acceptable. Modern
DSP techniques and digital receivers are now making this optimal form, as it gives
the best statistical reduction of fading of any known linear diversity combiner. In
terms of voltage signal,
r
m
=
m

i=1
G
i
r
i
(7.27)
where G
i
is the gain and r
i
is the voltage signal from each branch.
(d) Equal Gain Combining:
In some cases it is not convenient to provide for the variable weighting capability
required for true maximal ratio combining. In such cases, the branch weights are
all set unity, but the signals from each branch are co-phased to provide equal gain
combining diversity. It allows the receiver to exploit signals that are simultaneously
received on each branch. Performance of this method is marginally inferior to max-
imal ratio combining and superior to Selection diversity. Assuming all the G
i
to be
139
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.4: Maximal ratio combining technique.
unity, here,
r
m
=
m

i=1
r
i
. (7.28)
Polarization Diversity
Polarization Diversity relies on the decorrelation of the two receive ports to achieve
diversity gain. The two receiver ports must remain cross-polarized. Polarization
Diversity at a base station does not require antenna spacing. Polarization diversity
combines pairs of antennas with orthogonal polarizations (i.e. horizontal/vertical, ±
slant 45
o
, Left-hand/Right-hand CP etc). Reflected signals can undergo polarization
changes depending on the channel. Pairing two complementary polarizations, this
scheme can immunize a system from polarization mismatches that would otherwise
cause signal fade. Polarization diversity has prove valuable at radio and mobile com-
140
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
munication base stations since it is less susceptible to the near random orientations
of transmitting antennas.
Frequency Diversity
In Frequency Diversity, the same information signal is transmitted and received
simultaneously on two or more independent fading carrier frequencies. Rationale
behind this technique is that frequencies separated by more than the coherence
bandwidth of the channel will be uncorrelated and will thus not experience the same
fades. The probability of simultaneous fading will be the product of the individual
fading probabilities. This method is employed in microwave LoS links which carry
several channels in a frequency division multiplex mode (FDM). Main disadvantage
is that it requires spare bandwidth also as many receivers as there are channels used
for the frequency diversity.
Time Diversity
In time diversity, the signal representing the same information are sent over the
same channel at different times. Time diversity repeatedly transmits information at
time spacings that exceeds the coherence time of the channel. Multiple repetition
of the signal will be received with independent fading conditions, thereby providing
for diversity. A modern implementation of time diversity involves the use of RAKE
receiver for spread spectrum CDMA, where the multipath channel provides redun-
dancy in the transmitted message. Disadvantage is that it requires spare bandwidth
also as many receivers as there are channels used for the frequency diversity. Two
important types of time diversity application is discussed below.
Application 1: RAKE Receiver
In CDMA spread spectrum systems, CDMA spreading codes are designed to provide
very low correlation between successive chips, propagation delay spread in the radio
channel provides multiple version of the transmitted signal at the receiver. Delaying
multipath components by more than a chip duration, will appear like uncorrelated
noise at a CDMA receiver. CDMA receiver may combine the time delayed versions
of the original signal to improve the signal to noise ratio at the receiver. RAKE
141
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.5: RAKE receiver.
receiver collect the time shifted versions of the original signal by providing a sep-
arate correlation receiver for M strongest multipath components. Outputs of each
correlator are weighted to provide a better estimate of the transmitted signal than
provided by a single component. Demodulation and bit decisions are based on the
weighted output of the correlators. Schematic of a RAKE receiver is shown in Figure
7.5.
Application 2: Interleaver
In the encoded data bits, some source bits are more important than others, and
must be protected from errors. Many speech coder produce several important bits
in succession. Interleaver spread these bit out in time so that if there is a deep fade
or noise burst, the important bits from a block of source data are not corrupted
at the same time. Spreading source bits over time, it becomes possible to make
use of error control coding. Interleaver can be of two forms, a block structure or a
convolutional structure.
A block interleaver formats the encoded data into a rectangular array of m rows
and n columns, and interleaves nm bits at a time. Each row contains a word of
source data having n bits. an interleaver of degree m consists of m rows. source bits
are placed into the interleaver by sequentially increasing the row number for each
142
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
successive bit, and forming the columns. The interleaved source data is then read
out row-wise and transmitted over the channel. This has the effect of separating
the original source bits by m bit periods. At the receiver, de-interleaver stores the
received data by sequentially increasing the row number of each successive bit, and
then clocks out the data row-wise, one word at a time. Convolutional interleavers
are ideally suited for use with convolutional codes.
7.4 Channel Coding
In channel coding, redundant data bits are added in the transmitted message so
that if an instantaneous fade occurs in the channel, the data may still be recov-
ered at the receiver without the request of retransmission. A channel coder maps
the transmitted message into another specific code sequence containing more bits.
Coded message is then modulated for transmission in the wireless channel. Channel
Coding is used by the receiver to detect or correct errors introduced by the channel.
Codes that used to detect errors, are error detection codes. Error correction codes
can detect and correct errors.
7.4.1 Shannon’s Channel Capacity Theorem
In 1948, Shannon showed that by proper encoding of the information, errors induced
by a noise channel can be reduced to any desired level without sacrificing the rate
of information transfer. Shannon’s channel capacity formula is applicable to the
AWGN channel and is given by:
C = Blog
2
_
1 +
S
N
_
= Blog
2
_
1 +
P
N
0
B
_
= Blog
2
_
1 +
E
b
R
b
N
0
B
_
(7.29)
where C is the channel capacity (bit/s), B is the channel bandwidth (Hz), P is the
received signal power (W), N
0
is the single sided noise power density (W/Hz), E
b
is
the average bit energy and R
b
is transmission bit rate.
Equation (7.29) can be normalized by the bandwidth B and is given as
C
B
= log
2
_
1 +
E
b
R
b
N
0
B
_
(7.30)
and the ratio C/B is denoted as bandwidth efficiency. Introduction of redundant
bits increases the transmission bit rate and hence it increases the bandwidth require-
ment, which reduces the bandwidth efficiency of the link in high SNR conditions, but
143
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
provides excellent BER performance at low SNR values. This leads to the following
two inferences.
Corollary 1: While dealing within maximum channel capacity, introduction of re-
dundant bits increase the transmitter rate and hence bandwidth requirement also
increases, while decreasing the bandwidth efficiency, but it also decreases the BER.
Corollary 2: If data redundancy is not introduced in a wideband noisy environment,
error free performance in not possible (for example, CDMA communication in 3G
mobile phones).
A channel coder operates on digital message (or source) data by encoding the source
information into a code sequence for transmission through the channel. The error
correction and detection codes are classified into three groups based on their struc-
ture.
1. Block Code
2. Convolution Code
3. Concatenated Code.
7.4.2 Block Codes
Block codes are forward error correction (FEC) codes that enable a limited number
of errors to be detected and corrected without retransmission. Block codes can be
used to improve the performance of a communications system when other means of
improvement (such as increasing transmitter power or using a more sophisticated
demodulator) are impractical.
In block codes, parity bits are added to blocks of message bits to make codewords
or code blocks. In a block encoder, k information bits are encoded into n code bits.
A total of n−k redundant bits are added to the k information bits for the purpose of
detecting and correcting errors. The block code is referred to as an (n, k) code, and
the rate of the code is defined as R
c
= k/n and is equal to the rate of information
divided by the raw channel rate.
Parameters in Block Code
(a) Code Rate (R
c
): As defined above, R
c
= k/n.
(b) Code Distance (d): Distance between two codewords is the number of ele-
144
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
ments in which two codewords C
i
and C
j
differs denoted by d (C
i
, C
j
). If the code
used is binary, the distance is known as ’Hamming distance’. For example d(10110,
11011) is 3. If the code ’C’ consists of the set of codewords, then the minimum
distance of the code is given by d
min
= min¦d (C
i
, C
j
)¦.
(c) Code Weight (w): Weight of a codeword is given by the number of nonzero
elements in the codeword. For a binary code, the weight is basically the number of
1s in the codeword. For example weight of a code 101101 is 4.
Ex 1: The block code C = 00000, 10100, 11110, 11001 can be used to represent two
bit binary numbers as:
• 00 – 00000
• 01 – 10100
• 10 – 11110
• 11 – 11001
Here number of codewords is 4, k = 2, and n = 5.
To encode a bit stream 1001010011
• First step is to break the sequence in groups of two bits, i.e., 10 01 01 00 11
• Next step is to replace each block by its corresponding codeword, i.e.,
11110 10100 10100 00000 11001
Quite clearly, here, d
min
= min¦d (C
i
, C
j
)¦ = 2.
Properties of Block Codes
(a) Linearity: Suppose C
i
and C
j
are two code words in an (n, k) block code. Let
α
1
and α
2
be any two elements selected from the alphabet. Then the code is said to
be linear if and only if α
1
C
1

2
C
2
is also a code word. A linear code must contain
the all-zero code word.
(b) Systematic: A systematic code is one in which the parity bits are appended
to the end of the information bits. For an (n, k) code, the first k bits are identical
to the information bits, and the remaining n − k bits of each code word are linear
combinations of the k information bits.
145
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
(c) Cyclic: Cyclic codes are a subset of the class of linear codes which satisfy the
following cyclic shift property: If C = [C
n−1
, C
n−2
, ..., C
0
] is a code word of a cyclic
code, then [C
n−2
, C
n−3
, ..., C
0
, C
n−1
], obtained by a cyclic shift of the elements of C,
is also a code word. That is, all cyclic shifts of C are code words.
In this context, it is important to know about Finite Field or Galois Field.
Let F be a finite set of elements on which two binary operations – addition (+) and
multiplication (.) are defined. The set F together with the two binary operations is
called a field if the following conditions are satisfied:
1. F is a commutative group under addition.
2. The set of nonzero elements in F is a commutative group under multiplication.
3. Multiplication is distributive over addition; that is, for any three elements a, b,
and c in F, a(b +c) = ab +ac
4. Identity elements 0 and 1 must exist in F satisfying a + 0 = a and a.1 = a.
5. For any a in F, there exists an additive inverse (−a) such that a + (−a) = 0.
6. For any a in F, there exists an multiplicative inverse a
−1
such that a.a
−1
= 1.
Depending upon the number of elements in it, a field is called either a finite or an
infinite field. The examples of infinite field include Q (set of all rational numbers),
R (set of all real numbers), C (set of all complex numbers) etc. A field with a finite
number of elements (say q) is called a ’Galois Field’ and is denoted by GF(q). A
finite field entity p(x), called a polynomial, is introduced to map all symbols (with
several bits) to the element of the finite field. A polynomial is a mathematical
expression
p (x) = p
0
+p
1
x +... +p
m
x
m
(7.31)
where the symbol x is called the indeterminate and the coefficients p
0
, p
1
, ..., p
m
are
the elements of GF(q). The coefficient p
m
is called the leading coefficient. If p
m
is not equal to zero, then m is called the degree of the polynomial, denoted as deg
p(x). A polynomial is called monic if its leading coefficient is unity. The division
algorithm states that for every pair of polynomials a(x) and b(x) in F(x), there
exists a unique pair of polynomials q(x), the quotient, and r(x), the remainder,
such that a(x) = q(x)b(x) + r(x), where deg r(x)¡deg b(x). A polynomial p(x) in
F(x) is said to be reducible if p(x)=a(x)b(x), otherwise it is called irreducible. A
monic irreducible polynomial of degree at least one is called a prime polynomial.
146
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
An irreducible polynomial p(x) of degree ‘m’ is said to be primitive if the smallest
integer ‘n’ for which p(x) divides x
n
+1 is n = 2
m
−1. A typical primitive polynomial
is given by p(x) = x
m
+x + 1.
A specific type of code which obeys both the cyclic property as well as poly-
nomial operation is cyclic codes. Cyclic codes are a subset of the class of linear
codes which satisfy the cyclic property. These codes possess a considerable amount
of structure which can be exploited. A cyclic code can be generated by using a
generator polynomial g(p) of degree (n-k). The generator polynomial of an (n,k)
cyclic code is a factor of p
n
+ 1 and has the form
g (p) = p
n−k
+g
n−k−1
p
n−k−1
+ +g
1
p + 1. (7.32)
A message polynomial x(p) can also be defined as
x(p) = x
k−1
p
k−1
+ +x
1
p +x
0
(7.33)
where (x
k−1
, . . . , x
0
) represents the k information bits. The resultant codeword c(p)
can be written as
c (p) = x(p) g (p) (7.34)
where c(p) is a polynomial of degree less than n. We would see an application of
such codes in Reed-Solomon codes.
Examples of Block Codes
(a) Single Parity Check Code: In single parity check codes (example: ASCII code),
an overall single parity check bit is appended to ’k’ information bits. Let the infor-
mation bit word be: (b
1
, b
2
, ..., b
k
), then parity check bit: p = b
1
+ b
2
+ ......... + b
k
modulo 2 is appended at the (k+1)th position, making the overall codeword: C =
(b
1
, b
2
, ..., b
k
, p). The parity bit may follow an even parity or an odd parity pattern.
All error patterns that change an odd number of bits are detectable, and all even
numbered error patterns are not detectable. However, such codes can only detect
the error, it cannot correct the error.
Ex. 2: Consider a (8,7) ASCII code with information codeword (0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0)
and encoded with overall even parity pattern. Thus the overall codeword is (0, 1, 0,
1, 1, 0, 0, 1) where the last bit is the parity bit. If there is a single error in bit 3: (0,
147
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1), then it can be easily checked by the receiver that now there are
odd number of 1’s in the codeword and hence there is an error. On the other hand,
if there are two errors, say, errors in bit 3 and 5: (0, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 1), then error
will not be detected.
After decoding a received codeword, let p
c
be the probability that the decoder
gives correct codeword C, p
e
is the probability that the decoder gives incorrect
codeword C

,= C, and p
f
is the probability that the decoder fails to give a codeword.
In this case, we can write p
c
+p
e
+p
f
= 1.
If in an n-bit codeword, there are j errors and p is the bit error probability,
then the probability of obtaining j errors in this codeword is P
j
=
n
C
j
p
j
(1 −p)
n−j
.
Using this formula, for any (n, n −1) single parity check block code, we get
• p
c
= P
0
,
• p
e
= P
2
+P
4
+... +P

n
(n

= n if n is even, otherwise n

= n −1),
• p
f
= P
1
+P
3
+... +P

n
(n

= n −1 if n is even, otherwise n

= n).
As an example, for a (5,4) single parity check block code, p
c
= P
0
, p
e
= P
2
+ P
4
,
and p
f
= P
1
+P
3
+P
5
.
(b) Product Codes: Product codes are a class of linear block codes which pro-
vide error detection capability using product of two block codes. Consider that nine
information bits (1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0) are to be transmitted. These 9 bits can be
divided into groups of three information bits and (4,3) single parity check codeword
can be formed with even parity. After forming three codewords, those can be ap-
pended with a vertical parity bit which will form the fourth codeword. Thus the
following codewords are transmitted:
C1 = [1 0 1 0]
C2 = [0 0 1 1]
C3 = [1 1 0 0]
C4 = [0 1 0 1].
Now if an error occurs in the second bit of the second codeword, the received code-
words at the receiver would then be
C1 = [1 0 1 0]
148
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
C2 = [0 1 1 1] ←
C3 = [1 1 0 0]
C4 = [0 1 0 1]

and these would indicate the corresponding row and column position of the erroneous
bit with vertical and horizontal parity check. Thus the bit can be corrected. Here
we get a horizontal (4, 3) codeword and a vertical (4, 3) codeword and concatenating
them we get a (16, 9) product code. In general, a product code can be formed as
(n
1
, k
1
) & (n
2
, k
2
) →(n
1
n
2
, k
1
k
2
).
(c) Repetition Codes: In a (n,1) repetition code each information bit is repeated
n times (n should be odd) and transmitted. At the receiver, the majority decoding
principle is used to obtain the information bit. Accordingly, if in a group of n received
bit, 1 occurs a higher number of times than 0, the information bit is decoded as 1.
Such majority scheme works properly only if the noise affects less than n/2 number
of bits.
Ex 3: Consider a (3,1) binary repetition code.
• For input bit 0, the codeword is (0 0 0) and for input bit 1, the codeword is
(1 1 1).
• If the received codeword is (0 0 0), i.e. no error, it is decoded as 0.
• Similarly, if the received codeword is (1 1 1), i.e. no error, it is decoded as 1.
• If the received codeword is (0 0 1) or (0 1 0) or (1 0 0), then error is detected
and it is decoded as 0 with majority decoding principle.
• If the received codeword is (0 1 1) or (1 1 0) or (1 0 1), once again error is
detected and it is decoded as 1 with majority decoding principle.
For such a (3,1) repetition code, p
c
= P
0
+P
1
, p
e
= P
2
+P
3
, and p
f
= 0.
(d) Hamming Codes: A binary Hamming code has the property that
(n, k) = (2
m
−1, 2
m
−1 −m) (7.35)
where k is the number of information bits used to form a n bit codeword, and m
is any positive integer. The number of parity symbols are n − k = m. Thus, a
149
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
codeword is represented by C = [i
1
, ...i
n
, p
1
, ..., p
n−k
]. This is quite a useful code in
communication which is illustrated via the following example.
Ex 4: Consider a (7, 4) Hamming code. With three parity bits we can correct exactly
1 error. The parity bits may follow such a modulo 2 arithmetic:
p
1
= i
1
+i
2
+i
3
,
p
2
= i
2
+i
3
+i
4
,
p
3
= i
1
+i
3
+i
4
,
which is same as,
p
1
+i
1
+i
2
+i
3
= 0
p
2
+i
2
+i
3
+i
4
= 0
p
3
+i
1
+i
3
+i
4
= 0.
The transmitted codeword is then C = [i
1
, i
2
, ..., i
4
, p
1
, p
2
, p
3
].
Syndrome Decoding: For this Hamming code, let the received codeword be V =
[v
1
, v
2
, ..., v
4
, v
5
, v
6
, v
7
]. We define a syndrome vector S as
S = [S
1
S
2
S
3
]
S1 = v
1
+v
2
+v
3
+v
5
S2 = v
2
+v
3
+v
4
+v
6
S3 = v
1
+v
2
+v4 +v7
It is obvious that in case of no error, the syndrome vector is equal to zero. Corre-
sponding to this syndrome vector, there is an error vector e which can be obtained
from a syndrome table and finally the required codeword is taken as C = V +e. In
a nutshell, to obtain the required codeword, we perform the following steps:
1. Calculate S from decoder input V.
2. From syndrome table, obtain e corresponding to S.
3. The required codeword is then C = V +e.
A few cases are given below to illustrate the syndrome decoding.
1. Let C = [0 1 1 1 0 1 0] and V = [0 1 1 1 0 1 0]. This implies S = [0 0 0], and it
corresponds to e = [0 0 0 0 0 0 0]. Thus, C = V + e = [0 1 1 1 0 1 0].
150
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
2. Let C = [1 1 0 0 0 1 0] and V = [1 1 0 1 0 1 0]. This means S = [0 1 1], from which
we get e = [0 0 0 1 0 0 0] which means a single bit error is there in the received bit
v
4
. This will be corrected by performing the operation C = V + e.
3. Another interesting case is, let C = [0 1 0 1 1 0 0] and V = [0 0 1 1 1 0 1] (two
errors at second and third bits). This makes S = [0 0 0] and as a result, e = [0 0
0 0 0 0 0]. However, C ,= V , and C = V + e implies the double error cannot be
corrected. Therefore a (7,4) Hamming code can correct only single bit error.
(e) Golay Codes: Golay codes are linear binary (23,12) codes with a minimum
distance of seven and a error correction capability of three bits. This is a special,
one of a kind code in that this is the only nontrivial example of a perfect code.
Every codeword lies within distance three of any codeword, thus making maximum
likelihood decoding possible.
(f) BCH Codes: BCH code is one of the most powerful known class of linear
cyclic block codes, known for their multiple error correcting ability, and the ease
of encoding and decoding. It’s block length is n = 2
m
− 1 for m ≥ 3 and number
of errors that they can correct is bounded by t < (2
m
−1)/2. Binary BCH codes
can be generalized to create classes of non binary codes which use m bits per code
symbol.
(g) Reed Solomon (RS) Codes: Reed-Solomon code is an important subset of
the BCH codes with a wide range of applications in digital communication and data
storage. Typical application areas are storage devices (CD, DVD etc.), wireless
communications, digital TV, high speed modems. It’s coding system is based on
groups of bits, such as bytes, rather than individual 0 and 1. This feature makes it
particularly good at dealing with burst of errors: six consecutive bit errors. Block
length of these codes is n = 2
m
−1, and can be extended to 2
m
or 2
m
+1. Number
of parity symbols that must be used to correct e errors is n − k = 2e. Minimum
distance d
min
= 2e + 1, and it achieves the largest possible d
min
of any linear code.
For US-CDPD, the RS code is used with m = 6. So each of the 64 field elements
is represented by a 6 bit symbol. For this case, we get the primitive polynomial as
p(x) = x
6
+x + 1. Equating p(x) to 0 implies x
6
= x + 1.
The 6 bit representation of the finite field elements is given in Table 7.1. The table
elements continue up to α
62
. However, to follow linearity property there should be
151
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Table 7.1: Finite field elements for US-CDPD
α
5
α
4
α
3
α
2
α
1
α
0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1
α
1
0 0 0 1 0 0
α
2
0 0 1 0 0 0
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
α
6
= α + 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
a zero codeword, hence α
63
is assigned zero.
The encoding part of the RS polynomial is done as follows:
Information polynomial: d(x) = C
n−1
x
n−1
+C
n−2
x
n−2
+..... +C
2t
x
2t
,
Parity polynomial: p(x) = C
2t−1
x
2t−1
+... +C
0
,
Codeword polynomial: c(x) = d(x) +p(x).
Since generating an information polynomial is difficult, so a generating polynomial is
used instead. Information polynomial is then the multiple of generating polynomial.
This process is given below.
Since this kind of codes are cyclic codes, we take a generating polynomial g(x)
such that d(x) = g(x)q(x) + r(x) where q(x) is the quotient polynomial and r(x)
is the remainder polynomial. The codeword polynomial would then be given as:
c(x) = g(x)q(x) + r(x) = p(x). If we assign a parity polynomial p(x) = r(x), then
the codeword polynomial c(x) = g(x)p(x) and the entire process becomes easier.
On the decoder side one has to find a specific r(x) = p(x) or vice-versa, but due
to its complexity, it is mainly done using syndrome calculation. The details of such
a syndrome calculation can be found in [1].
7.4.3 Convolutional Codes
A continuous sequence of information bits is mapped into a continuous sequence of
encoder output bits. A convolutional code is generated by passing the information
sequence through a finite state shift register. Shift register contains ’N’ k-bit stages
152
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.6: A convolutional encoder with n=2 and k=1.
and m linear algebraic function generators based on the generator polynomials.
Input data is shifted into and along the shift register, k-bits at a time. Number
of output bits for each k-bit user input data sequence is n bits, so the code rate
R
c
= k/n. The shift register of the encoder is initialized to all-zero-state before
Figure 7.7: State diagram representation of a convolutional encoder.
encoding operation starts. It is easy to verify that encoded sequence is 00 11 10
00 01 . . . for an input message sequence of 01011 . . .. Convolution codes may be
represented in various ways as given below.
State Diagram:
Since the output of the encoder is determined by the input and the current
state of the encoder, a state diagram can be used to represent the encoding process.
The state diagram is simply a graph of the possible states of the encoder and the
possible transitions from one state to another. The path information between the
states, denoted as b/c
1
c
2
, represents input information bit ’b’ and the corresponding
153
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.8: Tree diagram representation of a convolutional encoder.
output bits (c
1
c
2
). Again, it is not difficult to verify from the state diagram that an
input information sequence b = (1011) generates an encoded sequence c = (11, 10,
00, 01).
Tree Diagram:
The tree diagram shows the structure of the encoder in the form of a tree with the
branches representing the various states and the outputs of the coder. The encoded
bits are labeled on the branches of the tree. Given an input sequence, the encoded
sequence can be directly read from the tree. As an example, an input sequence
(1011) results in the encoded sequence (11, 10, 00, 01).
Figure 7.9: Trellis diagram of a convolutional encoder.
154
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 7.10: Block diagram of a turbo encoder.
Trellis Diagram:
Tree reveals that the structure repeats itself once the number of stages is greater
than the constraint length. It is observed that all branches emanating from two
nodes having the same state are identical in the sense that they generate identical
output sequences. This means that the two nodes having the same label can be
merged. By doing this throughout the tree diagram, we obtain another diagram
called a Trellis Diagram which is more compact representation.
7.4.4 Concatenated Codes
Concatenated codes are basically concatenation of block and convolutional codes. It
can be of two types: serial and parallel codes. Below, we discuss a popular parallel
concatenated code, namely, turbo code.
Turbo Codes: A turbo encoder is built using two identical convolutional codes
of special type with parallel concatenation. An individual encoder is termed a com-
ponent encoder. An interleaver separates the two component encoders. The inter-
leaver is a device that permutes the data sequence in some predetermined manner.
Only one of the systematic outputs from the two component encoders is used to form
a codeword, as the systematic output from the other component encoder is only a
permuted version of the chosen systematic output. Figure 7.10 shows the block di-
agram of a turbo encoder using two identical encoders. The first encoder outputs
the systematic V
0
and recursive convolutional V
1
sequences while the second en-
coder discards its systematic sequence and only outputs the recursive convolutional
V
2
sequence. Depending on the number of input bits to a component encoder it
155
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
may be binary or m-binary encoder. Encoders are also categorized as systematic
or non-systematic. If the component encoders are not identical then it is called an
asymmetric turbo code.
7.5 Conclusion
Although a lot of advanced powerful techniques for mitigating the fading effects
such as space diversity in MIMO systems, space-time block coding scheme, MIMO
equalization, BLAST architectures etc. have taken place in modern wireless com-
munication, nevertheless, the discussed topics in this chapter are the basic building
blocks for all such techniques and that stems the necessity for all these discussions.
The effectiveness of the discussed topics would be more clear in the next chapter in
the context of different multiple access techniques.
7.6 References
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
2. J. R. Treichler, C. R. Johnson (Jr.) and M. G. Larimore, Theory and Design
of Adaptive Filters. New Delhi: PHI, 2002.
3. S. Gravano, Introduction to Error Control Codes. NY: Oxford University
Press, 2001.
156
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Chapter 8
Multiple Access Techniques
Multiple access techniques are used to allow a large number of mobile users to share
the allocated spectrum in the most efficient manner. As the spectrum is limited, so
the sharing is required to increase the capacity of cell or over a geographical area
by allowing the available bandwidth to be used at the same time by different users.
And this must be done in a way such that the quality of service doesn’t degrade
within the existing users.
8.1 Multiple Access Techniques for Wireless Communi-
cation
In wireless communication systems it is often desirable to allow the subscriber to
send simultaneously information to the base station while receiving information from
the base station.
A cellular system divides any given area into cells where a mobile unit in each
cell communicates with a base station. The main aim in the cellular system design
is to be able to increase the capacity of the channel i.e. to handle as many calls
as possible in a given bandwidth with a sufficient level of quality of service. There
are several different ways to allow access to the channel. These includes mainly the
following:
1) Frequency division multiple-access (FDMA)
2) Time division multiple-access (TDMA)
3) Code division multiple-access (CDMA)
157
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Table 8.1: MA techniques in different wireless communication systems
Advanced Mobile Phone Systems: FDMA/FDD
Global System for Mobile: TDMA/FDD
U.S. Digital Cellular: TDMA/FDD
Japanese Digital Cellular: TDMA/FDD
CT2 Cordless Telephone: FDMA/TDD
Digital European Cordless Telephone: FDMA/TDD
U.S. Narrowband Spread Spectrum (IS-95): CDMA/FDD
4) Space Division Multiple access (SDMA)
FDMA,TDMA and CDMA are the three major multiple access techniques that
are used to share the available bandwidth in a wireless communication system.
Depending on how the available bandwidth is allocated to the users these techniques
can be classified as narrowband and wideband systems.
8.1.1 Narrowband Systems
The term narrowband is used to relate the bandwidth of the single channel to the
expected coherence bandwidth of the channel. The available spectrum is divided in
to a large number of narrowband channels. The channels are operated using FDD.
In narrow band FDMA, a user is assigned a particular channel which is not shared by
other users in the vicinity and if FDD is used then the system is called FDMA/FDD.
Narrow band TDMA allows users to use the same channel but allocated a unique
time slot to each user on the channel, thus separating a small number of users in time
on a single channel. For narrow band TDMA, there generally are a large number of
channels allocated using either FDD or TDD, each channel is shared using TDMA.
Such systems are called TDMA/FDD and TDMA/TDD access systems.
8.1.2 Wideband Systems
In wideband systems, the transmission bandwidth of a single channel is much larger
than the coherence bandwidth of the channel. Thus, multipath fading doesnt greatly
affect the received signal within a wideband channel, and frequency selective fades
occur only in a small fraction of the signal bandwidth
158
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 8.1: The basic concept of FDMA.
8.2 Frequency Division Multiple Access
This was the initial multiple-access technique for cellular systems in which each
individual user is assigned a pair of frequencies while making or receiving a call as
shown in Figure 8.1. One frequency is used for downlink and one pair for uplink.
This is called frequency division duplexing (FDD). That allocated frequency pair
is not used in the same cell or adjacent cells during the call so as to reduce the co
channel interference. Even though the user may not be talking, the spectrum cannot
be reassigned as long as a call is in place. Different users can use the same frequency
in the same cell except that they must transmit at different times.
The features of FDMA are as follows: The FDMA channel carries only one
phone circuit at a time. If an FDMA channel is not in use, then it sits idle and
it cannot be used by other users to increase share capacity. After the assignment
of the voice channel the BS and the MS transmit simultaneously and continuously.
The bandwidths of FDMA systems are generally narrow i.e. FDMA is usually
159
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
implemented in a narrow band system The symbol time is large compared to the
average delay spread. The complexity of the FDMA mobile systems is lower than
that of TDMA mobile systems. FDMA requires tight filtering to minimize the
adjacent channel interference.
8.2.1 FDMA/FDD in AMPS
The first U.S. analog cellular system, AMPS (Advanced Mobile Phone System) is
based on FDMA/FDD. A single user occupies a single channel while the call is in
progress, and the single channel is actually two simplex channels which are frequency
duplexed with a 45 MHz split. When a call is completed or when a handoff occurs
the channel is vacated so that another mobile subscriber may use it. Multiple or
simultaneous users are accommodated in AMPS by giving each user a unique signal.
Voice signals are sent on the forward channel from the base station to the mobile
unit, and on the reverse channel from the mobile unit to the base station. In AMPS,
analog narrowband frequency modulation (NBFM) is used to modulate the carrier.
8.2.2 FDMA/TDD in CT2
Using FDMA, CT2 system splits the available bandwidth into radio channels in the
assigned frequency domain. In the initial call setup, the handset scans the available
channels and locks on to an unoccupied channel for the duration of the call. Using
TDD(Time Division Duplexing ), the call is split into time blocks that alternate
between transmitting and receiving.
8.2.3 FDMA and Near-Far Problem
The near-far problem is one of detecting or filtering out a weaker signal amongst
stronger signals. The near-far problem is particularly difficult in CDMA systems
where transmitters share transmission frequencies and transmission time. In con-
trast, FDMA and TDMA systems are less vulnerable. FDMA systems offer different
kinds of solutions to near-far challenge. Here, the worst case to consider is recovery
of a weak signal in a frequency slot next to strong signal. Since both signals are
present simultaneously as a composite at the input of a gain stage, the gain is set
according to the level of the stronger signal; the weak signal could be lost in the
160
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
noise floor. Even if subsequent stages have a low enough noise floor to provide
8.3 Time Division Multiple Access
In digital systems, continuous transmission is not required because users do not
use the allotted bandwidth all the time. In such cases, TDMA is a complimentary
access technique to FDMA. Global Systems for Mobile communications (GSM) uses
the TDMA technique. In TDMA, the entire bandwidth is available to the user but
only for a finite period of time. In most cases the available bandwidth is divided
into fewer channels compared to FDMA and the users are allotted time slots during
which they have the entire channel bandwidth at their disposal, as shown in Figure
8.2.
TDMA requires careful time synchronization since users share the bandwidth in
the frequency domain. The number of channels are less, inter channel interference
is almost negligible. TDMA uses different time slots for transmission and reception.
This type of duplexing is referred to as Time division duplexing(TDD).
The features of TDMA includes the following: TDMA shares a single carrier fre-
quency with several users where each users makes use of non overlapping time slots.
The number of time slots per frame depends on several factors such as modulation
technique, available bandwidth etc. Data transmission in TDMA is not continuous
but occurs in bursts. This results in low battery consumption since the subscriber
transmitter can be turned OFF when not in use. Because of a discontinuous trans-
mission in TDMA the handoff process is much simpler for a subscriber unit, since it
is able to listen to other base stations during idle time slots. TDMA uses different
time slots for transmission and reception thus duplexers are not required. TDMA
has an advantage that is possible to allocate different numbers of time slots per
frame to different users. Thus bandwidth can be supplied on demand to different
users by concatenating or reassigning time slot based on priority.
8.3.1 TDMA/FDD in GSM
As discussed earlier, GSM is widely used in Europe and other parts of the world.
GSM uses a variation of TDMA along with FDD. GSM digitizes and compresses
data, then sends it down a channel with two other streams of user data, each in its
161
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 8.2: The basic concept of TDMA.
own time slot. It operates at either the 900 MHz or 1800 MHz frequency band. Since
many GSM network operators have roaming agreements with foreign operators, users
can often continue to use their mobile phones when they travel to other countries.
8.3.2 TDMA/TDD in DECT
DECT is a pan European standard for the digitally enhanced cordless telephony
using TDMA/TDD. DECT provides 10 FDM channels in the band 1880-1990 Mhz.
Each channel supports 12 users through TDMA for a total system load of 120 users.
DECT supports handover, users can roam over from cell to cell as long as they remain
within the range of the system. DECT antenna can be equipped with optional spatial
diversity to deal with multipath fading.
162
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
8.4 Spread Spectrum Multiple Access
Spread spectrum multiple access (SSMA) uses signals which have a transmission
bandwidth whose magnitude is greater than the minimum required RF bandwidth.
A pseudo noise (PN) sequence converts a narrowband signal to a wideband noise
like signal before transmission. SSMA is not very bandwidth efficient when used
by a single user. However since many users can share the same spread spectrum
bandwidth without interfering with one another, spread spectrum systems become
bandwidth efficient in a multiple user environment.
There are two main types of spread spectrum multiple access techniques: Fre-
quency hopped multiple access (FHMA)
Direct sequence multiple access (DSMA) or
Code division multiple access (CDMA).
8.4.1 Frequency Hopped Multiple Access (FHMA)
This is a digital multiple access system in which the carrier frequencies of the in-
dividual users are varied in a pseudo random fashion within a wideband channel.
The digital data is broken into uniform sized bursts which is then transmitted on
different carrier frequencies.
8.4.2 Code Division Multiple Access
In CDMA, the same bandwidth is occupied by all the users, however they are all
assigned separate codes, which differentiates them from each other (shown in Figure
8.3). CDMA utilize a spread spectrum technique in which a spreading signal (which
is uncorrelated to the signal and has a large bandwidth) is used to spread the narrow
band message signal.
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DS-SS)
This is the most commonly used technology for CDMA. In DS-SS, the message signal
is multiplied by a Pseudo Random Noise Code. Each user is given his own codeword
which is orthogonal to the codes of other users and in order to detect the user, the
receiver must know the codeword used by the transmitter. There are, however, two
problems in such systems which are discussed in the sequel.
163
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
Figure 8.3: The basic concept of CDMA.
CDMA/FDD in IS-95
In this standard, the frequency range is: 869-894 MHz (for Rx) and 824-849 MHz
(for Tx). In such a system, there are a total of 20 channels and 798 users per channel.
For each channel, the bit rate is 1.2288 Mbps. For orthogonality, it usually combines
64 Walsh-Hadamard codes and a m-sequence.
8.4.3 CDMA and Self-interference Problem
In CDMA, self-interference arises from the presence of delayed replicas of signal due
to multipath. The delays cause the spreading sequences of the different users to
lose their orthogonality, as by design they are orthogonal only at zero phase offset.
Hence in despreading a given user’s waveform, nonzero contributions to that user’s
signal arise from the transmissions of the other users in the network. This is distinct
from both TDMA and FDMA, wherein for reasonable time or frequency guardbands,
respectively, orthogonality of the received signals can be preserved.
164
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
8.4.4 CDMA and Near-Far Problem
The near-far problem is a serious one in CDMA. This problem arises from the fact
that signals closer to the receiver of interest are received with smaller attenuation
than are signals located further away. Therefore the strong signal from the nearby
transmitter will mask the weak signal from the remote transmitter. In TDMA and
FDMA, this is not a problem since mutual interference can be filtered. In CDMA,
however, the near-far effect combined with imperfect orthogonality between codes
(e.g. due to different time sifts), leads to substantial interference. Accurate and fast
power control appears essential to ensure reliable operation of multiuser DS-CDMA
systems.
8.4.5 Hybrid Spread Spectrum Techniques
The hybrid combinations of FHMA, CDMA and SSMA result in hybrid spread
spectrum techniques that provide certain advantages. These hybrid techniques are
explained below,
Hybrid FDMA/CDMA (FCDMA):
An alternative to the CDMA technique in which the available wideband spectrum
is divided into a smaller number of sub spectra with smaller bandwidths. The smaller
sub channels become narrow band CDMA systems with processing gain lower than
the original CDMA system. In this scheme the required bandwidth need not be
contiguous and different user can be allotted different sub spectrum bandwidths
depending on their requirements. The capacity of this hybrid FCDMA technique is
given by the sum of the capacities of a system operating in the sub spectra.
Hybrid Direct Sequence/Frequency Hopped Multiple Access Techniques (DS/FHMA):
A direct sequence modulated signal whose center frequency is made to hop pe-
riodically in a pseudo random fashion is used in this technique. One of the advan-
tages using this technique is they avoid near-far effect. However, frequency hopped
CDMA systems are not adaptable to the soft handoff process since it is difficult
to synchronize the frequency hopped base station receiver to the multiple hopped
signals. Time and Code Division Multiple Access (TCDMA):
In this TCDMA method different cells are allocated different spreading codes.
In each cell, only one user per cell is allotted a particular time slot. Thus at any
165
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
time only one user is transmitting in each cell. When a handoff takes place the
spreading code of that user is changed to the code of the new cell. TCDMA also
avoids near-far effect as the number of users transmitting per cell is one.
Time Division Frequency Hopping (TDFH):
This technique has been adopted for the GSM standard, where the hopping se-
quence is predefined and the subscriber is allowed to hop only on certain frequencies
which are assigned to a cell. The subscriber can hop to a new frequency at the start
of a new TDMA frame, thus avoiding a severe fade or erasure event on a particu-
lar channel. This technique has the advantage in severe multipath or when severe
channel interference occurs.
8.5 Space Division Multiple Access
SDMA utilizes the spatial separation of the users in order to optimize the use of the
frequency spectrum. A primitive form of SDMA is when the same frequency is re-
used in different cells in a cellular wireless network. The radiated power of each user
is controlled by Space division multiple access. SDMA serves different users by using
spot beam antenna. These areas may be served by the same frequency or different
frequencies. However for limited co-channel interference it is required that the cells
be sufficiently separated. This limits the number of cells a region can be divided into
and hence limits the frequency re-use factor. A more advanced approach can further
increase the capacity of the network. This technique would enable frequency re-use
within the cell. In a practical cellular environment it is improbable to have just one
transmitter fall within the receiver beam width. Therefore it becomes imperative
to use other multiple access techniques in conjunction with SDMA. When different
areas are covered by the antenna beam, frequency can be re-used, in which case
TDMA or CDMA is employed, for different frequencies FDMA can be used.
8.6 Conclusion
In this chapter, we have mainly discussed the fixed assignment type of MA tech-
niques, namely, FDMA, TDMA and CDMA. We have, however, intensionally not
covered the reservation-based MA schemes such as packet reservation MA or polling
166
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com
or token passing etc. The main idea to discuss only the basic MA techniques has
been to grow up a fair idea about the resource sharing in a wireless media when there
are many users, keeping the QoS view point in mind. The readers are encouraged
to go through the advanced topics once they finish reading the discussed 8 chapters
in this lecture notes.
8.7 References
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, 2nd ed.
Singapore: Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
2. K. Feher, Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum
Applications. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. J. G. Proakis, Digital Communications, 4th ed. NY: McGraw Hill, 2000.
4. G. R. Cooper and C. D. McGillem, Modern Communications and Spread Spec-
trum, NY: McGraw Hill, 1986.
167
www.jntuworld.com
www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

Preface

It’s been many years that I’m teaching the subject “Mobile Communication” (EC632) to the IIT Guwahati students and the current lecture notes intend to act as a supplement to that course so that our students can have an access to this course anytime. This course is mainly aimed toward senior year students of the ECE discipline, and in particular, for the final year BTech, first year MTech and PhD students. However, this does not necessarily imply that any other discipline students can not study this course. Rather, they also should delve deeper into this course since mobile communication is a familiar term to everyone nowadays. Although the communication aspects of this subject depends on the fundamentals of another interesting subject, communication engineering, I would strongly advocate the engineering students to go through the same in order to grow up adequate interest in this field. In fact, the present lecture notes are designed in such a way that even a non-ECE student also would get certain basic notions of this subject. The entire lecture notes are broadly divided into 8 chapters, which, I consider to be most rudimentary topics to know the basics of this subject. The advance level topics are avoided intensionally so as to give space to the possibility of developing another lecture note in that area. In fact, this area is so vast and changing so fast over time, there is no limit of discussing the advanced level topics. The current focus has been therefore to deal with those main topics which would give a senior student sufficient exposure to this field to carry out further study and/or research. Initially, after dealing with the introductory concepts (i.e., what is mobile communication, how a mobile call is made etc) and the evolution of mobile communication systems till the present day status, the cellular engineering fundamentals are discussed at length to make the students realize the importance of the practical engineering aspects of this subject. Next, the different kinds of mobile communication channels is taken up and large scale path loss model as well as small scale fading effects are dealt, both with simulation and statistical approaches. To enhance the link performance amidst the adverse channel conditions, the transmitter and receiver techniques are

i

www.jntuworld.com

In general. diversity and channel coding. about the satisfaction of the author. but should not set limits to imagination”. colleagues as well as my post graduate and doctoral students which I must acknowledge at the onset. It is for them only I could finish this project. equalization. During the process of developing the lecture notes. an author becomes happy if he/she sees that his/her creation could instill certain sparks in the reader’s mind. Abhijit Mitra November 2009 ii www. different kinds of multiple access techniques are covered at length with the emphasis on how several mobile communication techniques evolve via this. Finally. albeit a bit late.www. The same is true for me too. My best wishes to all the readers. namely. I’m fortunate to have a group of energetic students who have helped me a lot. I’ll consider my endeavor to be successful. If the readers can visualize the continuously changing technology in this field after reading this lecture notes and also can dream about a future career in the same.com discussed next. It is further extended with three main signal processing techniques at the receiver. Once Bertrand Russell said “Science may set limits to knowledge. My sincere acknowledgment should also go to my parents and my younger brother who have nicely reciprocated my oblivion nature by their nourishing and generous attitude toward me since my childhood. I have received kind helps from my friends. Finally.jntuworld.com . It should also be mentioned that many figures in the lecture notes have been adopted from some standard text books to keep the easy flow of the understanding of the topics.jntuworld.

www.jntuworld.com

Contents
1 Introductory Concepts 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evolution of Mobile Radio Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Present Day Mobile Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fundamental Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 1.5 Radio Transmission Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 3 4 5 7 7 8 8 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 14 14 16 18 19

How a Mobile Call is Actually Made? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 Cellular Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6 1.7

Future Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Modern Wireless Communication Systems 2.1 2.2 1G: First Generation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2G: Second Generation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3 TDMA/FDD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA/FDD Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5G Mobile Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3G: Third Generation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 3G Standards and Access Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3G W-CDMA (UMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3G CDMA2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3G TD-SCDMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4

Wireless Transmission Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.5 2.6

Wireless Local Loop (WLL) and LMDS . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless Local Area Networks (W-LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . WiMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zigbee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wibree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 19 20 21 21 21 22 22 23 23 23 24 27 27 27 28 29 31 33 33 34 34 37 38 38 40 43 46 47 53

Conclusion: Beyond 3G Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 The Cellular Engineering Fundamentals 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is a Cell? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency Reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Assignment Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.5 Fixed Channel Assignment (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Channel Assignment (DCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Handoff Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 Factors Influencing Handoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handoffs In Different Generations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handoff Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Few Practical Problems in Handoff Scenario . . . . . . . .

3.6

Interference & System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 3.6.2 Co-channel interference (CCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7

Enhancing Capacity And Cell Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 The Key Trade-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell-Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sectoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcell Zone Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 3.9

Trunked Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

4 Free Space Radio Wave Propagation 4.1 4.2 4.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free Space Propagation Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Methods of Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.5 Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54 54 55 57 57 58 58 59 63 64 66 68 69 69 70 70 70 71 72 72 73 73 73 73 75 75 75 76 76 76 77 77

Scattering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Two Ray Reflection Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 Knife-Edge Diffraction Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fresnel Zones: the Concept of Diffraction Loss . . . . . . . . Knife-edge diffraction model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6

Link Budget Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 4.6.2 Log-distance Path Loss Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Normal Shadowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7

Outdoor Propagation Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 4.7.2 Okumura Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hata Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8

Indoor Propagation Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 Partition Losses Inside a Floor (Intra-floor) . . . . . . . . . . Partition Losses Between Floors (Inter-floor) . . . . . . . . . Log-distance Path Loss Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Multipath Wave Propagation and Fading 5.1 5.2 Multipath Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multipath & Small-Scale Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multipath Fading Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factors Influencing Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of Small-Scale Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Fading Effects due to Multipath Time Delay Spread . . . . . v

www.jntuworld.com

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Amplitude and Angle Modulation . . .3 5. . . . .7 5. .2 5. . . 104 Analog and Digital Modulation Techniques .com 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 5. . .5. . . . . . . . . .5.3 5. . .5 5. . .1 6. . . . . . . . . . .4 Fading Effects due to Doppler Spread . . Small-Scale Multipath Measurements .4 5. . . . . .6.4. . . .5. . . . 104 vi www. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . .6. . . .5 Choice of Modulation Scheme . . .2 6. . . . .8 Conclusion References . 101 Modulation . . . . . . Clarke and Gans’ Model: with Doppler Effect . . . . . . . Doppler Shift . . . . . . . . . . .com . . . . . . . . . . Rayleigh Simulator with Wide Range of Channel Conditions Two-Ray Rayleigh Faded Model . . . . .7 5. 102 Linear and Non-linear Modulation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generalized Model: Nakagami Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . 5. . . . . . . . . .2 Time Dispersion Parameters . . 5. . . . . . . . . .6. .1 6. Impulse Response Model of a Multipath Channel . . . .2. . . 5. . . . . . 5. . . . . . . .2.4. . 104 6. . . . . .4 NLoS Propagation: Rayleigh Fading Model . .6.3. . . . . .3. .6. .6 Simulation of Rayleigh Fading Models . .6 5.www. . . SIRCIM/SMRCIM Indoor/Outdoor Statistical Models . .4 6. . . . . Frequency Dispersion Parameters . . .5 Statistical models for multipath propagation . . .2 5. . .2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second Order Statistics .1 5. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . 78 79 80 82 84 85 87 87 89 90 91 93 94 95 96 96 96 97 97 98 98 99 99 101 Multipath Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . LoS Propagation: Rician Fading Model . . . . . . . . 5. .3. . . . Relation Between Bandwidth and Received Power .2. . .4 5.3 Signal Space Representation of Digitally Modulated Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . Saleh and Valenzuela Indoor Statistical Model .3 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5. .jntuworld. . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Advantages of Modulation . . . . .jntuworld. . . . . . . .1 5. . . . . .6 Clarke’s Model: without Doppler Effect . . . 5. . . . . 101 6. . . 6 Transmitter and Receiver Techniques 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Time Varying Channels (LTV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 6. . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . .6 6. . . . . . . 121 6.9 GMSK Scheme . .1 A Mathematical Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 6. . . . . . . 125 6. . . . .1 Bit Error Rate and Symbol Error Rate . . . . . . . .5. . . .www. . . . . . . . 107 QPSK .11. . . . . . . . . .1 7. . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . .11. .1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Mathematical Description of OFDM . . . . . .2 6. . . . . . . . . . 127 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 References . . . . . . . . . . . 105 6. . 110 Pulse Shaping . . 118 6. . .1 Inter Channel Interference . . . . . 113 6. 112 Raised Cosine Roll-Off Filtering . . . . 107 Offset-QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Angle Modulation (FM and PM) . 130 7. . . . 122 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Line Coding . . . . . . . . . . .3 6. . . . . .com . . . . . . . . . . . 128 7 Techniques to Mitigate Fading Effects 7. . .8 Nonlinear Modulation Techniques . . . . . .5 Linear Modulation Techniques 6. . .1 6. . .jntuworld. . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Two Practical Issues of Concern . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Receiver performance in multipath channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 6. .13 Example of a Multicarrier Modulation: OFDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 π/4 DQPSK . . . . . . .3 Nyquist pulse shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . .1 6.7. . . .12. . . . . 123 6. . . . . . . .jntuworld. . . . . . 116 6. . . . .14 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . .10 GMSK Generator . . . . 131 vii www. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Realization of Pulse Shaping Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . . . 122 6. . . . . . . . . . . 114 BFSK . . . . . . . .com 6. .2 129 Introduction . . . . .4 Complex Representation of Linear Modulated Signals and Band Pass Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . .1 Orthogonality of Signals . . . . . 119 6. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Power Amplifier Nonlinearity . . . . . . . . . . . 123 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 6. . . . . . . 110 6. 106 BPSK . . . . 106 Amplitude Modulation (DSBSC) .2. . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . .8. . . . 129 Equalization . . . . . . . . .

jntuworld. . . . . . . . .4 8. . . . . . . 162 8. . .4 Spread Spectrum Multiple Access . . . . . . . . . 143 Block Codes . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . .4. .2 TDMA/FDD in GSM . . . . . . .3. . . . . .www. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 8.1 Different Types of Diversity . . . . .1 8. . 160 FDMA/TDD in CT2 .2 Narrowband Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 FDMA and Near-Far Problem . . 156 7.3 7. . . 158 Wideband Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7.4. .4. . .2 8. .2. . . . . . . 167 viii www. . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . .2 7. . . .4. . . .1 7. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Choice of Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization . . .3 Time Division Multiple Access . . . . 137 7. . . .2. . . . . 166 Conclusion . . . 158 8. . . . .1 Multiple Access Techniques for Wireless Communication . . .6 8. . . . . . . . . 163 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Zero Forcing Equalization . . 161 TDMA/TDD in DECT . . . . . 165 Hybrid Spread Spectrum Techniques . . . . . .4. . . . . .5 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .2 Frequency Division Multiple Access . . . . . . . . .1 8. . . . . . . 156 157 8 Multiple Access Techniques 8. .5 8. . .3 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .com 7. . . .3 7. .6 Conclusion References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Concatenated Codes . . 132 A Generic Adaptive Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 8. . . . . 166 References . . . . . . . . . . . .3 FDMA/FDD in AMPS . . . . . . . .5 Frequency Hopped Multiple Access (FHMA) . . 163 CDMA and Self-interference Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . 136 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 CDMA and Near-Far Problem . 144 Convolutional Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 8. 159 8. . .7 Space Division Multiple Access . .jntuworld. 163 Code Division Multiple Access . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 8. . . . .4 Channel Coding .4. . . . .1 8. . . . . . . . . . . . 161 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Shannon’s Channel Capacity Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .com . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . .3. . . . . . 143 7. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .2.4 7. . . . . . . . . 155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30 31 37 41 43 44 47 49 49 55 59 61 4 6 7 20 24 25 29 2 3 3. . . . . . . Basic Cellular Structure. .10 The micro-cell zone concept. . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . .2 1. . .11 The bufferless J-channel trunked radio system. . . . . . 3.1 3. . Footprint of cells showing the overlaps and gaps. . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . .4 (a) Frequency division duplexing and (b) time division duplexing. . . . . First tier of co-channel interfering cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phasor diagram of electric fields. . . . when the user is going from i-th cell to j-th cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splitting of congested seven-cell clusters. . .8 3. . . . 1. . . . . . . . . .9 Handoff process with a rectangular cell inclined at an angle θ. . . .6 3. . Data transmission with Bluetooth. The basic radio transmission techniques: (a) simplex. .3 The worldwide mobile subscriber chart. .www. .2 3. . . . . .1 1. . . . . . . . . . . .jntuworld.com List of Figures 1. . . . . . . . ix www. . .jntuworld.5 2. . . . .1 3. . . . . .4 1. . . . Basic mobile communication structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A seven-cell cluster with 60o sectors. . . . . .5 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Free space propagation model. . . (b) half duplex and (c) full duplex.com . . . . A cell divided into three 120o sectors. . . Frequency reuse technique of a cellular system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . .12 Discrete-time Markov chain for the M/M/J/J trunked radio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handoff scenario at two adjacent cell boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . Handoff process associated with power levels. . . . . . . . . . . . Two-ray reflection model.7 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . showing the near and far fields. . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 DQPSK constellation diagram. . . . . . . .8 5. .3. . . . . .10 Schematic representation of level crossing with a Rayleigh fading envelope at 10 Hz Doppler spread. (b) baseband Doppler filter. . Rayleigh probability density function. 109 Scematic of the line coding techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 6. . . . . . . . . . Fresnel zones. . . . . . . . . . . 95 5.4 5. . . . Direct RF pulsed channel IR measurement. . . . . . . .com 4. . Illustration of Doppler effect. Frequency domain channel IR measurement.11 Clarke and Gan’s model for Rayleigh fading generation using quadrature amplitude modulation with (a) RF Doppler filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 QPSK transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . .7 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and. . .1 6. . . . . . . . . . 107 QPSK signal constellation. . . .6 4. . . . . . . . .www. . . . . .1 5. . . . 5. .13 Two-ray Rayleigh fading model. . . . . . .12 Rayleigh fading model to get both the flat and frequency selective channel conditions.4 6. . . . . 111 Rectangular Pulse . .2 5. . . .2 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Phase tree of 1101000 CPFSK sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Raised Cosine Pulse. .6 6. . . . .8 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 6. . . 118 Spectrum of MSK . . . . . . . . . . A generic transmitted pulsed RF signal.4 4. . . .com . . . . . . .jntuworld. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 4. . 118 x www. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nakagami probability density function. . . . Diffraction through a sharp edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resulting in Rayleigh fading. .6 5. . . . .5 6. . . .jntuworld. . . . . .3 6. . . . . . . 61 64 65 66 68 79 83 85 86 87 91 93 93 94 5.5 5. . . . . . . . . . . . Two ray NLoS multipath. . . . . . . . . Knife-edge Diffraction Model . Ricean probability density function. . . . . . . . . .9 98 99 BPSK signal constellation. . . . .7 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . .9 Equivalent phasor diagram of Figure 4. . .3 5. . . . Huygen’s secondary wavelets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship among different channel functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 137 Maximal ratio combining technique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 A convolutional encoder with n=2 and k=1. . . .jntuworld. . . 159 The basic concept of TDMA. . . . . . . . . . . 119 6.1 8. . . . . . .2 8. . . .7 7. . 164 xi www. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 OFDM Transmitter and Receiver Block Diagram. . . . 127 7. . . . . . . . 140 RAKE receiver. . . . . . . .4 7. . . . . . . . . . .10 GMSK generation scheme. . . .com 6. . . .6 7. . . with M receivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 7. . 121 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 A general framework of fading effects and their mitigation techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 8. 153 Tree diagram representation of a convolutional encoder. . . . .jntuworld. . . . . . . 130 A generic adaptive equalizer. .12 Spectrum of GMSK scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 6. . 162 The basic concept of CDMA. . . . . . . . 153 State diagram representation of a convolutional encoder. . . .10 Block diagram of a turbo encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . .5 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Receiver selection diversity. . .11 A simple GMSK receiver. . .3 7. . . . . . . . . . 154 Trellis diagram of a convolutional encoder.8 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The basic concept of FDMA. . . . . . . . . . .1 7. . . . . . . .2 7.www. . . . . .

com List of Tables 2.1 7. .1 Main WCDMA parameters .jntuworld. .com . .www. . . . . .jntuworld. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Finite field elements for US-CDPD .1 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 xii www. . 152 MA techniques in different wireless communication systems .

With the demand for newer and better mobile radio communication systems during the World War II and the development of Frequency Modulation (FM) technique by Edwin Armstrong.2 Evolution of Mobile Radio Communications The first wireline telephone system was introduced in the year 1877. the mobile radio communication systems began to witness many new changes. the evolution as well as the fundamental techniques of the mobile communication is discussed. However. telephones have replaced the telegrams and letters.jntuworld. Mobile communication systems as early as 1934 were based on Amplitude Modulation (AM) schemes and only certain public organizations maintained such systems.www. After its discovery.com Chapter 1 Introductory Concepts 1. 1. the term ‘mobile’ has completely revolutionized the communication by opening up innovative applications that are limited to one’s imagination. Mobile telephone was introduced in the year 1946. during its initial three and a half decades it found very less market penetration owing to high 1 www. mobile communication has become the backbone of the society. Today.jntuworld. Similarly.1 Introduction Communication is one of the integral parts of science that has always been a focus point for exchanging information among parties at locations physically apart. In this chapter. All the mobile system technologies have improved the way of living.com . Its main plus point is that it has privileged a common mass of society.

com Figure 1. mobile communication was restricted to certain official users and the cellular concept was never even dreamt of being made commercially available. Initially. mobile communications began to be a promising field of expanse which could serve wider populations. A schematic of the subscribers is shown in Fig. Moreover.com . Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) was the first U. there has been an astronomical growth in the cellular radio and the personal communication systems. However. The number of cellular telephone users grew from 25000 in 1984 to around 3 billion in the year 2007 and the demand rate is increasing day by day.S. But with the development of the cellular concept in the 1960s at the Bell Laboratories.www. with the development of newer and better technologies starting from the 1970s and with the mobile users now connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).jntuworld. 2 www. costs and numerous technological drawbacks. even the growth in the cellular networks was very slow.1: The worldwide mobile subscriber chart. cellular telephone system and it was deployed in 1983.1. 1. Wireless services have since then been experiencing a 50% per year growth rate.jntuworld.

With the increase in the number of users. PACS. the concept of cellular communication was evolved. accommodating them within the limited available frequency spectrum became a major problem. Numerous mobile radio standards have been deployed at various places such as AMPS. Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) and their hybrids are used.com Figure 1. To resolve this problem. Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).jntuworld. The range of mobility was defined by the transmitter power. 3 www. 1.jntuworld. To accommodate multiple users Time Division multiple Access (TDMA). Initially the mobile communication was limited between one pair of users on single channel pair. The present day cellular communication uses a basic unit called cell.com . Each cell consists of small hexagonal area with a base station located at the center of the cell which communicates with the user. radio communication has been used extensively.www.2: Basic mobile communication structure.3 Present Day Mobile Communication Since the time of wireless telegraphy. Our society has been looking for acquiring mobility in communication since then. type of antenna used and the frequency of operation.

1. Depending on the radio channel.www. there can be three different types of mobile communication. Figure 1. (b) half duplex and (c) full duplex. mobile radio terminal means any radio terminal that could be moved during its operation.2 shows a basic mobile communication with low power transmitters/receivers at the BS. PHS and IS-95. duplexer and an antenna while the BS consists of transceiver and channel multiplexer along with antennas mounted on the tower.com Figure 1. a Mobile Station (MS) or subscriber unit communicates to a fixed Base Station (BS) which in turn communicates to the desired user at the other end. each utilizing different set of frequencies and allocating different number of users and channels.jntuworld.4 Fundamental Techniques By definition.jntuworld. the MS and also 4 www. however. control circuitry.3: The basic radio transmission techniques: (a) simplex.com . In general. NTT. GSM. The BS are also linked to a power source for the transmission of the radio signals for communication and are connected to a fixed backbone network. The MS consists of transceiver.

• Full Duplex System: Full duplex systems allow two way simultaneous communications.www.jntuworld. The first user can communicate with the second user but the second user can communicate to the first user only after the first user has finished his conversation. The MSC is sometimes also called Mobile Telephone Switching Office (MTSO).4.e. • Half Duplex System: Half duplex radio systems that use half duplex radio channels allow for non-simultaneous bidirectional communication. At a time.. mobile radio transmission systems may be classified as the following three categories which is also shown in Fig. This is possible by one of the two following methods. However. the second user cannot communicate with the first user. This can be done by providing two simultaneous but separate channels to both the users.jntuworld. 1. One frequency channel is transmitted downstream from the BS to the MS (forward channel). 5 www. the communication is unidirectional. the user can only transmit or receive information. Both the users can communicate to each other simultaneously. A walkie-talkie is an example of a half duplex system which uses ‘push to talk’ and ‘release to listen’ type of switches. – Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD): FDD supports two-way radio communication by using two distinct radio channels.1 Radio Transmission Techniques Based on the type of channels being utilized. The radio signals emitted by the BS decay as the signals travel away from it. The fixed backbone network is a wired network that links all the base stations and also the landline and other telephone networks through wires. 1. A minimum amount of signal strength is needed in order to be detected by the mobile stations or mobile sets which are the hand-held personal units (portables) or those installed in the vehicles (mobiles).3: • Simplex System: Simplex systems utilize simplex channels i. The first user can communicate with the second user. One example of such a system is a pager.com .com the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The region over which the signal strength lies above such a threshold value is known as the coverage area of a BS.

com Figure 1.www.4: (a) Frequency division duplexing and (b) time division duplexing. on the other hand. This toggling takes place very rapidly and is imperceptible to the user. which is then connected to a dedicated telephone line with a specific telephone number on the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). To mitigate self-interference between upstream and downstream transmissions. a minimum amount of frequency separation must be maintained between the frequency pair. – Time Division Duplexing (TDD): TDD uses a single frequency band to transmit signals in both the downstream and upstream directions.jntuworld. simultaneous transmission in both directions is possible. A mobile system. Cordless telephone systems are full duplex communication systems that use radio to connect to a portable handset to a single dedicated BS. in general. A second frequency is used in the upstream direction and supports transmission from the MS to the BS (reverse channel). 6 www.jntuworld. A full duplex mobile system can further be subdivided into two category: a single MS for a dedicated BS. is the example of the second category of a full duplex mobile system where many users connect among themselves via a single BS. as shown in Fig. and many MS for a single BS.4. TDD operates by toggling transmission directions over a time interval. Because of the pairing of frequencies.com . 1.

www. This cluster can repeat itself and hence the same set of channels can be used again and again.5. Each cell has a low power transmitter with a coverage area equal to the area of the 7 www.jntuworld.e. If a single transmitter/ receiver is used with only a single base station.5 How a Mobile Call is Actually Made? In order to know how a mobile call is made.1 Cellular Concept Cellular telephone systems must accommodate a large number of users over a large geographic area with limited frequency spectrum. called cells. But a high power radio transmitter causes harm to environment. we should first look into the basics of cellular concept and main operational channels involved in making a call. 1. 1.com Figure 1. Each cell uses a certain number of the available channels and a group of adjacent cells together use all the available channels. Mobile communication thus calls for replacing the high power transmitters by low power transmitters by dividing the coverage area into small segments. a high powered transmitter therefore has to be used.jntuworld. For a large geographic coverage area. then sufficient amount of power may not be present at a huge distance from the BS.5: Basic Cellular Structure. Such a group is called a cluster. These are given below. i.com .. with limited number of channels.

Control channels are usually monitored by mobiles.. they are used for setting up calls and to divert the call to unused voice channels.www.e. then the control channels for that particular location will be different and hence the mobile will not work. These channels transmit and receive call initiation and service request messages.5. Each mobile has a mobile identification number (MIN). This technique of substituting a single high powered transmitter by several low powered transmitters to support many users is the backbone of the cellular concept.3 Making a Call When a mobile is idle. So all mobiles in that country or continent will search among the same set of control channels. the control channels will be the same. i. He 8 www. • Reverse Voice Channel (RVC): This is used for the voice transmission from the MS to the BS.com cell. 1.2 Operational Channels In each cell. it is not experiencing the process of a call. However.com . For a particular country or continent.. When a user wants to make a call. Hence these are also called setup channels. when a mobile moves to a different country or continent.e.jntuworld. These are: • Forward Voice Channel (FVC): This channel is used for the voice transmission from the BS to the MS. The FCC is used for control signaling purpose from the BS to MS. • Reverse Control Channel (RCC): This is used for the call control purpose from the MS to the BS. However. there are four types of channels that take active part during a mobile call. The mobile then monitors this particular FCC. then it searches all the FCCs to determine the one with the highest signal strength. he sends a call request to the MSC on the reverse control channel.5. the mobile again searches all the FCCs for the one with the highest signal strength. when the signal strength falls below a particular threshold that is insufficient for a call to take place.jntuworld. • Forward Control Channel (FCC): Control channels are generally used for controlling the activity of the call. i. 1.

This is called handoff. Solution: The ‘pager’ would have the longest and the ‘mobile phone’ would have the shortest battery life. (justification is left on the readers) 9 www. the MSC transfers the call to one of the unused voice channels of the new base station or it transfers the control of the current voice channels to the new base station. 10 log10 (1W ) = 0dB. Ex. Solution: Usually. which device would have the (i) shortest.. 1W = 103 mW = 30dBm = 0dB. The base station then sends a message to the mobile to move to the particular channels and it also sends a signal to the mobile for ringing. i. then the signal strength of the initial base station may not be sufficient to continue the call in progress. Thus.com . 1: Suppose a mobile unit transmits 10 W power at a certain place. So the call has to be transferred to the other base station.www.e. Hence. in order to maintain the call. Express this power in terms of dBm.com also sends the MIN of the person to whom the call has to be made. and. that mobile sends an acknowledgment to the BS. When a mobile moves from the coverage area of one base station to the coverage area of another base station i. 10W = 10 log10 (10W ) = 10dB = 40dBm. the MSC adjusts the transmitted power of the mobile which is usually expressed in dB or dBm.. The BS then informs the MSC that the mobile is within its coverage area. The base station transmits this MIN and all the mobiles within the coverage area of that base station receive the MIN and match it with their own. 1 W is equivalent to 0 dB. If the MIN matches with a particular MS. Ex.jntuworld. xdB = (x + 30)dBm. The MSC then sends this MIN to all the base stations. In such cases. a cordless phone and a mobile phone. 2: Among a pager.e.jntuworld. 1 mW power developed over a 100 Ω load is equivalently called 0 dBm power. The MSC then instructs the base station to access specific unused voice channel pair. from one cell to another cell. This means. (ii) longest battery life? Justify. In order to maintain the quality of the call.

Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice.. 4th ed. 2002. K.6 Future Trends Tremendous changes are occurring in the area of mobile radio communications. Singapore: Pearson Education. G. T. 2000. 10 www. Feher. 2nd ed. NJ: Prentice Hall.jntuworld. Rappaport. J.com .jntuworld. Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum Applications.www. Proakis. 3. 1. S. 1995. Bluetooth is rapidly becoming a common feature in mobiles for local connections.com 1. Upper Saddle River. The mobile communication has provided global connectivity to the people at a lower cost due to advances in the technology and also because of the growing competition among the service providers. NY: McGraw Hill.8 Mbps to greater than 10 Mbps.7 References 1. 2. Rapid development of the Internet with its new services and applications has created fresh challenges for the further development of mobile communication systems. Further enhancements in modulation schemes will soon increase the Internet access rates on the mobile from current 1. so much so that the mobile phone of yesterday is rapidly turning into a sophisticated mobile device capable of more applications than PCs were capable of only a few years ago. Digital Communications. We would review certain major features as well as standards of the mobile communication till the present day technology in the next chapter. Inc.

www.com Chapter 2 Modern Wireless Communication Systems At the initial phase. These are as 11 www. deployed in Chicago in 1983. Moreover. However.8 .2 2G: Second Generation Networks Digital modulation formats were introduced in this generation with the main technology as TDMA/FDD and CDMA/FDD. 2. cellular telephone system. mobile communication was restricted to certain official users and the cellular concept was never even dreamt of being made commercially available. The main technology of this first generation mobile system was FDMA/FDD and analog FM. The 2G systems introduced three popular TDMA standards and one popular CDMA standard in the market.jntuworld.2 GHz frequency band. with the development of newer and better technologies starting from the 1970s and with the mobile users now connected to the PSTN. the spread of mobile communication was very fast in the 1990s when the government throughout the world provided radio spectrum licenses for Personal Communication Service (PCS) in 1.com .S.jntuworld. there has been a remarkable growth in the cellular radio. even the growth in the cellular networks was very slow. It was the first U. 2. However.1 1G: First Generation Networks The first mobile phone system in the market was AMPS.

slotted paging. enhanced mobile station identities etc. It was the first fully digital system utilizing the 900 MHz frequency band.3 2. over-the-air activation (meaning the mobile can be activated by the service provider without any third party intervention).2 CDMA/FDD Standard Interim Standard 95 (IS-95): The IS-95 standard.2.jntuworld. introduced by Groupe Special Mobile. The main advantage of this standard was its low transmission bit rate which led to its better spectrum utilization. 8 full-rate or 16 half-rate TDMA channels per carrier. also popularly known as CDMAOne. Certain services that have been standardized as a part of IS-95 standard are: short messaging service.5G standard. (c) Pacific Digital Cellular (PDC): This standard was developed as the counterpart of NADC in Japan.2. In this system. The need of this system was mainly to increase the capacity over the earlier analog (AMPS) system. was aimed at designing a uniform pan-European mobile system.www. low speed data services and support for SMS for which it gained quick popularity. encryption of speech. Here.25 MHz channels. the main upgradation techniques are: • supporting higher data rate transmission for web browsing 12 www. 2.com follows: 2.2. 2. (b) Interim Standard 136 (IS-136): It was popularly known as North American Digital Cellular (NADC) system.1 TDMA/FDD Standards (a) Global System for Mobile (GSM): The GSM standard. The initial GSM had 200 KHz radio channels. the new data centric standards were developed to be overlaid on 2G standards and this is known as 2.com . there were 3 full-rate TDMA users over each 30 KHz channel.5G Mobile Networks In an effort to retrofit the 2G standards for compatibility with increased throughput rates to support modern Internet application. uses 64 orthogonally coded users and codewords are transmitted simultaneously on each of 1.jntuworld.

General Packet Radio Service (GPRS). ubiquitous wireless communication standard for all countries.www. which. IMT-2000 defines a set of technical requirements for the realization of such targets.com • supporting e-mail traffic • enabling location-based mobile service 2. targets to implement a global frequency band that would support a single.jntuworld.com .5G networks also brought into the market some popular application.Several radio access technologies have been accepted by ITU as part of the IMT-2000 framework. a few of which are: Wireless Application Protocol (WAP).3 3G: Third Generation Networks 3G is the third generation of mobile phone standards and technology. 2. video calls. 3G networks enable network operators to offer users a wider range of more advanced services while achieving greater network capacity through improved spectral efficiency.jntuworld.5G.4Mbit/s on the down link and 5. superseding 2. High Speed Circuit Switched Dada (HSCSD).8Mbit/s on the uplink. 3G networks are wide area cellular telephone networks which evolved to incorporate high-speed internet access and video telephony. It is based on the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) family of standards under the International Mobile Telecommunications-2000 (IMT-2000). together with the main industry and standardization bodies worldwide. which can be summarized as follows: • high data rates: 144 kbps in all environments and 2 Mbps in low-mobility and indoor environments • symmetrical and asymmetrical data transmission 13 www. Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE) etc. all in a mobile environment.to provide the framework for the definition of the 3G mobile systems. ITU launched IMT-2000 program. Services include wide-area wireless voice telephony. Additional features also include HSPA data transmission capabilities able to deliver speeds up to 14. and broadband wireless data.

which is WCDMA operating at 2.com • circuit-switched and packet-switched-based services • speech quality comparable to wire-line quality • improved spectral efficiency • several simultaneous services to end users for multimedia services • seamless incorporation of second-generation cellular systems • global roaming • open architecture for the rapid introduction of new services and technology. An organization called 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) has continued that work by defining a mobile system that fulfills the IMT-2000 standard. Japan.jntuworld. In the USA and other parts of America. 2. which are part of the 3G framework known as IMT-2000: • W-CDMA • CDMA2000 • TD-SCDMA Europe.2 3G W-CDMA (UMTS) WCDMA is based on DS-CDMA (direct sequencecode division multiple access) technology in which user-information bits are spread over a wide bandwidth (much larger than the information signal bandwidth) by multiplying the user data with 14 www. ITU finally approved a family of five 3G standards. 2.www. This system is called Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS). After trying to establish a single 3G standard.1 GHz. WCDMA will have to use another part of the radio spectrum.jntuworld.3. there are several different radio access technologies defined within ITU.3. based on either CDMA or TDMA technology.com . UMTS and WCDMA are often used as synonyms. and Asia have agreed upon a 3G standard called the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).1 3G Standards and Access Technologies As mentioned before.

com the spreading code. This allows networks using both WCDMA and GSM to balance the load between the networks and base the HO on actual measurements from the terminals for different radio conditions in addition to other criteria available. The support for handovers (HO) between GSM and WCDMA is part of the first standard version. The processing gain term refers to the relationship between the signal bandwidth and the information bandwidth. Thus. This means that all multi-mode WCDMA/GSM terminals will support measurements from the one system while camped on the other one.com .jntuworld. which. In a CDMA system. 15 www. In the FDD mode. WCDMA supports two basic modes of operation: FDD and TDD.84 Mcps. separate 5-MHz carrier frequencies with duplex spacing are used for the uplink and downlink. The wide carrier bandwidth of WCDMA allows supporting high user-data rates and also has certain performance benefits. WCDMA allows many performance.www. In WCDMA each user is allocated frames of 10 ms duration. The actual carrier spacing to be used by the operator may vary on a 200-kHz grid between approximately 4. WCDMA uses coherent detection based on the pilot symbols and/or common pilot. respectively. such as increased multipath diversity. such as transmit diversity or advanced CDMA receiver concepts.enhancement methods to be used. the data rate among the users can change from frame to frame. The chip (symbol rate) rate of the spreading sequence is 3.Table summaries the main WCDMA parameters. the name wideband is derived to differentiate it from the 2G CDMA (IS-95).2288 Mcps. which has a chip rate of 1.4 and 5 MHz. all users are active at the same time on the same frequency and are separated from each other with the use of user specific spreading codes. depending on spectrum arrangement and the interference situation. in the WCDMA system deployment is used together with the 5-MHz carrier spacing. This fast radio capacity allocation (or the limits for variation in the uplink) is controlled and coordinated by the radio resource management (RRM) functions in the network to achieve optimum throughput for packet data services and to ensure sufficient quality of service (QoS) for circuit-switched users. during which the user-data rate is kept constant. whereas in TDD only one 5-MHz carrier is time shared between the uplink and the downlink.jntuworld. However.

Since more phones can be served by 16 www.com . FoMA. as well as all 2. W-CDMA deployments have been exclusively UMTS based.3 3G CDMA2000 Code division multiple access 2000 is the natural evolution of IS-95 (cdmaOne). 2.www. optional in the implementation The world’s first commercial W-CDMA service. Elsewhere.5G TDMA technologies. UMTS or W-CDMA. CDMA permits many simultaneous transmitters on the same frequency channel. is the brand name for the 3G services being offered by Japanese mobile phone operator NTT DoCoMo. FoMA is the short name for Freedom of Mobile Multimedia Access.(code division multiple access) is a mobile digital radio technology where channels are defined with codes (PN sequences). smart antennas Supported by the standard.jntuworld.com Table 2. with additional capacity and bandwidth provided by a new CDMA air interface. The network structure and bit level packaging of GSM data is retained by W-CDMA.84 Mcps 10 ms Multiple services with different quality of service requirements multiplexed on one connection Multi-rate concept Detection Variable spreading factor and multicode Coherent using pilot symbols or common pilot Multi-user detection. assures backward compatibility with the second generation GSM. IS-136 and PDC TDMA technologies. It includes additional functionality that increases its spectral efficiency and data rate capability.3. was launched by NTT DoCoMo in Japan in 2001.1: Main WCDMA parameters Multiple access method Duplexing method DS-CDMA Frequency division duplex/time division duplex Base station synchronisation Chip rate Frame length Service multiplexing Asynchronous operation 3.jntuworld.

9 Mbit/s on the downlink per carrier). • The cdma2000 1xEV-DO supports greater than 2. Typical deployments are expected to include 3 carriers for a peak rate of 14.CDMA2000 1xEV and CDMA2000 EV-DV.jntuworld. a brief discussion about all these standards is given.com fewer cell sites.Higher rates are possible by bundling multiple channels together. • CDMA2000 EV-DV can offer data rates upto 144kbps with about twice as many voice channels as IS-95B. although the user data rates are much lower and highly dependent on other factors.www. • It has higher rates per carrier (up to 4.or FDMA-based standards.7 Mbit/s. CDMA2000 3x is (also known as EV-DO Rev B) is a multi-carrier evolution. CDMA2000 1xRTT: RTT stands for Radio Transmission Technology and the designation ”1x”. the velociy of user and the propagating conditions.jntuworld. indicates the same RF bandwidth as IS-95. CDMA-based standards have a significant economic advantage over TDMA.com . These are the approved radio interfaces for the ITU’s IMT-2000 standard.The main features of CDMA2000 1X are as follows: • Supports an instantaneous data rate upto 307kpbs for a user in packet mode and a typical throughput rates of 144kbps per user. meaning ”1 times Radio Transmission Technology”.4Mbps of instantaneous high-speed packet throughput per user on a CDMA channel. It 17 www. The main CDMA2000 standards are: CDMA2000 1xRTT. CDMA2000 EV: This is an evolutionary advancement of CDMA with the following characteristics: • Provides CDMA carriers with the option of installing radio channels with data only (CDMA2000 EV-DO) and with data and voice (CDMA2000 EV-DV) .depending on the number of user. • Supports up to twice as many voice users a the 2G CDMA standard • Provides the subscriber unit with upto two times the standby time for longer lasting battery life. This standard is being developed by Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) of US and is is standardized by 3GPP2. In the following.

This reduces the number of users in each timeslot. and the base station can deduce the downlink channel information from uplink channel estimates. TD-SCDMA also uses TDMA in addition to the CDMA used in WCDMA. By dynamically adjusting the number of timeslots used for downlink and uplink.com enhances the user experience and enables new services such as high definition video streaming. is a 3G mobile telecommunications standard. web browsing. • It has efficient support for services that have asymmetric download and upload requirements (i. especially to users at the edge of the cell.3. video telephony. different data rates required in each direction) such as file transfers. • It provides increased talk-time and standby time.jntuworld. TD-SCDMA is based on spread spectrum technology. being pursued in the People’s Republic of China by the Chinese Academy of Telecommunications Technology (CATT). which is helpful to the application of beamforming techniques. or TD-SCDMA. using the same carrier frequency for uplink and downlink means that the channel condition is the same on both directions. enhancing the experience for latency-sensitive services such as gaming. spectrum allocation flexibility is also increased.4 3G TD-SCDMA Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access. Since it does not require paired spectrum for downlink and uplink. • The interference from the adjacent sectors is reduced by hybrid frequency reuse and improves the rates that can be offered. the system can more easily accommodate asymmetric traffic with different data rate requirements on downlink and uplink than FDD schemes. in contrast to the FDD scheme used by W-CDMA. 2. Also. TD-SCDMA uses TDD. • Uses statistical multiplexing across channels to further reduce latency.jntuworld.e. and broadband multimedia content delivery. which reduces the implementation 18 www.com . This proposal was adopted by ITU as one of the 3G options in late 1999.www. remote console sessions and web browsing.

2. some of these applications are given. Below. 2. The ”S” in TD-SCDMA stands for ”synchronous”. It chops up the data being sent and transmits chunks of it on up to 79 different frequencies.com complexity of multiuser detection and beamforming schemes. at the cost of some hardware complexity in achieving uplink synchronization.jntuworld. mobility (because of lower power control frequency) and complicates radio resource management algorithms. The local loop can be thought of as the ”last mile” of the telecommunication network that resides between the central office (CO) and the individual homes and business in close proximity to the CO.2 Bluetooth • Facilitates ad-hoc data transmission over short distances from fixed and mobile devices as shown in Figure 2. achieved by continuous timing adjustments.jntuworld. which provides broadband telecommunication access in the local exchange. An advantage of WLL technology is that once the wireless equipment is paid for.1 Wireless Local Loop (WLL) and LMDS Microwave wireless links can be used to create a wireless local loop. there are no additional costs for transport between the CO and the customer premises equipment.www. 19 www.com . which means that uplink signals are synchronized at the base station receiver. This reduces the interference between users of the same timeslot using different codes by improving the orthogonality between the codes.4. but the non-continuous transmission also reduces coverage (because of the higher peak power needed). 2.1 • Uses a radio technology called frequency hopping spread spectrum.4. therefore increasing system capacity.4 Wireless Transmission Protocols There are several transmission protocols in wireless manner to achieve different application oriented tasks. Many new services have been proposed and this includes the concept of Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS).

• IEEE 802. with a short range (powerclass-dependent: 1 meter.3 Wireless Local Area Networks (W-LAN) • IEEE 802. the modulation is Gaussian frequency shift keying (GFSK).11a stndard provides upto 54Mbps throughput in the 5GHz band.www.275-5. Wi-Fi networks have limited range.com Figure 2. 10 meters. 20 www. It can achieve a gross data rate of 1 Mb/s • Primarily designed for low power consumption.11 WLAN uses ISM band (5.1: Data transmission with Bluetooth.4GHz and 5GHz bands.com .4. The DS-SS IEEE 802.11b has been called Wi-Fi.jntuworld. Range also varies with frequency band. 100 meters) based on low-cost transceiver microchips in each device 2.11g uses Complementary Code Keying Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (CCK-OFDM) standards in both 2.jntuworld. A typical Wi-Fi home router using 802.11g with a stock antenna might have a range of 32 m (120 ft) indoors and 95 m (300 ft) outdoors.11b or 802.825GHz) • Uses 11Mcps DS-SS spreading and 2Mbps user data rates (will fallback to 1Mbps in noisy conditions) • IEEE 802. In its basic mode.

such as wireless headphones connecting with cell phones via short-range radio. 868 MHz in Europe. scientific and medical (ISM) radio bands.10 miles (5 .4. and 2. The technology is based on the IEEE 802. the WiFi/802. and WiMAX could function on any frequency below 66 GHz (higher frequencies would decrease the range of a Base Station to a few hundred meters in an urban environment).com 2.4. and secure networking.15. ZigBee is targeted at radio-frequency (RF) applications that require a low data rate.15 km) for mobile stations.4-2006 standard for wireless personal area networks (WPANs).300 feet (30 . In contrast.11 wireless local area network standard is limited in most cases to only 100 . long battery life. low-power digital radios based on the IEEE 802. and 3 .16 specification applies across a wide range of the RF spectrum. 2.com .4 WiMax • Provides upto 70 Mb/sec symmetric broadband speed without the need for cables.www.jntuworld.4. • ZigBee operates in the industrial.4 GHz in most worldwide. 2. • This technology is intended to be simpler and cheaper.100m) • The 802. 915 MHz in countries such as USA and Australia. 21 www.6 Wibree • Wibree is a digital radio technology (intended to become an open standard of wireless communications) designed for ultra low power consumption (button cell batteries) within a short range (10 meters / 30 ft) based around low-cost transceiver microchips in each device.16 standard (also called WirelessMAN) • WiMAX can provide broadband wireless access (BWA) up to 30 miles (50 km) for fixed stations.5 Zigbee • ZigBee is the specification for a suite of high level communication protocols using small.jntuworld.

2008. It would also support systems like multicarrier communication. 2. 2. 2002. there are certain objectives that are projected for 4G. R. Inc. represent the next complete evolution in wireless communications.. 2. • It operates in 2.jntuworld.There is no formal definition for 4G . S. T.com • Wibree is known as Bluetooth with low energy technology. 3. with premium quality and high security. 4th ed. Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice. Singapore: Pearson Education. New Delhi: PHI. 2004. Lee. data and streamed multimedia can be given to users at higher data rates than previous generations. C.com . however. Mobile Communications Engineering. 2nd ed. or 4G (Fourth Generation). It will be capable of providing between 100 Mbit/s and 1 Gbit/s speeds both indoors and outdoors.www. Pandya.jntuworld. MIMO and UWB. 2nd ed.4 GHz ISM band with physical layer bit rate of 1 Mbps. W. A 4G system will be able to provide a comprehensive IP solution where voice. Rappaport. Mobile and Personal Communication Systems and Services.5 Conclusion: Beyond 3G Networks Beyond 3G networks. 22 www.6 References 1. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.

A minimum amount of signal strength (let us say. which gives this actual radio coverage. the following four parameters are most important while considering the cellular issues: system capacity. is called the foot print of a cell (in reality. Starting from the basic notion of a cell. In practice.com Chapter 3 The Cellular Engineering Fundamentals 3. 3.www.jntuworld. It might so happen that either there may be an overlap between any two such side by side circles or there might be a gap between the 23 www. x dB) is needed in order to be detected by the MS or mobile sets which may the hand-held personal units or those installed in the vehicles. The region over which the signal strength lies above this threshold value x dB is known as the coverage area of a BS and it must be a circular region. we have seen that the technique of substituting a single high power transmitter by several low power transmitters to support many users is the backbone of the cellular concept.jntuworld.1 Introduction In Chapter 1. Such a circle. considering the BS to be isotropic radiator.com . it is amorphous). quality of service. spectrum efficiency and power management. we would deal with these parameters in the context of cellular engineering in this chapter.2 What is a Cell? The power of the radio signals transmitted by the BS decay as the signals travel away from it.

is a technique of reusing frequencies and channels within a communication system to improve capacity and spectral efficiency.1. Hence regular hexagonal geometry is used as the cells in mobile communication. Frequency reuse is one of the fundamental concepts on which commercial wireless systems are based that involve the partitioning of an RF radiating area into cells.3 Frequency Reuse Frequency reuse. it supports even the weakest mobile with occurs at the edges of the cell. a regular hexagon covers the maximum area.com Figure 3. We need a regular shape for cellular design over a territory which can be served by 3 regular polygons. The increased capacity in a commercial wireless network. frequency planning.. Along with its regularity. cannot serve as a regular shape to describe cells.1: Footprint of cells showing the overlaps and gaps. which can cover the entire area without any overlap and gaps.www. a cell must be designed such that it is most reliable too.jntuworld.jntuworld. i. compared with a network with a single transmitter. namely. Frequency reuse in mobile cellular systems means that frequencies allocated to 24 www.e. therefore. equilateral triangle.com . or. For any distance between the center and the farthest point in the cell from it. This is shown in Figure 3. square and regular hexagon. Such a circular geometry. comes from the fact that the same radio frequency can be reused in a different area for a completely different transmission. coverage areas of two adjacent circles. 3.

If each cell is allotted K duplex channels with all being allotted unique and disjoint channel groups we have S = KN under normal circumstances. showing the co-channels cells in different clusters by the same letter. if T and K remain constant. M (3.com Figure 3. as shown in (3. The closest distance between the co-channel cells (in different clusters) is determined by the choice of the cluster size and the layout of the cell cluster.2 shows a frequency planning with cluster size of 7. Clearly. The repeating regular pattern of cells is called cluster. Figure 3. the total number of duplex channels.2: Frequency reuse technique of a cellular system. small N 25 www. the service are reused in a regular pattern of cells. Now. if the cluster are repeated M times within the total area. in another cluster. or. then N∝ 1 .com . then T ∝M and.jntuworld.1).jntuworld. as well as. if K and N remain constant.www. the total number of users in the system would be T = M S = KM N .2) (3.1) Hence the capacity gain achieved is directly proportional to the number of times a cluster is repeated. The reuse of frequencies enables a cellular system to handle a huge number of calls with a limited number of channels. for a fixed cell size. Since each cell is designed to use radio frequencies only within its boundaries. Such cells are called ‘co-channel’ cells. Consider a cellular system with S duplex channels available for use and let N be the number of cells in a cluster. the same frequencies can be reused in other cells not far away without interference. each covered by one base station.

com . Solution: For hexagonal cells. Ex. Using law of vector addition. Hint: In general.www.jntuworld. 1: Find the relationship between any two nearest co-channel cell distance D and the cluster size N. The normalized co-channel cell distance Dn can be calculated by traveling ’i’ cells in one direction and then traveling ’j’ cells in anticlockwise 120o of the primary direction. where R is the radius of any cell. 3 26 www. co-channel cells are located much closer and hence more interference. However for small N.com decreases the size of the cluster with in turn results in the increase of the number of clusters (3. Thus. Ex.5) 3R between two adjacent cells with it.3) (3. (3. (3. where i and j are integer numbers. the answer must be N + 6( N ) = 3N . it can be shown that the distance between two adjacent √ cell centers = 3R. Hence the smallest N having interference below the tolerated limit is used. 2 Dn = j 2 cos2 (30o ) + (i + j sin(30o ))2 i ≥ 0. and hence compute the total number of cells in this large hexagon. However. j ≥ 0. the surface area of a large hexagon with radius D.6) √ √ D = Dn 3R = 3N R. 2: Find out the surface area of a regular hexagon with radius R. this large hexagon with radius D encompasses the center cluster of N cells and one-third of the cells associated with six other peripheral large hexagons.2) and hence the capacity. the cluster size N cannot take on any value and is given only by the following equation N = i2 + ij + j 2 .4) which turns out to be Dn = Multiplying the actual distance √ i2 + ij + j 2 = √ N. we get (3.jntuworld. The value of N is determined by calculating the amount of interference that can be tolerated for a sufficient quality communication.

Each time a call attempt is made from a cell the corresponding BS requests a channel from MSC. the mobile service providers had to follow strategies which ensure the effective utilization of the limited radio spectrum. Any communication within the cell can only be made with the designated unused channels of that particular cell. 27 www.1 Fixed Channel Assignment (FCA) In fixed channel assignment strategy each cell is allocated a fixed number of voice channels. To avoid co-channel interference any channel that in use in one cell can only be reassigned simultaneously to another cell in the system if the distance between the two cells is larger than minimum reuse distance. 3. This was named as borrowing strategy.4. In such cases the MSC supervises the borrowing process and ensures that none of the calls in progress are interrupted.jntuworld.. 3. good quality of service.com 3. Channel assignment strategies are classified into two types: fixed and dynamic. DCA has reduced the likelihood of blocking and even increased the trunking capacity of the network as all of the channels are available to all cells.com . With increased capacity and low interference being the prime objectives. But this type of assignment strategy results in heavy load on switching center at heavy traffic condition. as discussed below.e. A variety of channel assignment strategies have been followed to aid these objectives.www. i.4.jntuworld.4 Channel Assignment Strategies With the rapid increase in number of mobile users. Suppose if all the channels are occupied. After the call is over the channel is returned and kept in a central pool. Later there was another approach in which the channels were borrowed from adjacent cell if all of its own designated channels were occupied.2 Dynamic Channel Assignment (DCA) In dynamic channel assignment strategy channels are temporarily assigned for use in cells for the duration of the call. The MSC then allocates a channel to the requesting the BS. then the call is blocked and subscriber has to wait. When compared to the FCA. This is simplest of the channel assignment strategies as it requires very simple circuitry but provides worst channel utilization. a frequency reuse scheme was helpful in achieving this objectives.

Among these channels. the MSC automatically transfers the call to a new FDD channel without disturbing the conversation. a total of 20 control channels and a total of 640 voice channels are kept. On the other hand. Hence the total available duplex channels are = 33 MHz / 50 kHz = 660 in number. to keep the communication between the user pair. the user channel has to be shifted from one BS to the other without interrupting the call. Give a distribution of voice and control channels. Here.com Ex.3) by two integers i and j. we have to go for a more exact solution.e. total channels per cell are 660/7 ≈ 94.5 Handoff Process When a user moves from one cell to the other. i. We know that for this system. and (iii) 8 cell reuse technique. total channels per cell = 660/4 = 165. when a MS moves into another cell.jntuworld.com . 6 cells can use 3 control channels and the rest two can use 2 control channels each. This is one solution. 5 cells can use 92 voice channels and the rest two can use 90 voice channels each. 5 x 92 + 2 x 90 = 640 voice channels. 3: A total of 33 MHz bandwidth is allocated to a FDD cellular system with two 25 KHz simplex channels to provide full duplex voice and control channels. voice channels are 160 and control channels are 5 in number. there might exist other solutions too.jntuworld. Therefore.www. and. (b) For N = 7.. Once a signal 28 www. Assume 1 MHz of spectrum is allocated to control channels. This process is called as handoff. Solution: One duplex channel = 2 x 25 = 50 kHz of spectrum. (c) The option N = 8 is not a valid option since it cannot satisfy equation (3. 3. (a) For N = 4. A schematic diagram of handoff is given in Figure 3. (ii) 7 cell. while the conversation is still in progress. Thus the total solution for this case is: 6 x 3 + 1 x 2 = 20 control channels. Compute the number of channels available per cell if the system uses (i) 4 cell. 1 MHz / 50 kHz = 20 channels are kept as control channels. Processing of handoff is an important task in any cellular system. Among these.3. Handoffs must be performed successfully and be imperceptible to the users.

then a slightly stronger level is chosen as the threshold (PrH )at which handoff has to be made. then MSC has to be burdened with unnecessary handoffs. level is set as the minimum acceptable for good voice quality (Prmin ). defined as ∆ = PrH − Prmin (3. the handoff threshold or the power margin varies from cell to cell.3: Handoff scenario at two adjacent cell boundary.www.com Figure 3. 3.4.7) is quite an important parameter during the handoff process since this margin ∆ can neither be too large nor too small. If ∆ is too high o the other hand.com . then there may not be enough time to complete the handoff and the call might be lost even if the user crosses the cell boundary. If ∆ is too small.1 Factors Influencing Handoffs The following factors influence the entire handoff process: (a) Transmitted power: as we know that the transmission power is different for different cells.jntuworld. A parameter. Therefore ∆ should be judiciously chosen to ensure imperceptible handoffs and to meet other objectives. This is because MS may not intend to enter the other cell. as shown in Figure 3. called power margin.jntuworld. (b) Received power: the received power mostly depends on the Line of Sight (LoS) path between the user and the BS.5. Especially when the user is on the boundary of 29 www.

(3. To illustrate the reasons (c) and (d).www.com Figure 3. the LoS path plays a critical role in handoffs and therefore the power margin ∆ depends on the minimum received power value from cell to cell. (c) Area and shape of the cell: Apart from the power levels.com . also fixes the handoff strategy of a cell. as shown in the Figure 3. the cell structure also a plays an important role in the handoff process.4: Handoff process associated with power levels. when the user is going from i-th cell to j-th cell. the two cells. The number of crossings along R1 side is : (N1 cosθ + N2 sinθ)R1 and the number of crossings along R2 side is : (N1 sinθ + N2 cosθ)R2 .5.8) 30 www. (d) Mobility of users: The number of mobile users entering or going out of a particular cell.jntuworld. let us consider a rectangular cell with sides R1 and R2 inclined at an angle θ with horizon. Then the handoff rate λH can be written as λH = (N1 cosθ + N2 sinθ)R1 + (N1 sinθ + N2 cosθ)R2 . Assume N1 users are having handoff in horizontal direction and N2 in vertical direction per unit length.jntuworld.

we get 2 R1 = A( N1 sinθ + N2 cosθ ). Now. and.10). N1 sinθ + N2 cosθ (3. (ii) that the number of users crossing the cell boundary is inversely proportional to the dimension of the other side of the cell..9) or (3.5: Handoff process with a rectangular cell inclined at an angle θ. 3. we have λH = 2 A(N1 N2 + (N1 + N2 )cosθsinθ) which √ means it it minimized at θ = 0o . Replacing H R1 by A R2 and equating dλH dR1 to zero. we have R1 R2 = N1 N2 .2 Handoffs In Different Generations In 1G analog cellular systems.jntuworld. we need to find λmin for a given θ.com Figure 3. The BS monitors the signal 31 www.10) 2 2 From the above equations. we get 2 R2 = A( N1 cosθ + N2 sinθ ). i.www.9) Similarly. the signal strength measurements were made by the BS and in turn supervised by the MSC. θ = 0o . The above analysis has been carried out for a simple square cell and it changes in more complicated way when we consider a hexagonal cell.com . N1 cosθ + N2 sinθ (3. Hence λmin = 2 AN1 N2 .jntuworld.5. This has two implications: (i) that handoff is minimized if rectangular cell is aligned with X-Y axis.e. for R2 . given the fixed area A = R1 R2 . Putting the value of θ H in (3. The handoffs in this generation can be termed as Network Controlled Hand-Off (NCHO).

All these types of handoffs are usually termed as hard handoff as there is a shift in the channels involved.jntuworld. In the 2G systems. In the current 3G systems.jntuworld. delay during handoff is only 100 ms and the value of ∆ is around 20 dBm. Based on the information received from the special receivers the MSC decides whether a handoff is required or not. The value of ∆ was in the order of 0-5 dB. even this amount of delay could create a communication pause. the circuit complexity was increased here whereas the delay in handoff was reduced to 1-5 s. called soft handoff. However. The special receivers located on the BS are controlled by the MSC to monitor the signal strengths of the users in the neighboring cells which appear to be in need of handoff. the MS measures the power from adjacent BS and automatically upgrades the channels to its nearer BS. The MSC evaluates the signal strengths received from different BS for a single user and then shifts the user from one BS to the other without actually changing the channel.com .com strengths of voice channels to determine the relative positions of the subscriber. 32 www. as discussed below. Hence this can be termed as Mobile Controlled Hand-Off (MCHO). In this generation.www. the mobiles share the same channels in every cell. the mobile center measures the power changes received from nearby base stations and notifies the two BS. When compared to the other generations. The Quality Of Service (QoS) has improved a lot although the complexity of the circuitry has further increased which is inevitable. As compared to 1G. which started using the digital technology. There is also another kind of handoff. The approximate time needed to make a handoff successful was about 5-10 s. Handoff in CDMA: In spread spectrum cellular systems. handoff decisions were mobile assisted and therefore it is called Mobile Assisted Hand-Off (MAHO). These types of handoffs are called as soft handoff as there is no change in the channel. Accordingly the two BS communicate and channel transfer occurs. This requires the value of ∆ to be in the order of 6dB to 12dB. In MAHO. the MSC was relieved from the entire operation.

(b) Cell dragging problem: this is another practical problem in the urban area with additional microcells.com 3.6. As illustrated in the Figure 3. microcells are introduced in the cells to increase the capacity (this will be discussed later in this chapter).www. a fraction of total available channels must be kept for handoff requests. This technique provides large area coverage to high speed users while providing small area coverage to users traveling at low speed.jntuworld.3 Handoff Priority While assigning channels using either FCA or DCA strategy. one of them being the ‘Umbrella Cell’ approach.5. 33 www. This problem can be solved by judiciously choosing the handoff threshold along with adjusting the coverage area. then the corresponding microcell handles the call so that there is good corner coverage. The users with high speed frequently crossing the micro-cells become burdened to MSC as it has to take care of handoffs. For example.4 A Few Practical Problems in Handoff Scenario (a) Different speed of mobile users: with the increase of mobile users in urban areas. 3. This approach assures that handoffs are minimized for high speed users and provides additional microcell channels for pedestrian users. A good solution to avoid such a dead-lock is to use DCA with handoff priority (demand based allocation). But this would reduce the carried traffic and only fewer channels can be assigned for the residual users of a cell.jntuworld. a guard channel concept must be followed to facilitate the handoffs. The BS can measure the speed of the user by its short term average signal strength over the RVC and decides which cell to handle that call. the signal strength received from BS1 would be greater than that received from BS2. Several schemes thus have been designed to handle the simultaneous traffic of high speed and low speed users while minimizing the handoff intervention from the MSC. consider there is a LOS path between the MS and BS1 while the user is in the cell covered by BS2. This means. Since there is a LOS with the BS1. it experiences a lot of interferences. since the user is in cell covered by BS2. it is possible to provide larger and smaller cells at a same location. umbrella cell is co-located with few other microcells. If the speed is less.com . However. handoff cannot take place and as a result. By using different antenna heights and different power levels.5.

The interference in the control channels leads to missed and error calls because of digital signaling.www. If there is an interference in the voice channels. The reasons of CCI can be because of either adverse weather conditions or poor frequency planning or overlycrowded radio spectrum. mobiles usually have roaming facility. 3. The interference can be divided into 2 parts: co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. The cells where the same set of frequencies is used are call co-channel cells.jntuworld.com (c) Inter-system handoff: if one user is leaving the coverage area of one MSC and is entering the area of another MSC. which decreases system capacity and service quality. Co-channel interference is the cross talk between two different radio transmitters using the same radio frequency as is the case with the co-channel cells.com . cross talk is heard will appear as noise between the users. If D/R ratio is increased. However.jntuworld. then the call might be lost if there is no handoff in this case too. then the effective distance between the co-channel cells will increase 34 www. 3. This interference can occur from clash with another mobile in the same cell or because of a call in the adjacent cell. increasing frequency reuse also increases interference. If the cell size and the power transmitted at the base stations are same then CCI will become independent of the transmitted power and will depend on radius of the cell (R) and the distance between the interfering co-channel cells (D). It is the limiting factor in the performance of cellular systems.6. it is necessary to reuse frequency bandwidth over relatively small geographical areas. Interference is more severe in urban areas because of the greater RF noise and greater density of mobiles and base stations.1 Co-channel interference (CCI) For the efficient use of available spectrum. Such a handoff is called inter-system handoff and in order to facilitate this.6 Interference & System Capacity Susceptibility and interference problems associated with mobile communications equipment are because of the problem of time congestion within the electromagnetic spectrum. There can be interference between the base stations operating at same frequency band or any other non-cellular system’s energy leaking inadvertently into the frequency band of the cellular system.

com and interference will decrease.14) d −n ) d0 (3. The expression for the received power Pr at a distance d can be approximately calculated as Pr = P0 ( and in the dB expression as Pr (dB) = P0 (dB) − 10n log( d ) d0 (3. For hexagonal geometry √ Q = D/R = 3N . then SIR can be approximated as S = I R−n i0 −n i=1 Di 35 (3. S is the desired signal power from the baseband station and Ii is the interference power caused by the i-th interfering co-channel base station.www. Choosing the options is very careful for the selection of ‘N’.15) www. In order to solve this equation from power calculations. The average power in the mobile radio channel decays as a power law of the distance of separation between transmitter and receiver.jntuworld.11) From the above equation. The parameter Q is called the frequency reuse ratio and is related to the cluster size. But large ‘Q’ leads to decrease in system capacity but increase in transmission quality. The Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) for a mobile receiver which monitors the forward channel can be calculated as S = I S i0 i=1 Ii (3.13) where P0 is the power received at a close-in reference point in the far field region at a small distance do from the transmitting antenna.jntuworld. (3. Let us calculate the SIR for this system. and ‘n’ is the path loss exponent. small of ‘Q’ means small value of cluster size ‘N’ and increase in cellular capacity.com . Let us take that the path loss exponent is same throughout the coverage area and the transmitted power be same. the received power at a given mobile due to i-th interfering cell is proportional to (Di )−n (the value of ’n’ varies between 2 and 4 in urban cellular systems). If Di is the distance of the i-th interferer from the mobile. we need to look into the signal power characteristics.12) where i0 is the number of co-channel interfering cells. the proof of which is given in the first section.

We can go for a more approximate calculation for co-channel SIR. 36 www.6).3 dB).www. If we take n=4 . the above expression yields that worst case SIR is 53.18) (3. The worst case is when the mobile is at the corner of the cell i. SIR can be approximately calculated as S R−4 = I 2(D − R)−4 + (D + R)−4 + (D)−4 + (D + R/2)−4 + (D − R/2)−4 which can be rewritten in terms frequency reuse ratio Q as S 1 = .49. The mobile is at a distance of D-R from 2 closest interfering cells and approximately D+R/2. But this reduces the capacity by 7/12 times. I 2(Q − 1)−4 + (Q + 1)−4 + (Q)−4 + (Q + 1/2)−4 + (Q − 1/2)−4 (3.e. co-channel interference controls link performance. Therefore. The above equations are based on hexagonal geometry and the distances from the closest interfering cells can vary if different frequency reuse plans are used. The effect of co-channel interference can be minimized by optimizing the frequency assignments of the base stations and their transmit powers. which in a way controls frequency reuse plan and the overall capacity of the cellular system.16) = I i0 i0 which is an approximate measure of the SIR. Taking n = 4 in the above equation. the value of ’N’ can be calculated as 6. If we consider only the first layer of interfering cells and we assume that the interfering base stations are equidistant from the reference base station and the distance between the cell centers is ’D’ then the above equation can be converted as √ S ( 3N )n (D/R)n = (3. This is the example of a 7 cell reuse case.6.70 (17. Tilting the base-station antenna to limit the spread of the signals in the system can also be done. This shows that for a 7 cell reuse case the worst case SIR is slightly less than 18 dB.jntuworld. Therefore N = 12 cluster size should be used.17) Using the value of N equal to 7 (this means Q = 4.. D. D-R/2 and D+R distance from other interfering cells in the first tier.com . Therefore minimum N is 7. on a vertex as shown in the Figure 3.com where the mobile is assumed to be located at R distance from the cell center.jntuworld. Subjective tests performed on AMPS cellular system which uses FM and 30 kHz channels show that sufficient voice quality can be obtained by SIR being greater than or equal to 18 dB.

jntuworld.jntuworld. Adjacent channel interference occurs more frequently in small cell clusters and heavily used cells. provided that the performance degradation can be tolerated in the system link budget. It is the signal impairment which occurs to one frequency due to presence of another signal on a nearby frequency.e.2 Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) This is a different type of interference which is caused by adjacent channels i. This problem might occur if the base station has problem in discriminating the mobile user from the ”bleed over” caused by the close adjacent channel mobile.6: First tier of co-channel interfering cells 3. This problem is enhanced if the adjacent channel user is transmitting in a close range compared to the subscriber’s receiver while the receiver attempts to receive a base station on the channel. This occurs when imperfect receiver filters allow nearby frequencies to leak into the passband.com . channels in adjacent cells. The more adjacent channels are packed into the channel block. This effect can also occur if a mobile close to a base station transmits on a channel close to one being used by a weak mobile.6.www. This is called near-far effect. the higher the spectral efficiency.com Figure 3. If the frequency separation between the channels is kept large this interference can be reduced to some extent. Thus assignment of channels is given 37 www.

Power control is also very much important for the prolonging of the battery life for the subscriber unit but also reduces reverse channel SIR in the system. This is because.com . Perfect base station filters are needed when close-in and distant users share the same cell. If n = 4. given the subscriber density.jntuworld. The cell radius governs both the geographical area covered by a cell and also the number of subscribers who can be serviced. and radio transmission equipment and so a large cell size minimizes the cost per subscriber. a brief description of the design trade-off is given.jntuworld. In designing a cellular layout. 38 www. land on which the tower is placed. Power control is done such that each mobile transmits the lowest power required to maintain a good quality link on the reverse channel.19) which can be easily found from the earlier SIR expressions.com such that they do not form a contiguous band of frequencies within a particular cell and frequency separation is maximized. Efficient assignment strategies are very much important in making the interference as less as possible. If a mobile is 10 times close to the base station than other mobile and has energy spill out of its passband. every cell requires an investment in a tower.7. in which the above two parameters play a crucial role. It is easy to see that the cell radius must be as large as possible.1 Enhancing Capacity And Cell Coverage The Key Trade-off Previously. the two parameters which are of great significance are the cell radius R and the cluster size √ N. In the following. If the frequency factor is small then distance between the adjacent channels cannot put the interference level within tolerance limits. Practically.7 3. 3.www. each base station receiver is preceded by a high Q cavity filter in order to remove adjacent channel interference. then SIR is −52 dB. then SIR for weak mobile is approximately S = 10−n I (3. and we have also seen that co-channel cell distance D = 3N R. we have seen that the frequency reuse technique in cellular systems allows for almost boundless expansion of geographical area and the number of mobile system users who could be accommodated.

another trade-off is encountered in that N must be small to accommodate large number of subscribers. transmitter power.20) If the total serviced area is Atotal . receiver noise figure etc. the geographic area covered by a cluster is √ Acluster = N Acell = N 3 3R2 /2. but R should be as small as possible to maximize the number of customers that the system can accommodate.21) Note that all of the available channels N. (3. are reused in every cluster. shows that the cell radius should be small. which.jntuworld. microcell zone concept can treated as enhancing the QoS in a cellular system. the number of clusters M should be large.com Eventually. However. The other method. 39 www. We discuss here two methods for dealing with an increasing subscriber density: Cell Splitting and Sectoring. if the cell radius R is fixed. Given a cell radius R and a cluster size N . then the number of clusters M that could be accommodated is given by √ M = Atotal /Acluster = Atotal /(N 3 3R2 /2). (3. Now. but should be sufficiently large so as to minimize the interference effects. The SNR is determined by several factors such as the antenna height. This is because it is not always possible to counter the increasing demand for cellular systems just by increasing the geographical coverage area due to the limitations in obtaining new land with suitable requirements. Hence. The history of cellular phones has been characterized by a rapid growth and expansion in cell subscribers. Hence.com . we focus on the issues regarding system expansion. Though a cellular system can be expanded by simply adding cells to the geographical area.www. Now. the cell radius is determined by the requirement that adequate signal to noise ratio be maintained over the coverage area.21).jntuworld. the way in which user density can be increased is also important to look at. We have seen earlier that the size of a cluster depends on the frequency reuse ratio Q. in determining the value of N . cell radius is determined by a trade-off: R should be as large as possible to minimize the cost of the installation per subscriber. by Equation (3. then the number of clusters could be maximized by minimizing the size of a cluster N . to make the maximum number of channels available to subscribers.

Clearly. For instance. as new users subscribe to the cellular service.jntuworld. Cell-splitting is a technique which has the capability to add new smaller cells in specific areas of the system. the channel density per square kilometer) could be increased by decreasing the cluster size.com The basic idea of adopting the cellular approach is to allow space for the growth of mobile users. the demand for channels may begin to exceed the capacity of some base stations.7. because the user density decreases on moving towards sub-urban areas. the demand for it is fairly low and users are assumed to be uniformly distributed over the service area. once a system has been initially deployed. When a new system is deployed. there would have to be more of them and so additional base stations will be needed in the system.the number of channels available to customers (equivalently. However. As discussed previously. The key factor is to add as minimum number of smaller cells as possible 40 www.2 Cell-Splitting Cell Splitting is based on the cell radius reduction and minimizes the need to modify the existing cell parameters. It might be that an increase in channel density is required only in specific parts of the system to support an increased demand in those areas. between the already existing cells results in an increase of capacity due to the additional number of channels per unit area. if cells are small. The radius of cells will generally increase as we move from urban to sub urban areas. a system-wide reduction in cluster size may not be necessary since user density does not grow uniformly in all parts of the geographical area. The challenge in this case is to introduce the new base stations without the need to move the already existing base station towers. a city may have highly populated areas and so the demand must be supported by cells with the smallest radius. However. This increases the capacity of a cellular system since it increases the number of times that channels are reused.jntuworld. 3. There are few challenges in increasing the capacity by reducing the cell radius.www. inserting these smaller cells.com . The other challenge is to meet the generally increasing demand that may vary quite rapidly between geographical areas of the system. each with its own base station and a corresponding reduction in antenna size and transmitting power. Cell splitting involves the process of sub-dividing a congested cell into smaller cells. known as microcells. Since the new cells have smaller radii than the existing cells.

the signal-to-interference ratio will be the same after cell splitting as it was before. so that the cluster size can be the same in the small-cell layout as it was in the large-cell layout. Figure 3. If the entire system is 41 www. the cellular system operates with cells of more than one size. wherever an increase in demand occurs.7 shows a cellular layout with seven-cell clusters. this allows the original base stations to be maintained even in the new system layout.jntuworld. The new smaller cells have half the cell radius of the original cells. Notice that one of the new smaller cells lies in the center of each of the larger cells. However. and cell A in the center has reached its maximum capacity. Consequently. Also the signal-to-interference ratio is determined by cluster size and not by cell radius. the new cells will have one-fourth of the area and will consequently need to support one-fourth the number of subscribers. The gradual addition of the smaller cells implies that. If we assume that base stations are located in the cell centers.jntuworld.com . At half the radius.7: Splitting of congested seven-cell clusters. Consider that the cells in the center of the diagram are becoming congested. if the cluster size is maintained. new base stations will have to be added for new cells that do not lie in the center of the larger cells. at least for a time. Figure also shows how the smaller cells are being superimposed on the original layout.com Figure 3. The organization of cells into clusters is independent of the cell radius.www.

The transmit power of the new cells with radius half that of the old cells can be found by examining the received power PR at the new and old cell boundaries and setting them equal. provided the cluster size does not change. Assume that PT1 and PT2 are the transmit powers of the larger and smaller base stations respectively. to avoid co-channel interference when both large and small cell radii coexist. assuming a path loss index n=4.jntuworld. one that corresponds to larger cell reuse requirements and the other which corresponds to the smaller cell reuse requirements. channels in the old cell must be broken down into two groups. At the beginning of this channel splitting process. at which point splitting is complete within the region and the entire system is rescaled to have a smaller radius per cell. Then. the transmit power must be reduced by 12 dB in order to maintain the same S/I with the new system lay-out. there would be fewer channels in the smaller power groups. This is necessary to maintain the same frequency re-use plan in the new cell layout as well. In other words. more and more channels need to be accommodated and hence the splitting process continues until all the larger cells have been replaced by the smaller cells. we have power received at old cell boundary = PT 1 /R4 and the power received at new cell boundary = PT 2 /(R/2)4 .jntuworld. Consequently cells were configured with an eight-mile radius. we get PT 2 = PT 1 / 16. Ex. and the number of subscribers per cell will have been reduced. the number of channels per cell will be exactly as it was before. The larger cell is usually dedicated to high speed users as in the umbrella cell approach so as to minimize the number of hand-offs. however. the aim of the system designers was to guarantee coverage. As the demand increases. If a cellular layout is replaced entirety by a new layout with a smaller cell radius.www. Some special care must be taken. the signal-to-interference ratio will not change. and a 12-cell cluster size was chosen. 4: When the AMPS cellular system was first deployed. So. it is also desirable to reduce the transmitted power. when two sizes of cells co-exist in a system.com .com replaced with new half-radius cells. The cell radius was chosen to guarantee a 17 dB 42 www. and the cluster size is maintained. On equating the two received powers. It turns out that the only way to avoid interference between the large-cell and small-cell systems is to assign entirely different sets of channels to the two systems. Initially the number of users was not significant. When the cell radius is reduced by a factor.

However it has been found that the co-channel interference in a cellular system may be decreased by replacing a single omni-directional antenna at the base station by several directional antennas. it did not provide adequate frequency reuse to service an explosively growing customer base. The margin. each of which radiates into one of the three sectors. The base station feeds three 120o directional antennas. This technique for reducing co-channel interference wherein by using suit- 43 www. 3. Although a 12-cell cluster size provided more than adequate co-channel separation to meet a requirement for a 17 dB signal-to-interference ratio in an interference-limited environment.7 dB signal-to-interference ratio. however.www.com . signal-to-noise ratio over 90% of the coverage area. In the Figure 3.8. a cell is shown which has been split into three 120o sectors. Till now. is slim.jntuworld. each radiating within a specified sector. so that each sector is assigned one-third of the available number cell of channels.com Figure 3. The channel set serving this cell has also been divided. It was estimated that a 7-cell cluster size should provide an adequate 18.8: A cell divided into three 120o sectors.3 Sectoring Sectoring is basically a technique which can increase the SIR without necessitating an increase in the cluster size.7. and the 17 dB signal-to-interference ratio requirement could not be met over 90 % of the coverage area. it has been assumed that the base station is located in the center of a cell and radiates uniformly in all the directions behaving as an omni-directional antenna.jntuworld. The system planners reasoned that a subsequent shift to a 7-cell cluster size would provide an adequate number of channels.

Now. n=4). 44 www. Some cellular systems divide the cells into 60o sectors. Similar analysis can be performed on them as well. In a seven-cell-cluster layout with 120o sectored cells. able directional antennas. Likewise. 5: A cellular system having a seven-cell cluster layout with omni-directional antennas has been performing satisfactorily for a required signal to interference ratio of 15 dB.www.22) where the denominator has been reduced from 6 to 2 to account for the reduced number of interfering sources.com . Hence the signal to interference ratio is now modified to √ S ( 3N )n = I 2 (3.24) to be 23. the base station in the center cell will receive co-channel interference from mobile units in only two of the co-channel cells. a given cell would receive interference and transmit with a fraction of available co-channel cells is called ’sectoring’. a 60o sectoring of the cells has been introduced.4 dB which is a significant improvement over the Omni-directional case where the worst-case S/I is found to be 17 dB (assuming a path-loss exponent.jntuworld. However due to the need for increasing the number of available channels.9: A seven-cell cluster with 60o sectors. the signal to interference ratio for a seven-cell cluster layout using 120o sectored antennas can be found from equation (3. it can be easily understood that the mobile units in a particular sector of the center cell will receive co-channel interference from only two of the first-tier co-channel base stations. Ex. rather than from all six. By what percentage can the number of channels Ntotal be increased assuming a path-loss component n=4? Solution: The seven-cell cluster layout with 60o sectoring is shown in the Figure 3.jntuworld.9.com Figure 3.

a 3-cluster cell layout could be used for meeting the growth requirements. So. the total number of channels increased by a factor of 7/3.23) Since the SIR exceeds 15 dB. the SIR for this reduced cluster size layout can be found to be √ S ( 3N )n ( (3)(4))4 = = = 21. This increases the complexity of the system and also the load on the mobile switching center/base station.jntuworld. The calculations in the above example are actually an idealization for several reasons.24) The S/I ratio is still above the requirement and so a further reduction in the cell cluster size is possible.www. Now. one can try reducing the cluster size from seven to four. I 1 2 (3.25) This is just above the adequate S/I ratio and further reduction in cluster size is not possible. practical antennas have side lobes and cannot be used to focus a transmitted beam into a perfect 120o sector or 60o sector.com It is easy to see that the shaded region in the center receives interference from just one first-tier cell and hence the signal to interference ratio can be obtained suitably as √ S ( 3N )n ( (3)(7))4 = = = 26. Firstly. it is also a cause of concern that a given number of channels are not able to support as many subscribers when the pool of channels is divided into small groups. Due to this. a term which will be explained later on.com . there are two interfering sources and hence the S/I ratio is found to be √ √ S ( 3N )n ( 33)4 = = = 16.4dB. 45 www. Moreover.jntuworld. additional interference will be introduced. I 1 1 (3. Thus. assigned a new channel) when a mobile unit travels into a new sector. I 1 1 (3. dividing a cell into sectors requires that a call in progress will have to be handed off (that is. Next. Because sectoring involves using more than one antenna per base station. For a 3-cell cluster layout. This is due to a reduction in Trunking Efficiency. This breaks the available set of channels into smaller sets. the available channels in the cell are divided and dedicated to a specific antenna.07dB. thus reducing the trunking efficiency.6dB. when the cluster size is reduced from 7 to 3.

7. Benefits of the micro-cell zone concept: 1) Interference is reduced in this case as compared to the scheme in which the cell size is reduced.jntuworld.10. 3) Size of the zone apparatus is small.jntuworld.com 3. use the same frequency used by that cell. within a cell. To overcome this problem. As shown in Figure 3. this scheme has a cell divided into three microcell zones. The zone site receives the cellular signal from the base station and transmits that signal to the mobile phone after amplification. Since 46 www. The zone site equipment being small can be mounted on the side of a building or on poles.www. no handover occurs when the mobile unit moves between the microcells. a new microcell zone concept has been proposed. By confining the power transmitted to the mobile phone. the system already knows the cell location of that phone. the cellular phone is located. The base station of that cell knows in which zone. It is necessary to note that all the microcell zones.4 Microcell Zone Concept The increased number of handoffs required when sectoring is employed results in an increased load on the switching and control link elements of the mobile system. The new microcell knows where to locate the mobile unit in a particular zone of the cell and deliver the power to that zone. that is no handovers occur between microcells. the base station transmits it to the suitable zone site. Locating the mobile unit within the cell: An active mobile unit sends a signal to all zone sites. A zone selector at the BS uses that signal to select a suitable zone to serve the mobile unit . within that cell. Base Station Signals: When a call is made to a cellular phone. Therefore when it receives the signal. which in turn send a signal to the BS. 4) System capacity is increased. the BS simply switches the channel to a different zone site and no physical re-allotment of channel takes place.choosing the zone with the strongest signal.com . with each of the three zone sites connected to the base station and sharing the same radio equipment. co-channel interference is reduced between the zones and the capacity of system is increased. Thus when a mobile user moves between two microcell zones of the cell. 2) Handoffs are reduced (also compared to decreasing the cell size) since the microcells within the cell operate at the same frequency.

www.jntuworld.com

Figure 3.10: The micro-cell zone concept. the signal power is reduced, the microcells can be closer and result in an increased system capacity. However, in a microcellular system, the transmitted power to a mobile phone within a microcell has to be precise; too much power results in interference between microcells, while with too little power the signal might not reach the mobile phone.This is a drawback of microcellular systems, since a change in the surrounding (a new building, say, within a microcell) will require a change of the transmission power.

3.8

Trunked Radio System

In the previous sections, we have discussed the frequency reuse plan, the design trade-offs and also explored certain capacity expansion techniques like cell-splitting and sectoring. Now, we look at the relation between the number of radio channels a cell contains and the number of users a cell can support. Cellular systems use the concept of trunking to accommodate a large number of users in a limited radio spectrum. It was found that a central office associated with say, 10,000 telephones

47

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

requires about 50 million connections to connect every possible pair of users. However, a worst case maximum of 5000 connections need to be made among these telephones at any given instant of time, as against the possible 50 million connections. In fact, only a few hundreds of lines are needed owing to the relatively short duration of a call. This indicates that the resources are shared so that the number of lines is much smaller than the number of possible connections. A line that connects switching offices and that is shared among users on an as-needed basis is called a trunk. The fact that the number of trunks needed to make connections between offices is much smaller than the maximum number that could be used suggests that at times there might not be sufficient facilities to allow a call to be completed. A call that cannot be completed owing to a lack of resources is said to be blocked. So one important to be answered in mobile cellular systems is: How many channels per cell are needed in a cellular telephone system to ensure a reasonably low probability that a call will be blocked? In a trunked radio system, a channel is allotted on per call basis. The performance of a radio system can be estimated in a way by looking at how efficiently the calls are getting connected and also how they are being maintained at handoffs. Some of the important factors to take into consideration are (i) Arrival statistics, (ii)Service statistics, (iii)Number of servers/channels. Let us now consider the following assumptions for a bufferless system handling ’L’ users as shown in Figure 3.11: (i) The number of users L is large when compared to 1. (ii) Arrival statistics is Poisson distributed with a mean parameter λ. (iii) Duration of a call is exponentially distributed with a mean rate µ1 . (iv) Residence time of each user is exponentially distributed with a rate parameter µ2 . (v) The channel holding rate therefore is exponentially distributed with a parameter µ = µ1 + µ2 . (vi) There is a total of ’J’ number of channels (J ≤ L). To analyze such a system, let us recapitulate a queuing system in brief. Consider an M/M/m/m system which is an m-server loss system. The name M/M/m/m reflects

48

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

Figure 3.11: The bufferless J-channel trunked radio system.

Figure 3.12: Discrete-time Markov chain for the M/M/J/J trunked radio system.

49

www.jntuworld.com

The parameter λuser is also called the average arrival rate. referring to the rate at which calls from a single user arrive. is not available. the call gets rejected and in some systems.g M stands for exponential distribution). Typically. (iv) the last letter indicates that if an arrival finds all ’m’ users to be busy. Trunking mainly exploits the statistical behavior of users so that a fixed number of channels can be used to accommodate a large. random user community. then it will not enter the system and is lost. such as a trunk or a cellular channel. (ii) the second letter indicates the nature of probability distribution of service times. (iii) the third letter indicates the number of servers. In all cases. The average holding time is the average duration of a call. One would expect far more call attempts during business hours than during the middle of the night.g. it becomes more likely that all channels are busy for a particular user. The 50 www. User calling can be modeled statistically by two parameters: the average number of call requests per unit time λuser and the average holding time H. As the number of telephone lines decrease.com standard queuing theory nomenclature whereby: (i) the first letter indicates the nature of arrival process(e. As a result. In practice the blocking frequency varies with time.11 can be modeled as M/M/J/J system and the discrete-time Markov chain of this system is shown in Figure 3.www. telephone systems are engineered to provide a specified grade of service during a specified busy hour. In the telephone system context the term Grade of Service (GoS) is used to mean the probability that a user’s request for service will be blocked because a required facility.12. the hour of the day during which there is the greatest demand for service. a queue may be used to hold the caller’s request until a channel becomes available. Telephone operating companies maintain usage records and can identify a ”busy hour”. that is. a GoS of 2 % implies that on the average a user might not be successful in placing a call on 2 out of every 100 attempts. In view of the above. the bufferless system as shown in Figure 3.successive inter arrival times and service times are assumed to be statistically independent of each other.jntuworld.com .jntuworld. For example. M stands for memoryless which here means a Poisson process).(e.

then the traffic intensity offered by N users is A = NAuser . and number of channels K.jntuworld. Two models are widely used in traffic engineering to represent what happens when a call is blocked. the call is cleared from the system.com product: Auser = λuser H (3.com . In this model a call that cannot be serviced is placed on a queue and will be serviced when a channel or trunk becomes available.27) When the blocked-calls-delayed model is used. The purpose of the statistical model is to relate the offered traffic intensity A.jntuworld. and the number of channels or trunks C needed to maintain the desired grade of service. The Erlang B formula is: Pb = AK /K! K n n=0 A /n! (3. The blocked calls cleared model assumes that when a channel or trunk is not available to service an arriving call. It is based on the assumption that there is a large pool of users who do not cooperate in deciding when to place calls.28) www. grade of service Pb . The second model is known as blocked calls delayed. a channel that is occupied for thirty minutes during an hour carries 0. If the traffic intensity offered by a single user is Auser . This implies that calls of long duration are much less frequent than short calls. Use of the blocked-calls-cleared statistical model leads to the Erlang B formula that relates offered traffic intensity A. P [delay] = AK /[(K − A)(K − 1)]! . Offered traffic intensity is a quantity that is traditionally measured in Erlangs. Holding times are very well predicted using an exponential probability distribution. This quantity represents the average traffic that a user provides to the system. For example. the grade of service Pb . the ”grade of service” refers to the probability that a call will be delayed.www. the product of the average arrival rate and the average holding time–is called the offered traffic intensity or offered load. Call arrivals or requests for service are modeled as a Poisson random process. One Erlang represents the amount of traffic intensity carried by a channel that is completely occupied.5 Erlang of traffic.26) that is. AK /[(K − A)(K − 1)]! + K An /n! n=0 51 (3. In this case the statistical model leads to the Erlang C formula.

31) (3. the total offered load A=87.972/0. If the blocked calls are cleared.255Erlangs Thus the maximum number of users per group is Ngroup = A/Auser ≈ 403.29) Ex. The above example indicates that the number of subscribers that can be supported by a given number of channels decreases as the pool of channels is sub-divided. the total offered load per group is A = 40. 4: In the previous example.jntuworld. how many subscribers can be serviced by each cell at 2 % GoS? Solution: Using Erlang B table.1 ≈ 880. We can express this in terms of the trunking efficiency. that is. (3.32) This explains why the sectoring of a cell into either 120o or 60o sectors reduces the trunking efficiency of the system. an average subscriber places two calls per hour during a busy hour and the average holding time is 3 min.com Ex. 6: In a certain cellular system.1 Erlang. defined as the carrier load per channel.972 Erlangs. 52 www. Each subscriber is assigned to a group and can be served only by that group. the maximum number of subscribers served is N = A/Auser = 87.www. Since an individual subscriber offers a load of Auser = (2 calls / 60 min)3 min = 0. (3. Each cell has 100 channels. maximum number of users in the two group cell is 806. it can be seen that for C = 100 and GoS = Pb = 2%. Thus the system growth due to sectoring is impacted by trunking efficiency considerations. ξ = (1 − Pb )A/C. counting both the groups.jntuworld. suppose that the channels have been divided into two groups of 50 channels each.com . How many subscribers can be served by the two group cell? Solution: Using the Erlang B table with C = 50 and GOS = Pb = 2%. (3.30) Thus.

. Inc. Upper Saddle River. 2002. Inc. Feher. W.jntuworld.com .www.com 3. Wireless Communications and Networking. 2. Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice. Zhuang. J. 2005. NJ: Prentice Hall.jntuworld. Singapore: Pearson Education.. S. 53 www. S. 4. Rappaport. 2nd ed. 3. Mark and W. 1995. Haykin and M. Moher. Modern Wireless Communications. K. New Delhi: PHI. Singapore: Pearson Education.9 References 1. 2002. Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum Applications. T.

1 Introduction There are two basic ways of transmitting an electro-magnetic (EM) signal. mountains and other such obstructions. through a guided medium or through an unguided medium.jntuworld. are far less hostile toward the information carrying EM signal than the wireless or the unguided medium. Scattering occurs when the medium through the wave is traveling contains objects which are much smaller than the wavelength of the EM wave. Reflection occurs when the EM waves impinge on objects which are much greater than the wavelength of the traveling wave. Models which predict the mean signal strength for arbitrary transmitter receiver distances are termed as large scale propagation models. These are termed so because they predict the average signal strength for large Tx-Rx separations. It presents challenges and conditions which are unique for this kind of transmissions. undergoes many kinds of propagation effects such as reflection.com . Diffraction is a phenomena occurring when the wave interacts with a surface having sharp irregularities. diffraction and scattering. typically for hundreds of kilometers.jntuworld.com Chapter 4 Free Space Radio Wave Propagation 4. Due to the inherent randomness associated with such channels they are best described with the help of statistical models. 54 www. These varied phenomena’s lead to large scale and small scale propagation losses. Guided mediums such as coaxial cables and fiber optic cables. as it travels through the wireless channel.www. due to the presence of buildings. A signal.

3) 55 www. Gr is the receiver antenna gain.www.com Figure 4. d is the Tx-Rx separation and L is the system loss factor depended upon line attenuation. but in some cases the transmission is with a direct line of sight such as in satellite communication. filter losses and antenna losses and not related to propagation. Gt is the transmitter antenna gain.1: Free space propagation model.2) The path loss.2 Free Space Propagation Model Although EM signals when traveling through wireless channels experience fading effects due to various effects. (4. (4. Pr (d) is the received power. Friis free space equation is given by Pr (d) = P t Gt Gr λ 2 (4π)2 d2 L (4. representing the attenuation suffered by the signal as it travels through the wireless channel is given by the difference of the transmitted and received power in dB and is expressed as: P L(dB) = 10 log Pt /Pr . The gain of the antenna is related to the effective aperture of the antenna which in turn is dependent upon the physical size of the antenna as given below G = 4πAe /λ2 . Free space model predicts that the received power decays as negative square root of the distance.jntuworld.com .1) where Pt is the transmitted power. showing the near and far fields. 4.jntuworld.

1: Find the far field distance for a circular antenna with maximum dimension of 1 m and operating frequency of 900 MHz. Thus. (4. For this reason. Find (i) the transmit power in dBm and dB.com The fields of an antenna can broadly be classified in two regions. Ex. with the largest dimension of the antenna.com . Hence. as a reference point. The far field region is also termed as Fraunhofer region and the Friis equation holds in this region. Solution: (i) Tx power = 10log(50) = 17 dB = (17+30) dBm = 47 dBm (ii) df = 2×D2 λ 2D2 2(1)2 = = 6m λ 0.4) Also we can see that the Friis equation is not defined for d=0. which is dependent upon the largest dimension of the antenna as df = 2D2 /λ. (4.jntuworld. Solution: Since the operating frequency f = 900 Mhz. we use a close in distance. It is in the far field that the propagating waves act as plane waves and the power decays inversely with distance. At 100 m . The power received. Pr (d). do . D=1m. df . the Friis equation is used only beyond the far field distance. (ii) the received power at a free space distance of 5 m and 100 m.5) Ex.jntuworld. PT GT GR λ2 4πd2 50 × 1 × (1/3)2 = 4π1002 PR = 56 www.33 = 2×12 1/3 = 6m Thus the received power at 5 m can not be calculated using free space distance formula. the far field distance is df = . is then given by: Pr (d) = Pr (do )(do /d)2 . 2: A unit gain antenna with a maximum dimension of 1 m produces 50 W power at 900 MHz.www. the wavelength λ= 3 × 108 m/s m 900 × 106 Hz . the far field and the near field.

5dBm 4.3. Hence all energy is reflected back.1 Reflection Reflection occurs when an electromagnetic wave falls on an object. a part of it is transmitted into it. 4. predicted by propagation models based on above three phenomena.7) www. (4. some energy is reflected back and some energy is transmitted. which has very large dimensions as compared to the wavelength of the propagating wave. while some energy is reflected back. it is found to be sin(θB ) = 1 1+ 2 . When a radio wave falls on another medium having different electrical properties. when no reflection occurs in the medium of origin. If the medium on which the e.5 × 10−3 mW PR (dBm) = 10logPr (mW ) = −24. when the incident angle would be such that the reflection coefficient is equal to zero. such objects can be the earth.jntuworld. is the received power. The following subsections give an outline of these phenomena.com = 3.com .8) (4. The physics of the above phenomena may also be used to describe small scale fading and multipath propagation. the electric field inside the conductor is always zero. considering perfect conductors. If the medium is a perfect conductor. apart from LoS communication. wave is incident is a dielectric. wave.3 Basic Methods of Propagation Reflection.www.6) Further. Let us see some special cases. all energy is reflected back to the first medium. buildings and walls. The most important parameter. By applying laws of electro-magnetics. The amount of energy that is reflected back depends on the polarization of the e.m.jntuworld.m. This angle is the Brewster’s angle. For example. diffraction and scattering are the three fundamental phenomena that cause signal propagation in a mobile communication system. Boundary conditions require that θi = θr and Ei = Er 57 (4. This would occur. Another particular case of interest arises in parallel polarization.

The following result is a better approximation to the observed value ρS = exp(−8( πσh sinθi 2 πσh sinθi 2 ) )I0 [−8( ) ] λ λ 58 (4. 4. and they combine to produce a new wavefront in the direction of propagation.10) A surface is smooth if its minimum to maximum protuberance h is less than hc .12) www.jntuworld. The propagation of secondary wavelets in the shadowed region results in diffraction. every point on a wavefront acts as point sources for the production of secondary wavelets.com for vertical polarization. The cause is that the trees.3. and Ei = −Er for horizontal polarization. hc = λ .jntuworld. This provides extra energy at the receiver. given by ρS = exp(−8( πσh sinθi 2 ) ) λ (4. Roughness is tested by a Rayleigh criterion. which defines a critical height hc of surface protuberances for a given angle of incidence θi . given by. according to which. The field in the shadowed region is the vector sum of the electric field components of all the secondary wavelets that are received by the receiver. But the diffraction field still exists an it has enough strength to yield a good signal. buildings and lampposts scatter energy in all directions.11) where σh is the standard deviation of the Gaussian random variable h. the received field strength decreases. around the curved earth’s surface and obstructions like tall buildings.com . In case of rough surfaces.2 Diffraction Diffraction is the phenomenon due to which an EM wave can propagate beyond the horizon. This phenomenon can be explained by the Huygen’s principle. As the user moves deeper into the shadowed region.9) 4. the surface reflection coefficient needs to be multiplied by a scattering loss factor ρS . 8sinθi (4. (4. and rough if protuberance is greater than hc .3 Scattering The actual received power at the receiver is somewhat stronger than claimed by the models of reflection and diffraction.3.www.

all the energy is reflected back with angle of incidence equal to the angle of reflection and reflection coefficient Γ = −1. which depends upon the wave polarization. Γrough = ρS Γ.com Figure 4. The equivalent reflection coefficient is given by. Γ is given by: Γ|| = Er /Ei = η2 sin θt − η1 sin θi /η2 sin θt + η1 sin θi (4. as the EM waves can not pass through conductors.com . angle of incidence and frequency of the wave. (4. for parallel and perpendicular polarizations. In general. For example.13) 4. The amount of energy reflected to the amount of energy incidented is represented by Fresnel reflection coefficient Γ.www.jntuworld. which agrees very well for large walls made of limestone.jntuworld.4 Two Ray Reflection Model Interaction of EM waves with materials having different electrical properties than the material through which the wave is traveling leads to transmitting of energy through the medium and reflection of energy back in the medium of propagation.14) 59 www.2: Two-ray reflection model.

23) d c (4. Two propagating waves arrive at the receiver.21) www. one LOS wave which travels a distance of d and another ground reflected wave. t)| = E0 d0 .2.com Γ⊥ = Er /Ei = η2 sin θi − η1 sin θt /η2 sin θi + η1 sin θt . A simple addition of a single reflected wave shows that power varies inversely with the forth power of the distance between the Tx and the Rx.24) E0 d0 cos(ωc t − φ ) d (4.20) This means the envelop is constant with respect to time. one direct path and one reflected wave from the ground gives a more accurate description as shown in Figure 4.jntuworld. t) = where φ = ωc d c (4. that travels d . t) = where φ = ωc and E(d . T ER OT = Eg + ELOS .www.jntuworld.2. t) = where φ = ωc 60 d . Mathematically.16) (4. Then E(d.22) E0 d0 cos(ωc t − φ ) d (4. The envelop of the electric field at d meters from the transmitter at any time t is therefore |E(d. (4.19) E0 d0 cos(ωc t − φ) d (4. A two-ray model.15) Seldom in communication systems we encounter channels with only LOS paths and hence the Friis formula is not a very accurate description of the communication link. the total transmitted and received electric fields are T ET OT = Ei + ELOS . This is deduced via the following treatment.com . d (4. From Figure 4. it can be expressed as: E(d . (4. which consists of two overlapping waves at the receiver.18) and d > d0 . c (4.17) Let E0 is the free space electric field (in V/m) at a reference distance d0 .

com Figure 4.www.jntuworld.30).4: Equivalent phasor diagram of Figure 4. θi = θ0 and Eg = ΓEi which means the total electric field.e.e.jntuworld. i.30) Ex 3: Prove the above two equations. Once the path difference is known.. Figure 4. when T-R separation distance is very large compared to (ht + hr ).28) In such cases.31) www. Assuming perfect horizontal electric field polarization. (4.com .29) However.29) and (4. According to the law of reflection in a dielectric. T ER OT = |ELOS + Eg |.3. t) = E0 d0 E0 d0 cos(ωc t − φ ) + (−1) cos(ωc t − φ ) d d (4. equation (4. (4.. Γ⊥ = −1 =⇒ Et = (1 − 1)Ei = 0. the path difference is ∆=d −d = (ht + hr )2 + d2 − (ht − hr )2 + d2 . i. the phase difference is θ∆ = 2π∆ ∆ωc = λ λ 61 (4.3: Phasor diagram of electric fields.27) It can be therefore written that T ER OT (d. This implies that. Et = Ei + Eg = Ei (1 + Γ). (4. then ∆≈ 2ht hr d (4.26) the resultant electric field is the vector sum of ELOS and Eg . (4. reflected wave is equal in magnitude and 180o out of phase with respect to incident wave.25) For small values of θi .

com and the time difference.jntuworld.5rad.39) (4. d Using phasor diagram concept for vector addition as shown in Figures 4. t = d d E0 d0 d E0 d0 d d cos(ωc − ωc ) − cos(ωc − ωc ) )= c d c c d c c = E0 d0 ∆ωc E0 d0 cos( cos(0o ) )− d c d E0 d0 E0 d0 = θ∆ − d d E0 d0 ≈ ( θ∆ − 1). |≈| d d d d c (4. = c 2πfc (4.3 and 4.42) This raises the wonderful concept of ‘cross-over distance’ dc .31) and further equation (4.36) (4. 2 λ λd (4..38) (4.e.41) = E0 d0 d For θ∆ 2 ∆ < 0. d λd d (4. (4.5rad. then ∆ becomes very small and therefore ELOS and Eg are virtually identical with only phase difference.43) The corresponding approximate received electric field is T ER OT (d) ≈ 2 E0 d0 2πht hr ht hr =k 2 .jntuworld.30).33) . we can then approximate that sin( θ∆ π 2πht hr )≈ ∆= < 0.35) (4. τd = ∆ θ∆ . we want to evaluate the received E-field at any t = T ER OT (d.www. Using equation (4. | E0 d0 E0 d0 E0 d0 |≈| |. 5λ λ (4.4. sin( θ2 ) ≈ θ∆ 2 . Then.com .i.32) When d is very large. defined as d > dc = 4πht hr 20πht hr = . we get T |ER OT (d)| = ( E0 d0 E0 d0 E0 d0 + cos(θ∆ ))2 + ( sin(θ∆ ))2 d d d (cos(θ∆ ) − 1)2 + sin2 (θ∆ ) = E0 d0 2 − 2cosθ∆ d E0 d0 θ∆ =2 sin( ).44) 62 www.37) Say. d 2 (4.40) (4.34) (4.

The similar phenomena occurs for light also but the diffracted light intensity is not noticeable. This is because the obstacle or slit need to be of the order of the wavelength of the wave to have a significant effect.1) is sufficient to calculate the path loss since the two-ray model does not give a good result for a short distance due to the oscillation caused by the constructive and destructive combination of the two rays.jntuworld. using equation (4. we get the received power as Pr = Pt Gt Gr h2 h2 t r .jntuworld.43) in (4. Received power is also proportional to h2 and h2 .45) The cross-over distance shows an approximation of the distance after which the received power decays with its fourth order.g the sound can be heard in a room. Ld4 (4. Thus radiation from a point source radiating in all directions can be received at any 63 www. 1.1) and (4. equation (4. 2. d4 (4. the power decays as the fourth power of distance Pr (d) = with K being a constant. where the source of the sound is another room without having any line of sight. so as to propagate behind the obstacle. K . Path loss is independent of frequency (wavelength). received power increases.www.45): The important observations from this equation are: 1. In that case.45) is that when d < dc . 3. This equation gives fair results when the T-R separation distance crosses the cross-over distance.1). It is an inherent feature of a wave be it longitudinal or transverse. For e. but whenever we distance crosses the ‘cross-over distance’. Observations on Equation (4.46) 4. if height of any of the t r antennas is increased.com . under the influence of an obstacle. The basic difference between equation (4. meaning. the power falls off rapidly as well as two-ray model approximation gives better result than Friis equation.com Therefore.5 Diffraction Diffraction is the phenomena that explains the digression of a wave from a straight line path.

1 Knife-Edge Diffraction Geometry As shown in Figure 4. in absence of an obstacle.5: Huygen’s secondary wavelets.www. the receiver is able to receive the signal even when not in line of sight of the transmitter. the sum of all wave sources is zero at a point not in the direct path of the wave and thus the wave travels in the straight line. Though the intensity received gets smaller as receiver is moved into the shadowed region.5. The path difference between direct path and the diffracted path is δ= d2 + h2 + 1 d2 + h2 − (d1 + d2 ) 2 (4. point. Normally.47) 64 www.jntuworld.5. this has a great advantage since. Diffraction is explained by Huygens-Fresnel principle which states that all points on a wavefront can be considered as the point source for secondary wavelets which form the secondary wavefront in the direction of the prorogation. consider that there’s an impenetrable obstruction of hight h at a distance of d1 from the transmitter and d2 from the receiver.com Figure 4. as shown in Figure 4.jntuworld. even behind an obstacle (unless it is not completely enveloped by it). This we show in the subsection given below. 4. leading to bending of wave.com . reflection). the effect of wave source behind the obstacle cannot be felt and the sources around the obstacle contribute to the secondary wavelets in the shadowed region. But in the case of an obstacle. In mobile communication.6. by diffraction (and scattering.

jntuworld.49) (4.53) 65 www.www. expressed as v = h 2(d1 + d2 )/(λd1 d2 ) = α (2d1 d2 )/(λ(d1 + d2 )) (4.48) In order to normalize this.com Figure 4.52) (4.com . (4.jntuworld.51) (4.50) (4. Thus the phase difference equals φ = 2πδ/λ = 2πh2 (d1 + d2 )/λ2(d1 d2 ). we usually use a Fresnel-Kirchoff diffraction parameter v.6: Diffraction through a sharp edge. αtanα = tanβ + tanγ = h/d1 + h/d2 = h(d1 + d2 )/d1 d2 . With the following considerations that α=β+γ and α ≈ tanα we can write. which can be further simplified as δ = d1 (1 + h2 /2d2 ) + d2 (1 + h2 /2d2 ) − (d1 + d2 ) 1 2 = h2 /(2d1 ) + h2 /(2d2 ) = h2 (d1 + d2 )/(2d1 d2 ).

The effect of diffraction loss is explained by Fresnel zones as a function of the path difference.jntuworld.com Figure 4.com . (4.2 Fresnel Zones: the Concept of Diffraction Loss As mentioned before.www.7: Fresnel zones.7. we can observe that: (i) phase difference is a function of the height of the obstruction. 4. as shown in Figure 4. the more is the object in the shadowed region greater is the diffraction loss of the signal. (ii) phase difference is a function of the position of the obstruction from transmitter and receiver. and therefore the phase difference becomes φ = πv 2 /2.jntuworld.54) From this. and also.5. The successive Fresnel zones are limited by the circular periphery through which the path difference of the secondary waves is nλ/2 greater than total length of the LOS path. Thus successive Fresnel zones have phase difference of π which means they alternatively 66 www.

diffraction effects are negligible beyond 55% of 1st Fresnel zone. d1 = d2 = 1 km. depending on its geometry. obstacle should be within the 60% of the first fresnel zone. It is seen that the loci of a Fresnel zone varied over d1 and d2 forms an ellipsoid with the transmitter and receiver at its focii.com .www. Now. The radius of the each Fresnel zone is maximum at middle of transmitter and receiver (i. Also find out in which Fresnel zone the tip of the obstruction lies. But if an obstruction is present. To have good power strength. please note that height of the obstruction can be positive zero and negative also. As a rule of thumb.jntuworld.e. if there’s no obstruction. The diffraction losses are minimum as long as obstruction doesn’t block volume of the 1st Fresnel zone. Solution: λ= H= H1 = λ(d1 +d2 ) d1 +d2 3 250×250 8 c 3 × 108 3 = = m 2 × 106 f 8 × 10 8 500 = 6.89 = 16. Ex 4: Calculate the first Fresnel zone obstruction height maximum for f = 800 MHz. Compute the diffraction loss. when d1 = d2 ) and decreases as moved to either side.3) = 5. where symbols have usual meaning.com provide constructive and destructive interference to the received the signal. h = 25m.jntuworld. resulting in diffraction and also the loss of energy.48m 500 Ex 5: Given f=900 MHz.89m (b) H2 = Thus H2 = 10 + 5. 3 8 × 100 × 400 = 10 (0.6 = 15.89m Thus H1 = 10 + 6. which is the vector sum of energy from unobstructed sources. then all Fresnel zones result in only the direct LOS prorogation and no diffraction effects are observed.48m . it obstructs contribution from some of the secondary wavelets. 67 www.

It considers the object like hill or mountain as a knife edge sharp 68 www.5 2 4.7dB v Since loss = -Gd (dB) = 21.3 Knife-edge diffraction model Knife-edge diffraction model is one of the simplest diffraction model to estimate the diffraction loss.jntuworld.5.24 Solution: v=h 2(d1 + d2 ) = 25 λd1 d2 2 × 2000 = 2.225/v) − 1 < v <= 0 v > 2.www. Gd (dB) = 20 log(0.74)2 = 3.com Figure 4.8: Knife-edge Diffraction Model Given.7 dB n= Thus n=4.62v) Gd (dB) = 20 log(0.jntuworld. (2.5 − 0.com .74 1 3 10 Gd (dB) = 20 log( 225 ) = −21.

60) (4. The electric field strength.4 When there are more than one obstruction. The important factor is to select the correct reference distance d0 . P L(d)( d n d ) =⇒ P L(dB) = P L(d0 ) + 10nlog( ) d0 d0 (4.56) (4. The value of n is 2 for free space.1 Link Budget Analysis Log-distance Path Loss Model According to this model the received power at distance d is given by.jntuworld.38 − 0.4 (4.61) Gd (db) = 20log(0. 69 www.5 − 0.58) (4.1v 2 ))) Gd (db) = 20log(0.6 4. For large cell area it is 1 Km.5exp(−0. Limitations: Surrounding environmental clutter may be different for two locations having the same transmitter to receiver separation. and 3 to 5 for urban scenarios.www.4 − sqrt(0. while for micro-cell system it varies from 10m-1m.8. (4.57) (4. Ed of a knife-edge diffracted wave is given by ∞ Ed /Eo = F (v) = (1 + j)/2 (exp((−jπt2 )/2)dt.62) The value of n varies with propagation environments.jntuworld.com object.6.com . The value of n varies from 4 to 6 for obstruction of building.62) − 1 <= v <= 0 0 <= v <= 1 1 <= v <= 2. Moreover it does not account for the shadowing effects.95v)) Gd (db) = 20log(0.225/v) v > 2.55) v The diffraction gain due to presence of knife edge can be given as Gd (db) = 20log|F (v)| Gd (db) = 0v <= −1 Gd (db) = 20log(0. then the equivalent model can be found by one knife-edge diffraction model as shown in Figure 4. 4.59) (4.1184 − (0.

7 Outdoor Propagation Models There are many empirical outdoor propagation models such as Longley-Rice model. Okumura model.7.65) (4.6.jntuworld.It can be applicable for base station effective antenna heights (ht ) ranging from 30 m to 1000 m.66) 4.5(1 − erf ( √ )) 2 and Q(z) = 1 − Q(−z) (4. Durkin’s model.63) where Xσ is a zero mean Gaussian distributed random variable in dB with standard deviation σ also in dB.com 4. z Q(z) = 0. 70 www. we discuss some of the outdoor models.jntuworld.64) So the probability that the received signal level (in dB) will exceed a certain value γ is P (Pd > γ) = Q( γ − Pr ). Below.The frequency coverage of this model is in the range of 200 MHz to 1900 MHz and distances of 1 Km to 100 Km. P L(dB) = P L(dB) + Xσ = P L(d0 ) + 10nlog( d ) + Xσ d0 (4.com .www.2 Log Normal Shadowing The equation for the log normal shadowing is given by. Longley-Rice model is the most commonly used model within a frequency band of 40 MHz to 100 GHz over different terrains.1 Okumura Model The Okumura model is used for Urban Areas is a Radio propagation model that is used for signal prediction. In practice n and σ values are computed from measured data. followed by a few indoor models too. Certain modifications over the rudimentary model like an extra urban factor (UF) due to urban clutter near the reciever is also included in this model. 4. Hata model etc. Average received power The ‘Q’ function is given by. σ (4.

com Okumura used extensive measurements of base station-to-mobile signal attenuation throughout Tokyo to develop a set of curves giving median attenuation relative to free space (Amu ) of signal propogation in irregular terrain.jntuworld.9−6.com .67) where L(fc .urban (d)dB = 69. d) and GAREA are obtained from Okumura’s empirical plots.70) G(hr ) = 10 log10 (hr /3). d) is the median attenuation in addition to free-space path loss across all environments. Correlation factors related to terrain are also developed in order to improve the models accuracy.55 log10 (ht )) log10 (d) (4.69) (4. G(hr ) = 20 log10 (hr /3). The empirical pathloss formula of Okumura at distance d parameterized by the carrier frequency fc is given by PL (d)dB = L(fc . This empirical formula simplifies the calculation of path loss because it is closed form formula and it is not based on empirical curves for the different parameters. Okumura’s model has a 10-14 dB empirical standard deviation between the path loss predicted by the model and the path loss associated with one of the measurements used to develop the model.G(ht ) is the base station antenna height gain factor.jntuworld.2 Hata Model The Hata model is an empirical formulation of the graphical path-loss data provided by the Okumura and is valid over roughly the same range of frequencies. The standard formula for empirical path loss in urban areas under the Hata model is PL. The values of Amu (fc .7.GAREA is the gain due to type of environment. 30m < ht < 1000m hr ≤ 3m 3m < hr < 10m (4.G(hr ) is the mobile antenna height gain factor.68) (4.www. Okumura derived empirical formulas for G(ht ) and G(hr ) as follows: G(ht ) = 20 log10 (ht /200). d) is free space path loss at distance d and carrier frequency fc .82 log10 (ht )−a(hr )+(44.55+26. 150-1500 MHz. 4. Amu (fc . d) + Amu (fc . d) − G(ht ) − G(hr ) − GAREA (4.71) 71 www.16 log10 (fc )−13.

urban (d)dB − 2(log10 (fc /28))2 − 5.For small to medium sized cities this factor is given by a(hr ) = (1. Indoor environments are also not captured by the Hata model.29(log10 (1. Hence it is a good model for first generation cellular systems.indoor channels may be classified as either line-of-sight or obstructed.and a(hr ) is a correction factor for the mobile antenna height based on the size of coverage area.and the variability of the environment is much greater for smaller range of Tx-Rx separation distances.8 Indoor Propagation Models The indoor radio channel differs from the traditional mobile radio channel in ways . 4.97dB else it is a(hr ) = 8.1 Partition Losses Inside a Floor (Intra-floor) The internal and external structure of a building formed by partitions and obstacles vary widely. but it does not model propogation well in current cellular systems with smaller cell sizes and higher frequencies.the distances covered are much smaller .Features such as lay-out of the building. 4. The Hata model well approximates the Okumura model for distances d > 1 Km. In general.75hr ))2 − 4.the Hata model does not provide for any specific pathcorrelation factors.com The parameters in this model are same as in the Okumura model.jntuworld.7)hr − (1.11 log10 (fc ) − 0.8.54hr ))2 − 1.56 log10 (fc ) − 0.suburban (d)dB = PL.72) Unlike the Okumura model.and the building type strongly influence the propagation within the building.Indoor radio propagation is dominated by the same mechanisms as outdoor: reflection.com .www.the construction materials.Partitions that are formed as a part of building structure are called 72 www. and is given by PL. diffraction and scattering with variable conditions.jntuworld.2(log10 (11.4 (4.1dB Corrections to the urban model are made for the suburban.8)dB and for larger cities at a frequencies fc > 300 MHz by a(hr ) = 3.

reflection and diffraction. which are common terrestrial models and these mainly explains the large scale path loss. 2.jntuworld. 73 www. 4.com . Singapore: Pearson Education. three principal propagation models have been identified: free-space propagation. Singapore: Pearson Education.. Haykin and M. Regarding path-loss. and partitions that may be moved and which do not span to the ceiling are called soft partitions.2 Partition Losses Between Floors (Inter-floor) The losses between floors of a building are determined by the external dimensions and materials of the building. Inc. S. one important factor introduced in this chapter is log-distance path loss model.9 Summary In this chapter. Modern Wireless Communications.8. 4.3 Log-distance Path Loss Model It has been observed that indoor path loss obeys the distance power law given by P L(dB) = P L(d0 ) + 10n log10 (d/d0 ) + Xσ (4. T. This is discussed in the next chapter.10 References 1.making it difficult to apply general models to specific indoor installations. however.8. Partitions vary widely in their physical and electrical characteristics. S. Even the number of windows in a building and the presence of tinting can impact the loss between floors.jntuworld.www. 2002. Rappaport. 2nd ed. These. may be insignificant when we consider the small-scale rapid path losses. Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice.as well as the type of construction used to create the floors and the external surroundings. 4. 2002..73) where n depends on the building and surrounding type. and Xσ represents a normal random variable in dB having standard deviation of σ dB. 4. Inc. Moher.com hard partitions .

2005. Zhuang. New Delhi: PHI. Wireless Communications and Networking.www.com . Mark and W.jntuworld.jntuworld. J.com 3. 74 www. W.

1 Multipath Propagation In wireless telecommunications. Causes of multipath include atmospheric ducting. and phase shifting of the signal. Mainly this causes the fading. and reflection from water bodies and terrestrial objects such as mountains and buildings. where different forms of propagation are present and the signals arrive at the receiver from transmitter via a variety of paths. multipath is the propagation phenomenon that results in radio signals reaching the receiving antenna by two or more paths.jntuworld. Adding the effect of movement of either Tx or Rx or the surrounding clutter to it. causing multipath fading.jntuworld.www.com .e. ionospheric reflection and refraction. the received overall signal amplitude or phase changes over a small amount of time. The effects of multipath include constructive and destructive interference. 75 www. We discuss all the related issues in this chapter.. Therefore there would be multipath interference.com Chapter 5 Multipath Wave Propagation and Fading 5. In digital radio communications (such as GSM) multipath can cause errors and affect the quality of communications. 5. i.2 Multipath & Small-Scale Fading Multipath signals are received in a terrestrial environment.

jntuworld. 3. This might be so severe that large scale radio propagation loss effects might be ignored. they induce a time varying Doppler shift on multipath components.1 Fading The term fading.2. then this effect dominates fading.com . means rapid fluctuations of the amplitudes.2 Multipath Fading Effects In principle. small-scale fading. the following are the main multipath effects: 1.jntuworld. (3) Speed of surrounding objects – If objects in the radio channel are in motion. or multipath delays of a radio signal over a short period or short travel distance. 2.3 Factors Influencing Fading The following physical factors influence small-scale fading in the radio propagation channel: (1) Multipath propagation – Multipath is the propagation phenomenon that results in radio signals reaching the receiving antenna by two or more paths. If the surrounding objects move at a greater rate than the mobile. 5.2. (4) Transmission Bandwidth of the signal – If the transmitted radio signal bandwidth is greater than the “bandwidth” of the multipath channel (quantified by coherence bandwidth). and phase shifting of the signal. Random frequency modulation due to varying Doppler shifts on different multipath signals. Time dispersion or echoes caused by multipath propagation delays. phases.com 5. The effects of multipath include constructive and destructive interference. 5. (2) Speed of the mobile – The relative motion between the base station and the mobile results in random frequency modulation due to different doppler shifts on each of the multipath components. or. Rapid changes in signal strength over a small travel distance or time interval.www. the received signal will be distorted.2. 76 www.

5.3.3) 77 www.www.com 5.jntuworld.2) where TS is the symbol period and στ is the rms delay spread.4) BC (5.1) where BS is the signal bandwidth and BC is the coherence bandwidth. There are two types of fading due to the time dispersive nature of the channel. then the fading is flat fading. Frequency Selective Fading Frequency selective fading occurs when the signal bandwidth is more than the coherence bandwidth of the mobile radio channel or equivalently the symbols duration of the signal is less than the rms delay spread. So we can say that flat fading occurs when BS BC (5.3 Types of Small-Scale Fading The type of fading experienced by the signal through a mobile channel depends on the relation between the signal parameters (bandwidth. Hence we have four different types of fading.com .jntuworld. Also TS στ (5. Equivalently if the symbol period of the signal is more than the rms delay spread of the channel. symbol period) and the channel parameters (rms delay spread and Doppler spread).1 Fading Effects due to Multipath Time Delay Spread Flat Fading Such types of fading occurs when the bandwidth of the transmitted signal is less than the coherence bandwidth of the channel. BS and TS στ (5. mobile channel has a constant gain and linear phase response over its bandwidth. And in such a case.

7) TC (5. the channel impulse response changes rapidly within the symbol duration of the signal.1 TS (5.com At the receiver.5) 5.jntuworld.3. Slow Fading In such a channel. Due to Doppler spreading.2 Fading Effects due to Doppler Spread Fast Fading In a fast fading channel. The channel introduces inter symbol interference. the rate of the change of the channel impulse response is much less than the transmitted signal.8) We observe that the velocity of the user plays an important role in deciding whether the signal experiences fast or slow fading. we obtain multiple copies of the transmitted signal. Therefore a signal undergoes fast fading if TS where TC is the coherence time and BS BD (5. signal undergoes frequency dispersion leading to distortion.jntuworld.com . A rule of thumb for a channel to have flat fading is if στ ≤ 0. all attenuated and delayed in time.www. Transmission involving very low data rates suffer from fast fading. 78 www. Hence TS and BS BD (5.6) where BD is the Doppler spread. We can consider a slow faded channel a channel in which channel is almost constant over atleast one symbol duration.9) TC (5.

In classical physics (waves in a medium).jntuworld. 5. As the BS is located at an elevated place. where ∆t is the time required for the mobile to travel from A to B. along a path segment length d between points A and B.10) where v is the velocity of waves in the medium. Consider a mobile moving at a constant velocity v. while it receives signals from a remote BS source S.com Figure 5.1. ± vr . is illustrated below. as given in Figure 5.jntuworld. vs is the velocity of the source relative to the medium and vr is the velocity of the receiver relative to the medium. In mobile communication. The expected Doppler shift of the EM wave then comes out to be ± vcr fo or. the relationship between the observed frequency f and the emitted frequency fo is given by: f= v ± vr v ± vs f0 (5. the above equation can be slightly changed according to our convenience since the source (BS) is fixed and located at a remote elevated level from ground.www.3 Doppler Shift The Doppler effect (or Doppler shift) is the change in frequency of a wave for an observer moving relative to the source of the wave. and θ is assumed to be the same at points A and B since the 79 www.com .3. a cos φ factor would λ also be multiplied with this.1: Illustration of Doppler effect. The difference in path lengths traveled by the wave from source S to the mobile at points A and B is ∆l = d cos θ = v∆t cos θ. The exact scenario.

the transmitted signal. Find out the expected Doppler shift. or Doppler shift (fd ) is fd = Example 1 An aircraft is heading towards a control tower with 500 kmph. The phase change in the received signal due to the difference in path lengths is therefore ∆ϕ = 2π∆l 2πv∆t = cos θ λ λ (5. t)| For a causal system: h(d. t) and x(t). t) = x(t) ∗ h(d. it can be written that λ= 900 × 106 1 = m 8 3 × 10 3 130 = 390 Hz 1/ 3 v 1 ∆ϕ . t) at any position d would be ∞ y(d.jntuworld.com .com source is assumed to be very far away.4 Impulse Response Model of a Multipath Channel Mobile radio channel may be modeled as a linear filter with time varying impulse response in continuous time.jntuworld. t) = −∞ x(τ ) h(d. The received signal y(d. Solution As given here. cos θ.www.11) and hence the apparent change in frequency. v = 500 kmph the horizontal component of the velocity is v = v cos θ = 500 × cos 20◦ = 130 m/s Hence. for t < 0 and for a stable system ∞ 80 dt < www. 2π ∆t λ (5. t) = 0. To show this. consider time variation due to receiver motion and time varying impulse response h(d. = . at an elevation of 20◦ .12) fd = If the plane banks suddenly and heads for other direction.3. 5. t − τ ) dτ (5. Communication between aircraft and control tower occurs at 900 MHz. the Doppler shift change will be 390 Hz to −390 Hz.13) ∞ −∞ |h(d.

N − 1} Bandpass channel impulse response model is x(t) → h(t. where N represents the total number of possible equally-spaced multipath components. τ )ejωc t → y(t) = Re{r(t)ejωc t } Baseband equivalent channel impulse response model is given by 1 1 c(t) → hb (t. t) = x(t) ∗ h(d.e. the position of the receiver is d = vt. 1. The model may be used to analyze transmitted RF signals having bandwidth less than 2/ .e.14) It is useful to discretize the multipath delay axis τ of the impulse response into equal time delay segments called excess delay bins. h(d. t y(vt.. The useful frequency span of the model is 2/∆τ . Therefore the above equation can be expressed as t y(t) = −∞ x(τ ) h(vt. τ ) → r(t) = c(t) ∗ hb (t.jntuworld. τ ) = Re{hb (t. t − τ ) dτ.16) (5. t − τ ) = 0 for t − τ < 0 ⇒ τ > t. τi )|i = 0.. i. Since v is a constant. y(vt. ∆τ If there are N multipaths. t − τ ) dτ = x(t) ∗ h(vt. t) = −∞ x(τ ) h(d. including the first arriving component.jntuworld.com .com Applying causality condition in the above equation. Since the receiver moves along the ground at a constant velocity v. each bin having a time delay width equal to ( τi+1 − τi ) = ∆τ and τi = i∆τ for i ∈ {0.www.. i. maximum excess delay is given by N ∆τ . {y(t) = x(t) ∗ h(t. . t) is just a function of t.17) (5.18) (5. 2.15) 81 www. t) (5. the integral limits are changed to t y(d... 1. t) = −∞ x(τ ) h(vt. t − τ ) dτ. τ ) 2 2 Average power is 1 x2 (t) = |c(t)|2 2 (5. .N − 1}.

22) 5. Consider a pulsed. τ ) in the above equation represents the phase shift due to free space propagation of the ith multipath component. Let us consider two extreme channel sounding cases. τmax Tb rect(t − − τi ). τ ))]δ(τ − τi (t)) (5. we use a probing pulse to approximate δ(t) i. plus any additional phase shifts which are encountered in the channel. p(t) ≈ δ(t − τ ) (5. (5.3. If the channel impulse response is wide sense stationary over a small-scale time or distance interval. The received power delay profile in a local area is given by p(τ ) ≈ k|hb (t. τ ) and τi (t) are the real amplitudes and excess delays.jntuworld. respectively. transmitted RF signal x(t) = Re{p(t)ej2πfc t } where p(t) = is r(t) = = i=0 4τmax Tbb (5.. τ )|2 .e. τ ) exp[j(2πfc τi (t) + ϕi (t.20) For measuring hb (τ ). impulse response of a multipath channel is measured using channel sounding techniques. The low pass channel output 1 N −1 ai exp[jθi ]p(t − τi ) 2 i=0 N −1 ai exp[jθi ]. τ ) = i=0 ai (t. then N −1 hb (τ ) = i=0 ai exp[jθi ]δ(τ − τi ) (5.5 Relation Between Bandwidth and Received Power In actual wireless communications.jntuworld. Tbb 2 82 www.19) where ai (t.www. of the ith multipath component at time t.com The baseband impulse response of a multipath channel can be expressed as N −1 hb (t. The phase term 2πfc τi (t) + ϕi (t.21) Power delay profile is taken by spatial average of |hb (t. τ )|2 over a local area.23) for 0 ≤ t ≤ Tbb and 0 elsewhere.com .

www. The received power at any time t0 is |r(t0 )| 2 = 1 τmax 1 τmax 1 τmax N −1 τmax r(t)r∗ (t)dt 0 τmax = 1 4 N −1 a2 (t0 )p2 (t − τk ) dt k k=0 τmax 0 N −1 = a2 (t0 ) k k=0 0 τmax Tb rect(t − − τi ) Tbb 2 2 dt = k=0 a2 (t0 ). then average small-scale receiver power is simply sum of average powers received from each multipath components.com .25) 83 www.θ [PW B ] = Ea. let the envelope be c(t) = 2.jntuworld.θ [ i=0 |ai exp(jθi )|2 ] ≈ i=0 a2 i (5. consider a CW signal.2: A generic transmitted pulsed RF signal. Then N −1 r(t) = i=0 ai exp[jθi (t. transmitted into the same channel and for simplicity. N −1 N −1 Ea. k Interpretation: If the transmitted signal is able to resolve the multipaths.com Figure 5.24) Now instead of a pulse. τ )] (5.jntuworld.

i. t)x(t − τ ) dτ = Z(t)x(t − τi ) 84 (5. Bottomline: 1.jntuworld.28) h(τ. t)] = The received signal ∞ ∞ −∞ r(t) = −∞ R(f. If the signal bandwidth is greater than multipath channel bandwidth then fading effects are negligible 2.29) where R(f.r. ∞ H(f. 2π].6 Linear Time Varying Channels (LTV) The time variant transfer function(TF) of an LTV channel is FT of h(t. τ )]|2 (5. the received signal is ∞ αn (t)e−j2πfc τn (t) . ai varies little but θi varies greatly resulting in large fluctuations.θ [PW B ]. This occurs if multipath components are uncorrelated or if multipath phases are i.j=i rij cos(θi − θj ) where rij = Ea [ai aj ]. For flat fading channel.θ [PCW ] = Ea.27) (5.com . If.3. large fading occurs due to phase shift of unresolved paths. 5. t) = H(f. rij = cos(θi − θj ) = 0. N −1 Ea.30) www.t.jntuworld.d over [0.com and the instantaneous power is N −1 |r(t)|2 = | i=0 ai exp[jθi (t. In r(t) = −∞ h(τ.www. t)ej2πf τ df (5. t)X(f ). t) = F T [h(τ. then Ea.26) Over local areas. t) = Z(t)δ(τ − τi ) where Z(t) = this case. t)e−j2πf τ dτ H(f. t)ej2πf t df (5. If the signal bandwidth is less than the multipath channel bandwidth. t)] = −∞ h(τ. τ .θ [ i=0 N −1 |ai exp(jθi )|2 ] N −1 N ≈ i=0 a2 + 2 i i=0 i. t) = F T −1 [H(f. τ ) w.θ [PCW ] = Ea. h(τ.

where the channel becomes multiplicative. ν)] = Delay Doppler spread: ∞ ∞ −∞ H(f. t)e−j2πνt dt (5.32) H(τ. ν)ej2πνt dν (5.31) and H(f. and uses a receiver with a wide bandpass filter (BW = 2 Tbb Hz). then this system provides a local average power delay profile.com .33) 5.3: Relationship among different channel functions.jntuworld. If the oscilloscope is set on averaging mode. t)] = −∞ h(τ. ν) = F T [H(f. The signal is then amplified.3. Doppler spread functions: ∞ H(f. t)] = −∞ H(f.com Figure 5. 85 www. t)e−j2πνt dt (5. ν) = F T [h(τ. envelope detected. and displayed and stored on a high speed oscilloscope.jntuworld. Immediate measurements of the square of the channel impulse response convolved with the probing pulse can be taken.7 Small-Scale Multipath Measurements Direct RF Pulse System A wideband pulsed bistatic radar usually transmits a repetitive pulse of width Tbb s.www. t) = F T −1 [H(f.

Frequency Domain Channel Sounding In this case we measure the channel in the frequency domain and then convert it into time domain impulse response by taking its inverse discrete Fourier transform (IDFT). A vector network analyzer controls a swept frequency synthesizer. These signals allow the analyzer to measure the complex response.www. severe fading occurs.jntuworld. The number and spacing of the frequency step impacts the time resolution of the impulse response measurement. by stepping through discrete frequencies. of the channel over the measured frequency range. This system is subject to interference noise.4: Direct RF pulsed channel IR measurement. An Sparameter test set is used to monitor the frequency response of the channel. The S21 (ω) measure is the measure of the signal flow from transmitter antenna to receiver 86 www. For each frequency step. If the first arriving signal is blocked or fades. the S-parameter test set transmits a known signal level at port 1 and monitors the received signal at port 2. and it is possible the system may not trigger properly. S21 (ω). The sweeper scans a particular frequency band.jntuworld.com Figure 5.com . centered on the carrier.

1 Time Dispersion Parameters These parameters include the mean excess delay.jntuworld. 5. These parameters can be broadly divided in to two types. They all can be determined from the power delay profile.www.rms delay spread and excess delay spread.com Figure 5.5: Frequency domain channel IR measurement.com . This system is suitable only for indoor channel measurements.. This system is also non real-time. antenna (i. Hence. 5. the channel). The mean excess delay is the first moment of the power delay profile and is 87 www.4 Multipath Channel Parameters To compare the different multipath channels and to quantify them.jntuworld.4. we define some parameters. it is not suitable for time-varying channels unless the sweep times are fast enough.e.

P (1) = 1 watt (1)(0) + (1)(1) = 0.1 TS (5. τk is the excess delay and P (τk ) is the power of the individual multipath signals.34) where ak is the amplitude.36) As a rule of thumb. what is the maximum bit rate that can be sent through the channel without needing an equalizer? Solution 1. Sketch the power delay profile and compute RMS delay spread for the following: 1 P (τ ) = n=0 δ(τ − n × 10−6 ) (in watts) 2. P (0) = 1 watt. for a channel to be flat fading the following condition must be satisfied στ ≤ 0.com defined as a2 τk k = a2 k P (τk )τk P (τk ) τ= ¯ (5.37) where TS is the symbol duration.5µs 1+1 τ= τ 2 = 0.5µs2 στ = 0.jntuworld.com . The mean square excess delay spread is defined as τ¯2 = 2 P (τk )τk P (τk ) (5.www. If BPSK modulation is used.jntuworld. For this case.5µs 88 www.35) Since the rms delay spread is the square root of the second central moment of the power delay profile. it can be written as στ = τ¯2 − (¯)2 τ (5. no equalizer is required at the receiver. Example 2 1.

2 Frequency Dispersion Parameters To characterize the channel in the frequency domain.www.com 2.1 ⇒ Rs = 1 Ts = 0. 89 www.jntuworld.4. Here dmin = d0 and dmax = di + dr Transmitted power = PT .2 × 104 = 200 kbps For BPSK we need Rb = Rs = 200 kbps Example 3 A simple delay spread bound: Feher’s upper bound Consider a simple worst-case delay spread scenario as shown in figure below. Minimum received power = PRmin = PT hreshold PRmin λ = GT G R ( )2 PT 4πdmax Put GT = GR = 1 i.jntuworld.. For flat fading channel.e. we need στ Ts 0. we have the following parameters.com . considering omni-directional unity gain antennas λ PT 1 )( )2 4π PRmin dmax = ( τmax = dmax λ PT 1 =( )( )2 c 4πc PRmin 1 PT 1 )( )2 4πf PRmin τmax = ( 5.

com (1) Coherence bandwidth: it is a statistical measure of the range of frequencies over which the channel can be considered to pass all the frequency components with almost equal gain and linear phase.5.www. 50στ (5. A more convenient parameter to study the time variation of the channel is the coherence time.5 Statistical models for multipath propagation Many multipath models have been proposed to explain the observed statistical nature of a practical mobile channel. When channel behaves like this.9. When this condition is satisfied then we say the channel to be flat. 5.jntuworld. if the coherence bandwidth is considered to be the bandwidth over which the frequency correlation function is above 0. then it can be approximated as TC ≈ 9 16πfm (5. 5στ (5. If the coherence bandwidth is considered to be the bandwidth over which the frequency correlation function is above 0.39) The coherence bandwidth describes the time dispersive nature of the channel in the local area. then it is defined as BC ≈ 1 .40) ν where fm is the maximum doppler spread given be fm = λ . coherence bandwidth is the minimum separation over which the two frequency components are affected differently. if the coherence time is considered to be the bandwidth over which the time correlation is above 0. This variation may be due to the relative motion between the mobile and the base station or the motion of the objects in the channel.38) However. it is said to be slow faded. Both the first order and second order statistics 90 www. then it is approximated as BC ≈ 1 .jntuworld. Another parameter is the Doppler spread (BD ) which is the range of frequencies over which the received Doppler spectrum is non zero. Essentially it is the minimum time duration over which two received signals are affected differently. For an example. (2) Coherence time: this is a statistical measure of the time duration over which the channel impulse response is almost invariant. Practically.com .5.

N N →∞ ˜ lim E = lim N →∞ En ejθn n=1 (5. have been examined in order to find out the effective way to model and combat the channel effects. The Rayleigh model is used to model the statistical time varying nature of the received envelope of a flat fading envelope. are sufficiently large number of multipaths) and all the En are IID distributed. 5.42) (5.6: Two ray NLoS multipath.5.43) = Zr + jZi = Rejφ 91 www.1 NLoS Propagation: Rayleigh Fading Model Let there be two multipath signals S1 and S2 received at two different time instants due to the presence of obstacles as shown in Figure 5.www.41) Now if N→ ∞(i.So we have N ˜ E= n=1 En ejθn (5. Let En be the electric field and Θn be the relative phase of the various multipath signals.com Figure 5.jntuworld. resulting in Rayleigh fading. The most popular of these models are Rayleigh model.e. Below. Now there can either be constructive or destructive interference between the two signals. which describes the NLoS propagation. then by Central Limit Theorem we have.6.jntuworld. we discuss about the main first order and second order statistical models.com .

www.jntuworld.com

where Zr and Zi are Gaussian Random variables. For the above case R= and φ = tan−1 Zi Zr (5.45)
2 Zr + Zi2

(5.44)

For all practical purposes we assume that the relative phase Θn is uniformaly distributed. E[e
jθn

1 ]= 2π

ejθ dθ = 0
0

(5.46)

It can be seen that En and Θn are independent. So, ˜ E[E] = E[ ˜ E[ E ] = E[
2

En ejθn ] = 0
N

(5.47)
2 En = P0 n=1

En ejθn

∗ En e−jθn ] = E[ m n

En Em ej(θn −θm ) ] =

(5.48) where P0 is the total power obtained. To find the Cumulative Distribution Function(CDF) of R, we proceed as follows. FR (r) = Pr (R ≤ r) =
A

fZi ,Zr (zi , zr )dzi dzr

(5.49)

where A is determined by the values taken by the dummy variable r. Let Zi and Zr be zero mean Gaussian RVs. Hence the CDF can be written as FR (r) =
A

−(Zr +Z ) i 1 e 2σ2 dZi dZr 2 2πσ

2

2

(5.50)

Let Zr = p cos(Θ) and Zi = p sin(Θ) So we have
2π 2π

FR (r) =
0 0

−p2 1 e 2σ2 pdpdθ 2πσ 2

(5.51)

= 1 − e 2σ2

−r 2

(5.52)

Above equation is valid for all r ≥ 0. The pdf can be written as fR (r) = r − r22 e 2σ σ2 (5.53)

and is shown in Figure 5.7 with different σ values. This equation too is valid for all r ≥ 0. Above distribution is known as Rayleigh distribution and it has been derived 92

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

Figure 5.7: Rayleigh probability density function. for slow fading. However, if fD fading. We observe the following: E[R] = π σ 2 (5.54) (5.55) (5.56) (5.57) 1 Hz, we call it as Quasi-stationary Rayleigh

E[R2 ] = 2σ 2 var[R] = (2 − π 2 )σ 2

median[R] = 1.77σ.

5.5.2

LoS Propagation: Rician Fading Model

Rician Fading is the addition to all the normal multipaths a direct LOS path.

Figure 5.8: Ricean probability density function.

93

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

fR (r) =

r −(r2 +A2 ) Ar e 2σ2 I0 ( 2 ) σ2 σ

(5.58)

for all A ≥ 0 and r ≥ 0. Here A is the peak amplitude of the dominant signal and I0 (.) is the modified Bessel function of the first kind and zeroth order. A factor K is defined as KdB = 10 log As A → 0 then KdB → ∞. A2 2σ 2 (5.59)

5.5.3

Generalized Model: Nakagami Distribution

A generalization of the Rayleigh and Rician fading is the Nakagami distribution.

Figure 5.9: Nakagami probability density function. Its pdf is given as, fR (r) = where, Γ(m) is the gamma function Ω is the average signal power and m is the fading factor.It is always greater than or equal to 0.5. 2rm−1 mm −mr2 ( )e Ω Γ(m) Ωm (5.60)

When m=1, Nakagami model is the Rayleigh model. When m= (M + 1)2 2M + 1

94

www.jntuworld.com

www.jntuworld.com

Figure 5.10: Schematic representation of level crossing with a Rayleigh fading envelope at 10 Hz Doppler spread.

where M= Nakagami fading is the Rician fading. As m → ∞ Nakagami fading is the impulse channel and no fading occurs. A 2σ

5.5.4

Second Order Statistics

To design better error control codes, we have two important second order parameters of fading model, namely the level crossing rate (LCR) and average fade duration (AFD). These parameters can be utilized to assess the speed of the user by measuring them through the reverse channel. The LCR is the expected rate at which the Rayleigh fading envelope normalized to the local rms amplitude crosses a specific level ’R’ in a positive going direction.

NR =
0

rp(R, r)dr = ˙ ˙ ˙

2πfD ρe−ρ

2

(5.61)

where r is the time derivative of r(t), fD is the maximum Doppler shift and ρ is the ˙ value of the specified level R, normalized to the local rms amplitude of the fading envelope. The other important parameter, AFD, is the average period time for which the

95

www.jntuworld.com

Here.6.www. 96 www.jntuworld. 1 − e−ρ τ=√ ¯ 2πfD ρe−ρ2 e−ρ − 1 =√ .64) (5.63) therefore. another parameter is fading rate. an average value of 10% as depth of fading gives a marginal fading scenario.com receiver power is below a specified level R. the obtained Rayleigh output is flat faded signal but not frequency selective.65) Apart from LCR. Also the Doppler effect is not accounted for. two independent Gaussian low pass noise sources are used to produce in-phase and quadrature fading branches. 5. the output of the Clarke’s model is passed through Doppler filter in the RF or through two initial baseband Doppler filters for baseband processing as shown in Figure 5. τ= ¯ As Pr (r ≤ R) = 0 1 Pr (r ≤ R) Nr R (5.2 Clarke and Gans’ Model: with Doppler Effect In this model. It is defined as the ratio between the minimum value and the mean square value of the faded signal. 5. Usually. This is the basic model and is useful for slow fading channel. 2 (5.11.66) Another statistical parameter.jntuworld. is called as depth of fading.62) p(r)dr = 1 − e−ρ . 2πfD ρ 2 2 (5.com .6 5.1 Simulation of Rayleigh Fading Models Clarke’s Model: without Doppler Effect In it. λ (5. sometimes used in the mobile communication. which is defined as the number of times the signal envelope crosses the middle value (rm ) in a positive going direction per unit time.6. The average rate is expressed as N (rm ) = 2v .

as given in Figure 5.6. and.6. This is achieved through varying the parameters ai and τi . 97 www.www.3 Rayleigh Simulator with Wide Range of Channel Conditions To get a frequency selective output we have the following simulator through which both the frequency selective and flat faded Rayleigh signal may be obtained. hb (t) = α1 ejφ1 δ(t) + α2 ejφ2 δ(t − τ ) (5. 5.com .13.11: Clarke and Gan’s model for Rayleigh fading generation using quadrature amplitude modulation with (a) RF Doppler filter.4 Two-Ray Rayleigh Faded Model The above model is. By varying τ it is possible to create a wide range of frequency selective fading effects. (b) baseband Doppler filter. So.12. 5.jntuworld. we have the two ray Rayleigh fading model which can be easily implemented in software as shown in Figure 5.com Figure 5.jntuworld. very complex and difficult to implement.67) where α1 and α2 are independent Rayleigh distributed and φ1 and φ2 are independent and uniformaly distributed over 0 to 2π. however.

www. The amplitudes of the received components are independent Rayleigh random variables with variances that decay exponentially with cluster delay as well as excess delay within a cluster. 5.com .jntuworld.5 Saleh and Valenzuela Indoor Statistical Model This method involved averaging the square law detected pulse response while sweeping the frequency of the transmitted pulse.6.com Figure 5. The model assumes that the multipath components arrive in clusters.jntuworld. Sub98 www.12: Rayleigh fading model to get both the flat and frequency selective channel conditions. 5. The clusters and multipath components within a cluster form Poisson arrival processes with different rates.6 SIRCIM/SMRCIM Indoor/Outdoor Statistical Models SIRCIM (Simulation of Indoor Radio Channel Impulse-response Model) generates realistic samples of small-scale indoor channel impulse response measurements.6.

. S. Inc.. 5. 5. Mark and W. T. i. 2nd ed. S.www. Singapore: Pearson Education.13: Two-ray Rayleigh fading model.jntuworld.e. Certain efficient signal processing techniques to mitigate these effects will be discussed in Chapter 7. fading. 2. 3. Moher.7 Conclusion In this chapter. W. New Delhi: PHI. the main channel impairment. Inc. 99 www. Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice. Wireless Communications and Networking. 2002.8 References 1. Zhuang. Haykin and M.com . a similar program that generates small-scale urban cellular and micro-cellular channel impulse responses. 2002. Modern Wireless Communications.com Figure 5. 2005. has been introduced which becomes so severe sometimes that even the large scale path loss becomes insignificant in comparison to it. Mainly the frequency selective fading.. Some statistical propagation models have been presented based on the fading characteristics. fast fading and deep fading can be considered the major obstruction from the channel severity view point. J. sequent work by Huang produced SMRCIM (Simulation of Mobile Radio Channel Impulse-response Model). Singapore: Pearson Education.jntuworld. Rappaport.

com .com 4. Blake. 2004. Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum Applications. Singapore: Thomson Asia Pvt Ltd.jntuworld. 100 www. India: Thomson Learning. Agarwal and Q-A. D. Wireless Communications Technology. Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems. Delmar. NJ: Prentice Hall. 2007.www. P. Upper Saddle River. K. R.jntuworld. Zeng. 5. Feher. Nelson. 1995. 6.

jntuworld. The baseband signal is called the modulating signal and the passband signal is called the modulated signal.com Chapter 6 Transmitter and Receiver Techniques 6. The other requirements are power and bandwidth efficiency at a low implementation complexity. noise and interference in the transmitted information bearing signal. Modulation can be done by varying certain characteristics of carrier waves according to the message signal. introduces distortion.2 Modulation Modulation is a process of encoding information from a message source in a manner suitable for transmission. To counteract these effects is one of the requirements while designing a transmitter and receiver end technique. The information transmitted by the source is received by the destination via a physical medium called a channel. 101 www. 6.www.jntuworld. Demodulation is the reciprocal process of modulation which involves extraction of original baseband signal from the modulated passband signal.1 Introduction Electrical communication transmitter and receiver techniques strive toward obtaining reliable communication at a low cost. It involves translating a baseband message signal to a passband signal. which may be wired or wireless. with maximum utilization of the channel resources.com . This physical medium.

com 6. it is necessary to increase the signal power.1 Choice of Modulation Scheme Several factors influence the choice of a digital modulation scheme.2 Advantages of Modulation 1. The system capacity of a digital mobile communication system is directly related to the bandwidth efficiency of the modulation scheme. In a digital communication system.2. There is a fundamental upper bound on achievable bandwidth efficiency. 102 www. 2. performs well in multipath and fading conditions.www. A desirable modulation scheme provides low bit error rates at low received signal to noise ratios. So translation to a higher frequency band results in long distance transmission. and is given by the channel capacity formula ηBmax = C S = log2 (1 + ) B N (6. Increases the range of communication: Low frequency baseband signals suffer from attenuation and hence cannot be transmitted over long distances. Power efficiency describes the ability of a modulation technique to preserve the fidelity of the digital message at low power levels. Bandwidth efficiency describes the ability of a modulation scheme to accommodate data within a limited bandwidth.jntuworld. and is easy and cost-effective to implement.1) 6.com . occupies a minimum of bandwidth. Facilitates multiple access: By translating the baseband spectrum of signals from various users to different frequency bands. Reduction in antenna size: The antenna height and aperture is inversely proportional to the radiated signal frequency and hence high frequency signal radiation result in smaller antenna size.2. since a modulation with a greater value of ηb (= R B) will transmit more data in a given spectrum allocation. in order to increase noise immunity. multiple users can be accommodated within a band of the electromagnetic spectrum. the maximum possible bandwidth efficiency is limited by the noise in the channel.jntuworld. The performance of a modulation scheme is often measured in terms of its power efficiency and bandwidth efficiency. 3. Shannon’s channel coding theorem states that for an arbitrarily small probability of error.

If this input-output relation satisfies the principle of homogeneity and superposition then the modulation technique is said to be linear.3) (6.2. From the principle of homogeneity: Let us scale the input by a factor a. Hence AM is a nonlinear technique but DSBSC modulation is a linear technique since it satisfies both the above mentioned principles. 103 (6.com 6.3 Linear and Non-linear Modulation Techniques The mathematical relation between the message signal (applied at the modulator input) and the modulated signal (obtained at the modulator output) decides whether a modulation technique can be classified as linear or non-linear.2) www.jntuworld.4) (6. The principle of homogeneity states that if the input signal to a system (in our case the system is a modulator) is scaled by a factor then the output must be scaled by the same factor.com . sAM 1 (t) and sAM 2 (t) are the outputs obtained when m1 (t) and m2 (t) are applied one at a time. From the principle of superposition: Let m(t) = m1 (t) + m2 (t) be applied simultaneously at the input of the modulator.jntuworld. The resulting output is: sAM (t) = Ac [1 + m1 (t) + m2 (t)] cos(2πfc t) = sAM 1 (t) + sAM 2 (t) = Ac [2 + m1 (t) + m2 (t)] cos(2πfc t) Here.www. So m(t) = am1 (t) and the corresponding output becomes : sAM 1 (t) = Ac [1 + am1 (t)] cos(2πfc t) = asAM 1 (t) 2. 1. If m(t) is the message signal and sAM (t) is the modulated signal given by: sAM (t) = Ac [1 + km(t)] cos(2πfc t) Then. For example an amplitude modulated wave consists of the addition two terms: the message signal multiplied with the carrier and the carrier itself. The principle of superposition states that the output of a linear system due to many simultaneously applied input signals is equal to the summation of outputs obtained when each input is applied one at a time.

Angle modulation varies a sinusoidal carrier signal in such a way that the angle of the carrier is varied according to the amplitude of the modulating baseband signal. the resulting amplitude or angle modulation technique is called analog modulation. s(t) = s1 φ1 (t) + s2 φ2 (t) where φ1 (t) and φ2 (t) are given by. These orthogonal signals are normalized with respect to their energy content to yield an orthonormal signal set having unit energy.6) (6.3 Signal Space Representation of Digitally Modulated Signals Any arbitrary signal can be expressed as the linear combination of a set of orthogonal signals or equivalently as a point in an M dimensional signal space. φ1 (t) = 2 cos(2πfc t) T 104 (6. When digital messages undergo modulation the resulting modulation technique is called digital modulation. having a symbol duration T.com 6.jntuworld. Generally a digitally modulated signal s(t).5 Analog and Digital Modulation Techniques The nature of the information generating source classifies a modulation technique as an analog or digital modulation technique. Amplitude modulation involves variation of amplitude of the carrier wave with changes in the message signal. When analog messages generated from a source passe through a modulator.2.4 Amplitude and Angle Modulation Depending on the parameter of the carrier (amplitude or angle) that is changed in accordance with the message signal.com . These orthonormal signals are independent of each other and form a basis set of the signal space. is expressed as a linear combination of two orthonormal signals φ1 (t) and φ2 (t). where M denotes the cardinality of the set of orthogonal signals.2.5) www. constituting the two orthogonal axis in this two dimensional signal space and is expressed mathematically as.jntuworld.www. 6. a modulation scheme can be classified as an amplitude or angle modulation. 6.

13) (6.10) (6. the output r(t) of the bandpass system is given by the following convolution ˜ 1 ˜ r(t) = s(t) ⊗ h(t) ˜ ˜ 2 105 (6.4 Complex Representation of Linear Modulated Signals and Band Pass Systems A band-pass signal s(t) can be resolved in terms of two sinusoids in phase quadrature as follows: s(t) = sI (t)cos(2πfc t) − sQ (t)sin(2πfc t) (6.12) (6.7) The coefficients s1 and s2 form the coordinates of the signal s(t) in the two dimensional signal space.jntuworld. When sI (t) and sQ (t) are incorporated in the formation of the following complex signal.com .11) (6. band-pass systems characterized by an impulse response h(t) can be expressed in terms of its in-phase and quadrature-phase components as: h(t) = hI (t)cos(2πfc t) − hQ (t)sin(2πfc t) The complex baseband model for the impulse response therefore becomes.com φ2 (t) = 2 cos(2πfc t) T (6.14) www. ˜ h(t) = hI (t) + hQ (t) h(t) can therefore be expressed in terms of its complex envelope as ˜ h(t) = Re{h(t)ej2πfc t }.www.9) When s(t) passes through h(t). (6.8) Hence sI (t) and sQ (t) are known as the in-phase and quadrature-phase components respectively. 6. ˜ Analogously. s(t) = sI (t) + sQ (t) ˜ then s(t) can be expressed in a more compact form as: s(t) = Re{˜(t)e(j2πfc t) } s where s(t) is called the complex envelope of s(t).jntuworld. then in the complex baseband domain.

16) This is a nonlinear technique and can be made linear by multiplying the carrier with the message signal.com .1 Linear Modulation Techniques Amplitude Modulation (DSBSC) Generally. s(t). cos(2πfc t). Moreover.www. varies linearly with the modulating digital signal.18) www. For a sinusoidal modulating signal m(t) = Am Ac cos(2πfm t). m(t). in amplitude modulation. the modulation index is given by k= Am . AM demodulation techniques may be broadly divided into two categories: coherent and non-coherent demodulation. In DSBSC the amplitude of the transmitted signal. The transmitted signal DSBSC signal s(t) can be expressed as: s(t) = Am(t)exp(j2πfc t). the output of the modulator.17) If m(t) is scaled by a factor of a. Ac (6. then s(t).15) The modulation index k of an AM signal is defined as the ratio of the peak message signal amplitude to the peak carrier amplitude.jntuworld. The resulting modulated carrier or AM signal can be represented as: sAM (t) = Ac [1 + km(t)] cos(2πfc t).jntuworld. Hence the principle of homogeneity is satisfied. Coherent demodulation requires knowledge 106 (6. Hence the principle of superposition is also satisfied. (6. is also scaled by the same factor as seen from the above equation. (6.The resulting modulation scheme is known as DSBSC modulation. Linear modulation techniques are bandwidth efficient and hence are very attractive for use in wireless communication systems where there is an increasing demand to accommodate more and more users within a limited spectrum.5 6.5. the amplitude of a high frequency carrier signal. is varied in accordance to the instantaneous amplitude of the modulating message signal m(t). s12 (t) = A[m1 (t) + m2 (t)]cos(2πfc t) = Am1 (t)cos(2πfc t) + Am2 (t)cos(2πfc t) = s1 (t) + s2 (t) where A is the carrier amplitude and fc is the carrier frequency.com 6. Thus DSBSC is a linear modulation technique.

it is easier to see it as two independently modulated quadrature carriers. Tb (6. and energy per bit Eo = 1 A2 Tb then the transmitted BP SK signal is 2 c sBP SK (t) = m(t) 2Eb cos(2πfc t + θc ). respectively. the even (or odd) bits are 107 www.jntuworld. whereas non-coherent detection requires no phase information. 6. In case of BP SK.www. of the transmitted carrier frequency and phase at the receiver.5. the two phases are separated by 180o . The phase of the carrier in the QPSK takes 1 of 4 equally spaced shifts. With this interpretation.20) 6.1: BPSK signal constellation. the phase of a constant amplitude carrier signal is switched between two values according to the two possible signals m1 and m2 corresponding to binary 1 and 0.com Figure 6.1.5.19) A typical BPSK signal constellation diagram is shown in Figure 6.jntuworld.3 QPSK The Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a 4-ary PSK signal. The probability of bit error for many modulation schemes in an AW GN channel is found using the Q-function of the distance between the signal points. If the sinusoidal carrier has an amplitude A. PeBP SK = Q( 2Eb ).com .2 BPSK In binary phase shift keying (BPSK). Although QPSK can be viewed as a quaternary modulation. Normally. N0 (6.

108 www.2: QPSK signal constellation.4 Offset-QPSK As in QPSK. i = (1. as shown in Figure 6. the NRZ data is split into two streams of odd and even bits.5. Figure 6.21) 6. The QPSK transmitted signal is defined by: si (t) = A cos(ωt + (i − 1)π/2).3. 2. used to modulate the in-phase component of the carrier.jntuworld. while the odd (or even) bits are used to modulate the quadrature-phase component of the carrier.com . (6.2. 3.jntuworld.3: QPSK transmitter. Each bit in these streams has a duration of twice the bit duration. 4) and the constellation disgram is shown in Figure 6.www.com Figure 6.

jntuworld. are used then due to distortion.com . When high efficiency power amplifiers. 109 www. whose non-linearity increases as the efficiency goes high. From the constellation diagram it is observed that a signal point in any quadrant can take a value in the diagonally opposite quadrant only when two pulses change their polarities together leading to an abrupt 180 degree phase shift between adjacent symbol slots.com Figure 6. of the original data stream. Since sudden 180 degree phase changes cannot occur in OQPSK. Thus to reduce these sidelobes spectral shaping is done at baseband. Tb . This is prevented in O-QPSK and the allowed phase transitions are ± 90 degree. this problem is reduced to a certain extent.www. Abrupt phase changes leading to sudden changes in the signal amplitude in the time domain corresponds to significant out of band high frequency components in the frequency domain.4: DQPSK constellation diagram.and hence these data streams are also called the in-phase and and quadrature phase components. After modulation they are added up and transmitted. harmonics are generated and this leads to what is known as spectral regrowth. These odd (d1 (t)) and even bit streams (d2 (t)) are then used to modulate two sinusoidals in phase quadrature.jntuworld. The constellation diagram of OffsetQPSK is the same as QPSK. Offset-QPSK differs from QPSK in that the d1 (t) and d2 (t) are aligned such that the timing of the pulse streams are offset with respect to each other by Tb seconds.

Non-return to zero mark (NRZ-M): 1 forces negative and positive transitions while 0 causes no transitions.6 Line Coding Specific waveforms are required to represent a zero and a one uniquely so that a sequence of bits is coded into electrical pulses. 110 www. 6. 1 forces a transition in the middle of the bit while 0 does nothing. Non-return to zero space (NRZ-S): 0 forces negative and positive transitions while 1 causes no transitions.com . Return to zero (RZ): 1 goes high for half a period while 0 remains at zero state. The constellation diagram along with possible transitions are shown in Figure 6.5 π/4 DQPSK The data for π/4 DQPSK like QPSK can be thought to be carried in the phase of a single modulated carrier or on the amplitudes of a pair of quadrature carriers. Biphase-M: There is always a transition in the beginning of a bit interval. −3π/4 for 11 and −π/4 for 10. The modulated signal during the time slot of kT < t < (k + 1)T given by: s(t) = cos(2πfc t + ψk+1 ) (6.5. 2. Non-return to zero level (NRZ-L): 1 forces a a high while 0 forces a low.com 6. 4. 3.22) Here. 6.jntuworld. 1. 3π/4 for 01.www. This corresponds to eight points in the signal constellation but at any instant of time only one of the four points are possible: the four points on axis or the four points off axis.jntuworld. Biphase-L: Manchester 1 forces positive transition while 0 forces negative transition. In case of consecutive bits of same type a transition occurs in the beginning of the bit period. This is known as line coding. ψk+1 = ψk + ∆ψk and ∆ψk can take values π/4 for 00. There are various ways to accomplish this and the different forms are summarized below. 5.4.

0 forces a transition in the middle of the bit while 1 does nothing. 6. Bipolar/Alternate mark inversion (AMI): 1 forces a positive or negative pulse for half a bit period and they alternate while 0 does nothing.com Figure 6. Such a pulse is not desirable for two fundamental reasons: 111 www. 7.7 Pulse Shaping Let us think about a rectangular pulse as defined in BPSK. 0 forces a transition in the beginning of the bit while 1 does nothing. Differential Manchester: There is always a transition in the middle of a bit interval. 8.jntuworld.www.com . 9. All these schemes are shown in Figure 6.jntuworld.5.5: Scematic of the line coding techniques. Biphase-S: There is always a transition in the beginning of a bit interval.

channel and receiver) be denoted as Hef f (f ) and according to Nyquist it must be given by: Hef f (f ) = 1 f rect( ) fs fs (6. given by hef f (t). means it would introduce signal distortion to such type of pulses.com . Let the overall frequency response of a communication system (the transmitter. (b) a wireless channel has memory due to multipath and therefore it introduces ISI. This type of technique is called pulse shaping technique. its frequency content is also infinite. such that. Hef f (f ) ↔ hef f (t) 112 (6. But a wireless channel is bandlimited. We discuss here about the fundamental works of Nyquist.6: Rectangular Pulse (a) the spectrum of a rectangular pulse is infinite in extent.www.com Figure 6. As pulse shaping is difficult to directly manipulate the transmitter spectrum at RF frequencies. the ideal pulse shape for zero ISI. spectral shaping is usually done through baseband or IF processing. Below. we would look into another type of pulse shaping technique.23) Hence.jntuworld.24) www. In order to mitigate the above two effects.7. an efficient pulse shaping funtion or a premodulation filter is used at the Tx side so that QoS can be maintained to the mobile users during communication. 6.1 Nyquist pulse shaping There are a number of well known pulse shaping techniques which are used to simultaneously to reduce the inter-symbol effects and the spectral width of a modulated digital signal. we start with the fundamental works of Nyquist on pulse shaping and subsequently.jntuworld. Correspondingly.

Mathematically.25) (6. 1].www.7.jntuworld.7.3 Realization of Pulse Shaping Filters Since hef f (t) is non-causal. Digital communication systems thus often store several symbols at a time inside the modulator and then clock out a group of symbols by 113 www. 1 − (∆ρt/2Ts )2 with ρ being the roll off factor ∈ [0. is given by: hef f (t) = πt sin( Ts ) πt Ts (6.2 Raised Cosine Roll-Off Filtering 1 2Ts If we take a rectangular filter with bandwidth f0 ≥ and convolve it with any arbitrary even function Z(f) with zero magnitude outside the passband of the rectangular filter then a zero ISI effect would be achieved.com .28) (6. Hef f (f ) = rect( hef f (t) = z(t) = f ) ∗ Z(f ).jntuworld.com Figure 6.27) (6. pulse shaping filters are usually truncated within ±6Ts about t = 0 for each symbol.29) cos(πρt/Ts ) . πt Ts (6. 6.26) 6. f0 πt sin( Ts ) z(t).7: Raised Cosine Pulse. As ρ increases roll off in frequency domain increases but that in time domain decreases.

Non-Nyquist pulse shaping are also useful. In this method.com .www. it is a nonlinear modulation technique. 6. the amplitude of the carrier wave is kept constant (this is why FM is called constant envelope).8. However. 6. FM is thus part of a more general class of modulation known as angle modulation.Unlike AM. Frequency modulation (FM) involves changing of the frequency of the carrier signal according to message signal.jntuworld. 3.com using a look up table that represents discrete time waveforms of stored symbols. in an 114 www.jntuworld. Frequency modulated signals have better noise immunity and give better performance in fading scenario as compared to amplitude modulation.regardless of the variations in the modulating signal. This is the way to realize the pulse shaping filters using real time processors.where the amplitude of the carrier is constant.The Constant envelope family of modulations has the following advantages : 1. even if constant envelope has many advantages it still uses more BW than linear modulation schemes. the two most important classes of angle modulation being frequency modulation and phase modulation. As the information in frequency modulation is in the frequency of modulated signal. which would be discussed later in this chapter while discussing GMSK. Limiter-discriminator detection can be used.8 Nonlinear Modulation Techniques Many practical mobile radio communications use nonlinear modulation methods. Power efficient class C amplifiers without introducing degradation in the spectral occupancy of the transmitted signal. Low out-of-band radiation of the order of -60 dB to -70dB can be achieved.1 Angle Modulation (FM and PM) There are a number of ways in which the phase of a carrier signal may be varied in accordance with the baseband signal.which simplifies receiver design and provides high immunity against random FM noise and signal fluctuations due to Rayleigh fading. 2.

fc is the carrier frequency. however. sP M (t) = Ac cos(2πfc t + kθ m(t)) (6. Although frequency modulation systems are tolerant to certain types of signal and circuit nonlinearities. AM signals are able to occupy less bandwidth as compared to FM signals. The constant envelope of the transmitted signal allows efficient Class C power amplifiers to be used for RF power amplification of FM.www. can be varied to obtain greater signal to noise performance. special attention must be given to phase characteristics. and hence bandwidth occupancy.32) www. is the amplitude of the carrier. defines the relationship between the message amplitude and the bandwidth of the transmitted signal. since the transmission system is linear. and is given by βf = kf Am ∆ = W W 115 (6. An FM signal is a constant envelope signal. it is critical to maintain linearity between the applied message and the amplitude of the transmitted signal. However. and kf is the frequency deviation constant (measured in units of Hz/V). due to the fact that the envelope of the carrier does not change with changes in the modulating signal. FM systems require a wider frequency band in the transmitting media (generally several times as large as that needed for AM) in order to obtain the advantages of reduced noise and capture effect. Phase modulation (PM) is a form of angle modulation in which the angle θ(t) of the carrier signal is varied linearly with the baseband message signal m(t).31) The frequency modulation index βf . as shown in equation below.30) where Ac . AM is easily demodulated using an envelope detector whereas FM is demodulated using a discriminator or slope detector. Both AM and FM may be demodulated using inexpensive noncoherent detectors. In FM the instantaneous frequency of the carrier signal is varied linearly with the baseband message signal m(t).com FM system. which are not as power efficient. as shown in following equation: sF M (t) = Ac cos[2πfc t + θ(t)] = Ac cos[2πfc t + 2πkf m(η)dη] (6. In AM. the modulation index.com .jntuworld. must be used.This ability of an FM system to trade bandwidth for SNR is perhaps the most important reason for its superiority over AM.jntuworld. FM transmitter and receiver equipment is also more complex than that used by amplitude modulation systems. thus linear Class A or AB amplifiers.

(6. Si = φ(t) = (Eb )φ(t). S1 (t) = S2 (t) = (2Eb /T ) cos(2πf1 t + θ(0)) (2Eb /T ) cos(2πf2 t + θ(0)) →1 →0 (6. There are two FSK signals to represent 1 and 0. Let us now consider a continuous phase FSK as S(t) = (2Eb /T ) cos(2πfc t + θ(t)).36) (2/T ) cos(2πfi t).e.40) 116 www.37) (6. In general. i.8.the frequency of constant amplitude carrier signal is switched between two values according to the two possible message states (called high and low tones) corresponding to a binary 1 or 0.33) 6.34) where T is the symbol duration and Eb is the energy per bit. (6.com .com where Am is the peak value of the modulating signal. (6.2 BFSK In Binary Frequency Shift keying (BFSK). we get θ(t) = θ(0) ± πht/T 0≤t≤T (6. an FSK signal may be represented as S(t) = (2Eb /T ) cos(2πfi t).www.35) (6.jntuworld.the FSK signal will have either a discontinuous phase or continuous phase between bits. (6.39) Expressing θ(t) in terms of θ(0) with a new unknown factor h.38) where θ(0) sums the phase up to t = 0. Depending on how the frequency variations are imparted into the transmitted waveform. The phase modulation index βp is given by βp = kθ Am = ∆θ where.jntuworld. ∆f is the peak frequency deviation of the transmitter and W is the maximum bandwidth of the modulating signal. ∆θ is the peak phase deviation of the transmitter..

43) for which the expression of FSK conforms to that of CPFSK. In Figure 6.41) T It shows that we can choose two frequencies f1 and f2 such that f1 = fc + h/2T f2 = fc − h/2T (6.45) Therefore. fc and h can be expressed in terms of f1 and f2 as fc = [f1 + f2 ]/2 h= (f1 − f2 ) . 0 ≤ t ≤ T .9 from which it is clear that ACI is present in the spectrum. We know that θ(t) − θ(0) = ±πht/T . 1/T (6. Spectral characteristics of an MSK signal is shown in Figure 6. A special case of CPFSK is achieved with h = 0. An MSK signal can also be thought as a special case of OQPSK where the baseband rectangular pulses are replaced by half sinusoidal pulses. we show a phase tree of such a CPFSK signal with the transmitted bit stream of 1101000.47) (6.5. If we substitute t = T . the phase differences reduce to only ±π/2 and the phase tree is called the phase trellis. we have θ(T ) − θ(0) = ±πh = πh = −πh where →1 →0 (6.com .jntuworld. we use a pulse shaping filter with 117 www.jntuworld. and the resulting scheme is called Minimum Shift Keying (MSK) which is used in mobile communications.8.44) (6.com and therefore S(t) = 2Eb cos(2πfc t ± πht/T + θ(0)) = T 2Eb cos(2π(fc ± h/2T )t + θ(0)). the unknown factor h can be treated as the difference between f1 and f2 .(6. On the other hand. In this case. the transmitted bit can be predicted. It is called the deviation ratio. In order to have a compact signal spectrum as well as maintaining the constant envelope property.42) (6.46) (6. Hence a pulse shaping technique is required. normalized with respect to bit rate 1/T .www.48) This type of CPFSK is advantageous since by looking only at the phase.

8: Phase tree of 1101000 CPFSK sequence. a narrow BW frequency and sharp cutoff characteristics (in order to suppress the high frequency component of the signal). In GMSK.com . Figure 6. 2. 3.jntuworld. 6. a phase trellis with ±π/2 for odd T and 0 or π values for even T.com Figure 6. an impulse response with relatively low overshoot (to limit FM instant frequency deviation.jntuworld.www.9 GMSK Scheme GMSK is a simple modulation scheme that may be taken as a derivative of MSK. the sidelobe levels of the spectrum are further reduced by passing a non- 118 www.9: Spectrum of MSK 1.

jntuworld. A GMSK generation scheme with NRZ-L data is shown in Figure 6.com Figure 6. Spectrum of GMSK scheme is shown in Figure 6.10 GMSK Generator The GMSK premodulation filter has characteristic equation given by H(f ) = exp(−(ln 2/2)(f /B)2 ) H(f ) = exp(−(αf )2 ) where.12. This has the effect of considerably reducing the sidelobes in the transmitted spectrum.49) The premodulation Gaussian filtering introduces ISI in the transmitted signal. the out of band response decreases but 119 www.50) (6. it is evident that when we are decreasing BT product.11.10: GMSK generation scheme.www.com . 6.10 and a receiver of the same scheme with some MSI gates is shown in Figure 6.5. but it can be shown that the degradation is not that great if the 3dB bandwidth-bit duration product (BT) is greater than 0. From this figure.jntuworld. (6. return to zero (NRZ-L) data waveform through a premodulation Gaussian pulse shaping filter. (α)2 = ln 2/2(1/B)2 . Baseband Gaussian pulse shaping smoothes the trajectory of the MSK signals and hence stabilizes instantaneous frequency variations over time.

52) (6.567kHz (6. We use below table fig 6 to find out that 90 % power bandwidth is 0.com .57 Rb . B = 0. Therefore.57Rb = 153.51) Thus the 3 .25 GMSK with a channel data rate Rb=270 kbps. a compromise between these two is required.www.7µsec Solving for B where BT = 0. 90 % RF BW = 0.25/T = 67.com Figure 6.dB bandwidth is 67. on the other hand irreducible error rate of the LPF for ISI increases.11: A simple GMSK receiver.jntuworld.25.567 kHz.9 kHz.jntuworld. 120 www. Problem: Find the 3dB BW for a Gaussian LPF used to produce 0.What is the 90 percent power BW of the RF filter? Solution: From the problem statement it is clear that T = 1/Rb = 1/270 ∗ (103 ) = 3.

11. the received signal levels in the two frequency slots will differ greatly.com Figure 6. when there is significant amount of power present in the side lobes. This is because of the fact that transmission of a time limited pulse leads to spectral spreading in the frequency domain. During simultaneous use of adjacent channels. 121 www.1 Two Practical Issues of Concern Inter Channel Interference In FDMA. 6.www.11 6. Moreover if two terminals transmit equal power then due to wave propagation through different distances to the receiver. The side lobes generated due to the transmission of a symbol in a particular channel overlaps with the channels placed adjacently.12: Spectrum of GMSK scheme.com . subscribers are allotted frequency slots called channels in a given band of the electromagnetic spectrum. In such a case the side lobes of the stronger signal will severely degrade the transmitted signal in the next frequency slot having low power level.jntuworld. this kind of interference becomes so severe that the required symbol in a particular frequency slot is completely lost.jntuworld. This is known as the near far problem.

Thus the amplitude of a signal applied at the input of an amplifier suffers from amplitude distortion and the resulting waveform obtained at the output of the amplifier is of the form of an amplitude modulated signal.53) Output back − of f = 10 log1 0 (6. class C and class D. They form an essential section of mobile radio terminals. The operating point of a practical amplifier is given in terms of either the input back-off or the output back-off.jntuworld.www.57) where γ is given by.11.com 6. Input back − of f = 10 log1 0 Vin.12 Receiver performance in multipath channels For a flat fading channel. However.jntuworld. In general. an amplifier has linear input output characteristics over a range of input signal level.com .58) www. class AB.2 Power Amplifier Nonlinearity Power amplifiers may be designed as class A.rms Vout. an efficient power amplifier is required which can convert most of the input power to RF power.BF SK 1 1− 2 1 = 1− 2 γ 1+γ γ 2+γ (6.54) 6. the probability of error for coherent BPSK and coherent BFSK are respectively given as. Class A amplifier is a linear amplifier but it has a power efficiency of only 25 %. class B.BP SK = Pe. the nonlinearity of the amplifier increases. that is.rms Vout. Similarly. the phase characteristic of a practical amplifier is not constant over all input levels and results in phase distortion of the form of phase modulation. Pe.55) (6. Due to power constraints on a transmitting terminal.rms (6. As we go for subsequent amplifiers having greater power efficiency. the gain of the amplifier starts decreasing. it has a constant gain. beyond an input threshold level. γ= Eb E(α2 ) N0 122 (6.56) (6.rms Vout.

Similarly.com . = (2 + γ) (6.59) (6. then the SNR range must be around 30dB to 60dB. In order to 123 www.jntuworld. This implies that if the required BER range is around 10−3 to 10−6 .60) the error probability given above have the simplified From the above equations we observe that an inverse algebraic relation exists between the BER and SNR.com α2 represents the instantaneous power values of the Rayleigh fading channel and E denotes the expectation operator.64) Eb N0 1 2(1 + γ) 1 . where N bits are mapped to a one of the M symbols.66) 6. 1 4γ 1 Pe.DP SK = 2γ 1 Pe. such that 2N = M . For an MPSK scheme employing gray coded modulation.12.61) (6.DP SK = Pe.13 Example of a Multicarrier Modulation: OFDM Multiplexing is an important signal processing operation in which a number of signals are combined and transmitted parallelly over a common channel. Peb is given by Peb ≈ Pes log2 M (6.1 Bit Error Rate and Symbol Error Rate Bit error rate (Peb ) is the same as symbol error rate (Pes ) when a symbol consists of a single bit as in BPSK modulation.jntuworld. γ Pe. for differential BPSK and non coherent BFSK probability of error expressions are Pe. 6.62) (6.65) And for M-ary orthogonal signalling Peb is given by Peb = M/2 Pes .BF SK = 2γ 1 Pe.www. M −1 (6.N CF SK = .63) (6.BP SK = (6.N CF SK For large values of SN R = expression.

For high data rate communication the bandwidth (which is limited) requirement goes on increasing as the data rate increases or the symbol duration decreases. OFDM is a technique of transmitting high bit rate data into several parallel streams of low bit rate data. 124 www.11(a) or HiperLan2. say P. In FDM. Vector OFDM (V-OFDM). the adjacent bands are non overlapping but if overlap is allowed by transmitting signals that are mutually orthogonal (that is. there is a precise mathematical relationship between the frequencies of the transmitted signals) such that one signal has zero effect on another. high definition digital television broadcasting (HDTV). this is no longer a major problem. the significance of the COFDM technique for UWA (underwater acoustic channel) has also been indicated. Very recently. Although the use of OFDM was initially limited to military applications due to cost and complexity considerations.www.jntuworld.com avoid interference during parallel transmission. wide-band OFDM (W-OFDM). This offers many advantages in digital data transmission through a wireless time varying channel. the signals can be separated in frequency and then the resulting technique is called Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM). delay spread of the channel.s. then the resulting transmission technique is known as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). Thus in OFDM. asymmetric digital subscriber lines (ADSL) and mobile communications. the P symbols can be sent in parallel with symbol duration now increased to T seconds instead of T/P seconds as was previously.com . instead of sending a particular number of symbols. MIMO-OFDM.m.jntuworld. This technique is being used. The primary advantage of increasing the symbol duration is that the channel experiences flat fading instead of frequency selective fading since it is ensured that in the time domain the symbol duration is greater than the r. in digital audio broadcasting (DAB). Viewed in the frequency domain this implies that the bandwidth of the OFDM signal is less than coherent bandwidth of the channel. digital video broadcasting terrestrial TV (DVB-T). WLAN systems based on IEEE 802. in T seconds serially. TDMA-OFDM. flash OFDM (F-OFDM). Moreover related or combined technology such as CDMA-OFDM. At any instant. the data transmitted simultaneously in each of these parallel data streams is frequency modulated by carriers (called subcarriers) which are orthogonal to each other. with the recent advances in large-scale highspeed DSP.

com OFDMA. Let ψk (t) = ej2πfk t and ψn (t) = ej2πfn t be two complex exponential signals whose inner product.2 Mathematical Description of OFDM Let us now consider the simultaneous or parallel transmission of P number of complex symbols in the time slot of Ts second (OFDM symbol time duration) and a set of P orthogonal subcarriers. such that each subcarrier gets amplitude modulated by a particular symbol from this set of P symbols. 6. thereby yielding the following equation: P −1 p(t) = n=0 cn gn (t)exp j2πn t Ts f or 0 ≤ t ≤ Ts (6.jntuworld. Here the variable ‘n’ denotes the nth parallel path corresponding to the nth subcarrier.com .. Mathematically. wavelet-OFDM have presented their great advantages in certain application areas.1 Orthogonality of Signals Orthogonal signals can be viewed in the same perspective as we view vectors which are perpendicular/orthogonal to each other. where n varies as 0.www.67) When this integral is evaluated. over the time duration of Ts .68) 125 www. the inner product becomes zero . it is found that if fk and fn are integer multiples of 1/Ts then N equals zero. Similarly the inner product of two orthogonal signals is also equal to zero.jntuworld.13. is given by: (i+1)Ts ∗ ψk (t). 6.ψn (t)dt N= iTs (6.But if fk = fn then N equals Ts which is nothing but the energy of the complex exponential signal in the time duration of Ts . 2.13. This implies that for two harmonics of an exponential function having a fundamental frequency of 1/Ts . we can obtain the transmitted signal in Ts seconds by summing up all the P number of amplitude modulated subcarriers.(P − 1). 1. The inner product of two mutually orthogonal vectors is equal to zero. Let each orthogonal carrier be of the form exp j2πn Tts .

IFFTs and FFTs can be implemented easily. So at the receiver. If we denote the guard time interval as Tg and Ts be the useful symbol duration. This is due to the fact that the Fourier Transform of a rectangular pulse is a sinc function. then integrating the resulting signal over a symbol period to recover the raw data. This can be realized using IFFT but the constraint is that P has to be a power of 2. then the resulting waveform. The receiver can be visualized as consisting of a bank of demodulators. A different approach is to keep a guard time interval between two OFDM symbols in which part of the symbol is copied from the end of the symbol to the front and is popularly known as the cyclic-prefix.com . The OFDM transmitter and receiver 126 www. then after this cyclical extension the total symbol duration becomes T = Tg + Ts .jntuworld.www. But the OFDM symbol structure so generated at the transmitter end needs to be modified. But this might not be feasible from the implementation point of view specifically in terms of FFT size and Doppler shifts. The frequency spectrum. When the guard interval is longer than the length of the channel impulse response. FFT can be done to get back the required block of symbols. is: P −1 p(k) = n=0 cn gn (kTs /P )exp j2πn 1 √ Ts P −1 kTs /P Ts f or 0 ≤ k ≤ P − 1 (6. In order to cope with ISI as discussed previously the OFDM symbol duration can be increased. This implementation is better than using multiple oscillators for subcarrier generation which is uneconomical and since digital technology has greatly advanced over the past few decades.69) = cn exp j2πn n=0 k P This is nothing but the IDFT on the symbol block of P symbols. However the disadvantage is the reduction in data rate or throughput and greater power requirements at the transmitting end. or the multipath delay. therefore consists of a set of P partially overlapping sinc pulses during any time slot of duration Ts .com If p(t) is sampled at t = kTs /P . its effect in the time domain is to cause symbol spreading such that a part of the symbol overlaps with the adjacent symbols.jntuworld. translating each subcarrier down to DC. then ISI can be eliminated. Since inter symbol interference (ISI) is introduced by the transmission channel due to multipaths and also due to the fact that when the bandwidth of OFDM signal is truncated.

The important modulation techniques for wireless communication such as QPSK. MSK. These techniques are discussed in the next chapter. 127 www. Certain practical issues of concern are also discussed. sections are as given in the following diagram. OFDM.13: OFDM Transmitter and Receiver Block Diagram. In order to prevent that. GMSK were taken up at length. we need some additional signal processing techniques mainly at the receiver side. a major chunk has been devoted to digital communication systems which obviously have certain distinction in comparison to their analog counterpart due to their signal-space representation.www. It should be noted that albeit implementing these efficient modulation techniques. 6. the channel still introduces fading in different ways. has also been discussed.jntuworld.14 Conclusion In this chapter.jntuworld.com . A relatively new modulation technology.com Figure 6.

Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice. Proakis and M. Inc. R. Singapore: Pearson Education. Inc. S..com . Modern Wireless Communications. Ding. S. 2002.. W.. 2009.. 2nd ed.com 6. Moher.jntuworld.jntuworld. Inc. Rappaport.www. 4th ed.. Singapore: Pearson Education. J. Blake. 128 www. 2002. Singapore: Pearson Education. Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems. 5. Principles of Communication Systems Simulation. G. 6. 2002. 2nd ed. Singapore: Pearson Education. NY: Oxford University Press. 2005. B.15 References 1. Inc. Inc. Singapore: Thomson Asia Pvt Ltd. Lathi and Z. 2nd ed. H. P. Communication Systems Engineering. Electronic Communication Systems. 2002. 2. Haykin and M. B. 7. al.. 3. Singapore: Pearson Education. Delmar. Tranter et. Sklar. Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications. 4. Salehi. 2004. T.

a channel coder maps a digital message sequence in to another specific code sequence containing greater number of bits than original contained in the message.At the baseband portion of the transmitter.1. It is usually employed to reduce the depths and duration of the fades experienced by a receiver in a flat fading channel. An equalizer within a receiver compensates for the average range of expected channel amplitude and delay characteristics. In other words. Equalization compensates for Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) created by multipath within time dispersive channels. 129 www.com Chapter 7 Techniques to Mitigate Fading Effects 7. We discuss all three of these techniques in this chapter. Diversity is another technique used to compensate fast fading and is usually implemented using two or more receiving antennas. A general framework of the fading effects and their mitigation techniques is shown in Figure 7. Diversity and channel coding are channel impairment improvement techniques.jntuworld. Channel coding improves mobile communication link performance by adding redundant data bits in the transmitted message. an equalizer is a filter at the mobile receiver whose impulse response is inverse of the channel impulse response. Channel Coding is used to correct deep fading or spectral null. mobile communications require signal processing techniques that improve the link performance. Equalization.com .jntuworld.1 Introduction Apart from the better transmitter and receiver technology. As such equalizers find their use in frequency selective fading channels.www.

.www.jntuworld. These are as follows.1: A general framework of fading effects and their mitigation techniques. • The training sequence is designed to permit an equalizer at the receiver to acquire the proper filter coefficient in the worst possible channel condition. of prescribed bit pattern.e. An equalizer at the front end of a receiver compensates for the average range of expected channel amplitude and delay characteristics.com . equalizers must track the time-varying characteristics of the mobile channel and therefore should be timevarying or adaptive. causing ISI. Training Mode: • Initially a known. An adaptive filter at the receiver thus uses a recursive algorithm to evaluate 130 www. fixed length training sequence is sent by the transmitter so that the receiver equalizer may average to a proper setting.jntuworld. As the mobile fading channels are random and time varying.2 Equalization ISI has been identified as one of the major obstacles to high speed data transmission over mobile radio channels. frequency selective fading). • Training sequence is typically a pseudo-random binary signal or a fixed. An adaptive equalizer has two phases of operation: training and tracking. 7. If the modulation bandwidth exceeds the coherence bandwidth of the radio channel (i.com Figure 7. modulation pulses are spread in time.

the equalizer enhances the frequency components with small amplitudes and attenuates the strong frequencies in the received frequency 131 www. h(t) is the combined impulse response of the transmitter. user data is sent. • When the data of the users are received. the adaptive equalizer continuously changes the filter characteristics over time.2) However.com .3) The main goal of any equalization process is to satisfy this equation optimally.1 A Mathematical Framework The signal received by the equalizer is given by x(t) = d(t) ∗ h (t) + nb (t) (7. 7.jntuworld.2.channel and the RF/IF section of the receiver and nb (t) denotes the baseband noise. If the channel is frequency selective. Tracking Mode: • When the training sequence is finished the filter coefficients are near optimal. the output of the equalizer is y (t) = d (t) ∗ h (t) ∗ heq (t) + nb (t) ∗ heq (t) = d (t) ∗ g (t) + nb (t) ∗ heq (t) .com the channel and estimate filter coefficients to compensate for the channel. • As a result. the desired output of the equalizer is d(t) which is the original source data.4) which indicates that an equalizer is actually an inverse filter of the channel. the adaptive algorithms of the equalizer tracks the changing channel. which in turn stems the following equation: g (t) = h (t) ∗ heq (t) = δ (t) (7. If the impulse response of the equalizer is heq (t). • Immediately following the training sequence. Assuming nb (t)=0.1) where d(t) is the transmitted signal. In frequency domain it can be written as Heq (f ) H (f ) = 1 (7.www. ˆ (7.jntuworld. we can write y(t) = d(t).

called weights. an infinite length zero-forcing ISI equalizer is simply an inverse filter which inverts the folded frequency response of the channel. |f | < 1/2T (7. When each of the delay elements provide a time delay equal to the symbol duration T. The adaptive algorithm uses ek to minimize the cost function and uses the equalizer weights in such a manner that it minimizes the cost function iteratively. Disadvantage: Since Heq (f ) is inverse of Hch (f ) so inverse filter may excessively amplify the noise at frequencies where the folded channel spectrum has high attenuation. This filter is called the transversal filter. These weights are updated continuously by an adaptive algorithm. the equalizer is designed to track the channel variations so that the above equation is approximately satisfied.jntuworld.jntuworld.www. Let us denote the received sequence vector at the receiver and 132 www. so it is rarely used for wireless link except for static channels with high SNR such as local wired telephone.3 A Generic Adaptive Equalizer The basic structure of an adaptive filter is shown in Figure 7. 7.2.com .2 Zero Forcing Equalization In a zero forcing equalizer.2. In the figure the subscript k represents discrete time index.com spectrum in order to provide a flat.5) where Hch (f ) is the folded frequency response of the channel. The usual equalizer model follows a time varying or adaptive structure which is given next. For a time varying channel. The error signal is derived by comparing the output of the equalizer. the equalizer coefficients cn are chosen to force the samples of the combined channel and equalizer impulse response to zero. and in this case has N delay elements. The combined response of the channel with the equalizer must satisfy Nyquist’s criterion Hch (f ) Heq (f ) = 1. with some signal dk which is replica of transmitted signal. N+1 taps and N+1 tunable complex multipliers. Thus. the frequency response Heq (f ) of the equalizer is periodic with a period equal to the symbol rate 1/T. The adaptive algorithm is controlled by the error signal ek . 7.2. composite received frequency response and linear phase response.

. the output sequence of the equalizer yk is the inner product of xk and wk . k (7.. wk = xT wk = wk xk .com ...jntuworld. xk−N ]T .. .e.10) 133 www..8) The error signal is defined as ek = dk − yk = dk − xT wk .. i.9) Assuming dk and xk to be jointly stationary.2: A generic adaptive equalizer..6) (7..www.7) Now. wk . k (7. (7. the input to the equalizer as xk = [xk .. and the tap coefficient vector as 0 1 N wk = [wk .com Figure 7.. xk−1 . wk ]T . the Mean Square Error (MSE) is given as M SE = E[e2 ] = E[(dk − yk )2 ] k = E[(dk − xT wk )2 ] k T = E[d2 ] + wk E[xk xT ]wk − 2E[dk xT ]wk k k k (7.jntuworld. T yk = xk . .

On equating to 0.4 Choice of Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization Since an adaptive equalizer compensates for an unknown and time varying channel.14) (7. A fast rate of convergence allows the algorithm to adapt rapidly to a stationary environment of unknown statistics.13)   . where     x  k−1 xk   T R = E xk xk = E  xk−2 xk   . MMSE is given by the equation 2 M M SE = ξmin = σd − pT wk . Factors which determine algorithm’s performance are: Rate of convergence: Number of iterations required for an algorithm. in response to a stationary inputs.15) 7. . The MSE then can be expressed as 2 T M SE = ξ = σk + wk Rwk − 2pT wk (7. Hence.com where wk is assumed to be an array of optimum values and therefore it has been taken out of the E() operator. xk xk−2 xk−1 xk−2 x2 k−2 .2.jntuworld. Misadjustment: Provides a quantitative measure of the amount by which the final value of mean square error.  .12) The input correlation matrix R is defined as an (N + 1) × (N + 1) square matrix. ··· ··· ··· ··· xk xk−N xk−N xk xk−N xk−1 xk−N xk−2 · · · ∂ξ ∂wk   xk−1 xk−N     xk−2 xk−N  . . .www. (7. it requires a specific algorithm to update the equalizer coefficients and track the channel variations. averaged over an ensemble of adaptive filters. 134 www. . (7.    x2 k xk xk−1 x2 k−1 xk−2 xk−1 . we get the condition for minimum MSE (MMSE) which is known as Wiener solution: wk = R−1 p.11) 2 where the signal variance σd = E[d2 ] and the cross correlation vector p between the k desired response and the input signal is defined as p = E [dk xk ] = E dk xk dk xk−1 dk xk−2 · · · dk xk−N .  . to converge close enough to optimal solution. . (7. .com .   x2 k−N Clearly. deviates from an optimal mean square error.jntuworld. MSE is a function of wk .

LMS is computed iteratively by wk (n + 1) = wk (n) + µek (n) x (n − k) (7. the MSE and the optimal Wiener solution remain the same as given the adaptive equalization framework.jntuworld. Least Mean Square (LMS) Algorithm LMS algorithm is the simplest algorithm based on minimization of the MSE between the desired equalizer output and the actual equalizer output. Here the system error. It is the simplest equalization algorithm and requires only 2N+1 operations per iteration. These include the Zero Forcing Algorithm (ZF). Letting the variable n denote the sequence of iteration. that controls the adaptation rate.16) where the subscript k denotes the kth delay stage in the equalizer and µ is the step size which controls the convergence rate and stability of the algorithm. Numerical properties: Inaccuracies like round-off noise and representation errors in the computer. The filter weights are updated by the update equation.jntuworld.com Computational complexity: Number of operations required to make one complete iteration of the algorithm.17) where λi is the i-th eigenvalue of the covariance matrix R. we discuss a few of the adaptive algorithms. The convergence rate of the LMS algorithm is slow due to the fact that there is only one parameter. which influence the stability of the algorithm. the minimization of the MSE is carried out recursively. If an input signal has a time dispersion characteristics that is greater than the propagation delay through the equalizer. Below.www.com . the step size. the value of µ is chosen from N 0<µ<2 i=1 λi (7. Three classic equalizer algorithms are primitive for most of today’s wireless standards. 135 www. and the Recursive Least Square Algorithm (RLS). The LMS equalizer maximizes the signal to distortion ratio at its output within the constraints of the equalizer filter length. In practice. To prevent the adaptation from becoming unstable. then the equalizer will be unable to reduce distortion. and may be performed by use of the stochastic gradient algorithm. as discussed earlier. the Least Mean Square Algorithm (LMS).

the denominator term x (n) in the NLMS equation becomes very small and the correction factor may diverge. Usually diversity decisions are made by receiver. It is a very simple concept where if one path undergoes a deep fade.3 Diversity Diversity is a method used to develop information from several signals transmitted over independent fading paths. another independent path may have a strong signal.www. Hence receivers in diversity technique are used in such a way that the signal received by one is independent of the other. We take up the types one by one in the sequel. 136 www. the correction that is applied to wk (n) is proportional to the input sample x (n − k). Diversity can be of various forms.jntuworld. both the instantaneous and average SNRs at the receiver may be improved. the step size is time varying and is expressed as µ (n) = β . Here. It exploits the random nature of radio propagation by finding independent signal paths for communication. Only when 2 x(n−k) becomes close to zero. there might occur a destructive interference between the two signals.18) Therefore.com Normalized LMS (NLMS) Algorithm In the LMS algorithm. With the normalization of the LMS step size by x (n) 2 in the NLMS algorithm.com . Therefore when x (n − k) is large. this problem is eliminated. x (n) 2 + ε (7. Note that if the distance between two receivers is a multiple of λ/2. x (n) 2 + ε (7. the LMS algorithm experiences gradient noise amplification. a small positive number ε is added to the denominator term of the correction factor. Unlike equalization. So. the NLMS algorithm update equation takes the form of wk (n + 1) = wk (n) + β ek (n) x (n − k) .jntuworld. starting from space diversity to time diversity. As there is more than one path to select from. diversity requires no training overhead as a training sequence is not required by transmitter.19) 7.

feedback or scanning.jntuworld.jntuworld.www. Space diversity reception methods can be classified into four categories: selection.1 Different Types of Diversity Space Diversity A method of transmission or reception. ideally separated by one half or more wavelengths. Figure 7. or both. Signals received from spatially separated antennas have uncorrelated envelopes. 7.3 shows a block diagram of this method where ’M’ demodulators are used to provide M diversity branches whose gains are adjusted to provide the same average SNR for each branch.com . in which the effects of fading are minimized by the simultaneous use of two or more physically separated antennas.3. (a) Selection Diversity: The basic principle of this type of diversity is selecting the best signal among all the signals received from different branches at the receiving end. Each channel is called a diversity branch and let each branch has the same average SNR. The signal to noise ratio is defined as SN R = Γ = 137 Eb 2 α N0 (7. with M receivers. Selection Diversity is the simplest diversity technique. The receiver branches having the highest instantaneous SNR is connected to the demodulator.com Figure 7. Let M independent Rayleigh fading channels are available at a receiver. maximal ratio combining and equal gain combining.3: Receiver selection diversity.20) www.

we first find out the pdf of γ as pM (γ) = γ M d PM (γ) = 1 − e− /Γ dγ Γ M −1 γ e− /Γ . α has a Rayleigh distribution and so α2 and consequently γi have a chi-square distribution with two degrees of freedom.26) where x = γ/Γ and Γ is the average SNR for a single branch. can be then expressed as ¯ ∞ ∞ M −1 γ= ¯ 0 γpM (γ) dγ = Γ 0 M x 1 − e−x e−x dx (7. the probability that all M independent diversity branches receive signals which are simultaneously less than some specific SNR threshold γ is Pr [γ1 .25) The average SNR. The instantaneous SNR(γi ) is usually defined as γi = instantaneous signal power per branch/mean noise power per branch. . γ . γ2 . Γ (7. The probability density function for such a channel is p (γi ) = 1 −γi e Γ . .com . Γ (7. . N0 is the noise PSD. then the probability that SNR > γ for one or more branches is given by Pr [γi > γ] = 1 − PM (γ) = 1 − 1 − e −γ Γ M (7. Quite clearly.jntuworld. PM (Γ) < P (Γ).23) where PM (γ) is the probability of all branches failing to achieve an instantaneous SNR = γ. γM ≤ γ] = 1 − e −γ Γ M = PM (γ) (7. . For Rayleigh fading channels. α is a random variable used to represent amplitude values of the fading channel.22) Similarly.www.jntuworld. 138 www. when no diversity is used. To determine of average signal to noise ratio.21) The probability that any single branch has an instantaneous SNR less than some defined threshold γ is γ γ Pr [γi ≤ γ] = 0 p (γi ) dγi = 0 −γ 1 −γi e Γ dγi = 1 − e Γ = P (Γ). If a single branch achieves SNR > γ.com where Eb is the average carrier energy. (7. This expression shows the advantage when a selection diversity is used.24) which is more than the required SNR for a single branch receiver.

jntuworld. Feedback or scanning diversity is very similar to selection diversity except that instead of always using the best of N signals. the N signals are scanned in a fixed sequence until one is found to be above a predetermined threshold. which generally requires an individual receiver and phasing circuit for each antenna element. Assuming all the Gi to be 139 www. but the signals from each branch are co-phased to provide equal gain combining diversity. Performance of this method is marginally inferior to maximal ratio combining and superior to Selection diversity.jntuworld. The resulting fading statistics are somewhat inferior. (b) Feedback or Scanning Diversity: Scanning all the signals in a fixed sequence until the one with SNR more than a predetermined threshold is identified.27) where Gi is the gain and ri is the voltage signal from each branch.www. In terms of voltage signal.com This equation shows an average improvement in the link margin without requiring extra transmitter power or complex circuitry. It allows the receiver to exploit signals that are simultaneously received on each branch. Produces an output SNR equal to the sum of all individual SNR. as it gives the best statistical reduction of fading of any known linear diversity combiner. rm = i=1 m Gi ri (7. the branch weights are all set unity. Individual signals must be cophased before being summed. In such cases.com . (d) Equal Gain Combining: In some cases it is not convenient to provide for the variable weighting capability required for true maximal ratio combining. Advantage of producing an output with an acceptable SNR even when none of the individual signals are themselves acceptable. and it is easy to implement as it needed a monitoring station and an antenna switch at the receiver. Modern DSP techniques and digital receivers are now making this optimal form. It is not an optimal diversity technique as it doesn’t use all the possible branches simultaneously. (c) Maximal Ratio Combining: Signals from all of the m branches are weighted according to their individual signal voltage to noise power ratios and then summed. This signal is then received until it falls below threshold and the scanning process is again initiated. but the advantage is that it is very simple to implement(only one receiver is required).

horizontal/vertical. (7. rm = i=1 m ri . Reflected signals can undergo polarization changes depending on the channel. Polarization diversity combines pairs of antennas with orthogonal polarizations (i. unity.jntuworld.jntuworld. Pairing two complementary polarizations. here. The two receiver ports must remain cross-polarized.com Figure 7.com . Polarization diversity has prove valuable at radio and mobile com- 140 www.4: Maximal ratio combining technique.www. ± slant 45o .e. Left-hand/Right-hand CP etc).28) Polarization Diversity Polarization Diversity relies on the decorrelation of the two receive ports to achieve diversity gain. this scheme can immunize a system from polarization mismatches that would otherwise cause signal fade. Polarization Diversity at a base station does not require antenna spacing.

www.com . Application 1: RAKE Receiver In CDMA spread spectrum systems. RAKE 141 www. where the multipath channel provides redundancy in the transmitted message. Two important types of time diversity application is discussed below. Time Diversity In time diversity. CDMA receiver may combine the time delayed versions of the original signal to improve the signal to noise ratio at the receiver.com munication base stations since it is less susceptible to the near random orientations of transmitting antennas. Time diversity repeatedly transmits information at time spacings that exceeds the coherence time of the channel. CDMA spreading codes are designed to provide very low correlation between successive chips.jntuworld. This method is employed in microwave LoS links which carry several channels in a frequency division multiplex mode (FDM). the signal representing the same information are sent over the same channel at different times. Disadvantage is that it requires spare bandwidth also as many receivers as there are channels used for the frequency diversity. Delaying multipath components by more than a chip duration.jntuworld. Frequency Diversity In Frequency Diversity. will appear like uncorrelated noise at a CDMA receiver. A modern implementation of time diversity involves the use of RAKE receiver for spread spectrum CDMA. Multiple repetition of the signal will be received with independent fading conditions. The probability of simultaneous fading will be the product of the individual fading probabilities. the same information signal is transmitted and received simultaneously on two or more independent fading carrier frequencies. Main disadvantage is that it requires spare bandwidth also as many receivers as there are channels used for the frequency diversity. Rationale behind this technique is that frequencies separated by more than the coherence bandwidth of the channel will be uncorrelated and will thus not experience the same fades. thereby providing for diversity. propagation delay spread in the radio channel provides multiple version of the transmitted signal at the receiver.

an interleaver of degree m consists of m rows. Interleaver can be of two forms. and interleaves nm bits at a time. source bits are placed into the interleaver by sequentially increasing the row number for each 142 www.5: RAKE receiver. Many speech coder produce several important bits in succession. Spreading source bits over time. Each row contains a word of source data having n bits.5. the important bits from a block of source data are not corrupted at the same time. and must be protected from errors. receiver collect the time shifted versions of the original signal by providing a separate correlation receiver for M strongest multipath components.jntuworld. Interleaver spread these bit out in time so that if there is a deep fade or noise burst. Application 2: Interleaver In the encoded data bits.com .www. a block structure or a convolutional structure.com Figure 7. Demodulation and bit decisions are based on the weighted output of the correlators. it becomes possible to make use of error control coding. A block interleaver formats the encoded data into a rectangular array of m rows and n columns. Schematic of a RAKE receiver is shown in Figure 7. Outputs of each correlator are weighted to provide a better estimate of the transmitted signal than provided by a single component. some source bits are more important than others.jntuworld.

Codes that used to detect errors. Shannon’s channel capacity formula is applicable to the AWGN channel and is given by: C = B log2 1 + S N = B log2 1 + P N0 B = B log2 1 + Eb Rb N0 B (7.4.com . 7.30) and the ratio C/B is denoted as bandwidth efficiency. Error correction codes can detect and correct errors.www. Shannon showed that by proper encoding of the information. and forming the columns. Equation (7. N0 is the single sided noise power density (W/Hz). The interleaved source data is then read out row-wise and transmitted over the channel. de-interleaver stores the received data by sequentially increasing the row number of each successive bit.4 Channel Coding In channel coding. Coded message is then modulated for transmission in the wireless channel. P is the received signal power (W). B is the channel bandwidth (Hz).jntuworld. Introduction of redundant bits increases the transmission bit rate and hence it increases the bandwidth requirement.29) can be normalized by the bandwidth B and is given as Eb Rb C = log2 1 + B N0 B (7. Convolutional interleavers are ideally suited for use with convolutional codes. A channel coder maps the transmitted message into another specific code sequence containing more bits.com successive bit.29) where C is the channel capacity (bit/s). 7. are error detection codes. Channel Coding is used by the receiver to detect or correct errors introduced by the channel. and then clocks out the data row-wise. which reduces the bandwidth efficiency of the link in high SNR conditions. errors induced by a noise channel can be reduced to any desired level without sacrificing the rate of information transfer. This has the effect of separating the original source bits by m bit periods. Eb is the average bit energy and Rb is transmission bit rate. At the receiver. the data may still be recovered at the receiver without the request of retransmission. but 143 www. one word at a time.jntuworld.1 Shannon’s Channel Capacity Theorem In 1948. redundant data bits are added in the transmitted message so that if an instantaneous fade occurs in the channel.

com . This leads to the following two inferences. introduction of redundant bits increase the transmitter rate and hence bandwidth requirement also increases. CDMA communication in 3G mobile phones). but it also decreases the BER. parity bits are added to blocks of message bits to make codewords or code blocks. Concatenated Code. Rc = k/n. A total of n−k redundant bits are added to the k information bits for the purpose of detecting and correcting errors. error free performance in not possible (for example.jntuworld. 1. 7. while decreasing the bandwidth efficiency. A channel coder operates on digital message (or source) data by encoding the source information into a code sequence for transmission through the channel. k information bits are encoded into n code bits.2 Block Codes Block codes are forward error correction (FEC) codes that enable a limited number of errors to be detected and corrected without retransmission. Parameters in Block Code (a) Code Rate (Rc ): As defined above. Block Code 2. Block codes can be used to improve the performance of a communications system when other means of improvement (such as increasing transmitter power or using a more sophisticated demodulator) are impractical.com provides excellent BER performance at low SNR values. (b) Code Distance (d): Distance between two codewords is the number of ele- 144 www.4. Corollary 1 : While dealing within maximum channel capacity. In block codes. The error correction and detection codes are classified into three groups based on their structure. The block code is referred to as an (n. Corollary 2 : If data redundancy is not introduced in a wideband noisy environment. In a block encoder.www. and the rate of the code is defined as Rc = k/n and is equal to the rate of information divided by the raw channel rate. k) code. Convolution Code 3.jntuworld.

. and n = 5. For a binary code. dmin = min {d (Ci . i. Cj ). For an (n. To encode a bit stream 1001010011 • First step is to break the sequence in groups of two bits. A linear code must contain the all-zero code word. the distance is known as ’Hamming distance’. Ex 1: The block code C = 00000. (c) Code Weight (w): Weight of a codeword is given by the number of nonzero elements in the codeword.com ments in which two codewords Ci and Cj differs denoted by d (Ci . 11110 10100 10100 00000 11001 Quite clearly. Cj )} = 2. the weight is basically the number of 1s in the codeword. If the code ’C’ consists of the set of codewords.www.. k) block code. Let α1 and α2 be any two elements selected from the alphabet. k = 2. Then the code is said to be linear if and only if α1 C1 + α2 C2 is also a code word. the first k bits are identical to the information bits. here. Cj )}. i. Properties of Block Codes (a) Linearity: Suppose Ci and Cj are two code words in an (n.com . For example weight of a code 101101 is 4. 10100. 10 01 01 00 11 • Next step is to replace each block by its corresponding codeword. 11001 can be used to represent two bit binary numbers as: • 00 – 00000 • 01 – 10100 • 10 – 11110 • 11 – 11001 Here number of codewords is 4. For example d(10110.e.jntuworld.e. then the minimum distance of the code is given by dmin = min {d (Ci . 11011) is 3. 145 www. If the code used is binary. 11110. (b) Systematic: A systematic code is one in which the parity bits are appended to the end of the information bits.jntuworld. k) code. and the remaining n − k bits of each code word are linear combinations of the k information bits.

The division algorithm states that for every pair of polynomials a(x) and b(x) in F(x). + pm xm (7. the remainder. a(b + c) = ab + ac 4.jntuworld. Depending upon the number of elements in it. The coefficient pm is called the leading coefficient. where deg r(x)¡deg b(x). then m is called the degree of the polynomial. for any three elements a.. the quotient.. 3. then [Cn−2 . C0 .a−1 = 1. 146 www. that is. For any a in F. C (set of all complex numbers) etc. Identity elements 0 and 1 must exist in F satisfying a + 0 = a and a.com (c) Cyclic: Cyclic codes are a subset of the class of linear codes which satisfy the following cyclic shift property: If C = [Cn−1 . In this context. For any a in F. there exists an additive inverse (−a) such that a + (−a) = 0. Cn−2 . a field is called either a finite or an infinite field.jntuworld. p1 . 6. 2. denoted as deg p(x). Let F be a finite set of elements on which two binary operations – addition (+) and multiplication (. pm are the elements of GF(q). The set of nonzero elements in F is a commutative group under multiplication. A field with a finite number of elements (say q) is called a ’Galois Field’ and is denoted by GF(q). there exists an multiplicative inverse a−1 such that a..31) where the symbol x is called the indeterminate and the coefficients p0 .. Cn−1 ]. there exists a unique pair of polynomials q(x).) are defined. A monic irreducible polynomial of degree at least one is called a prime polynomial. b. otherwise it is called irreducible.. all cyclic shifts of C are code words.com . called a polynomial. A finite field entity p(x). 5. . obtained by a cyclic shift of the elements of C. and r(x).. That is. The examples of infinite field include Q (set of all rational numbers). such that a(x) = q(x)b(x) + r(x).. C0 ] is a code word of a cyclic code. is also a code word... R (set of all real numbers). F is a commutative group under addition. is introduced to map all symbols (with several bits) to the element of the finite field. If pm is not equal to zero. A polynomial is a mathematical expression p (x) = p0 + p1 x + . Cn−3 . A polynomial p(x) in F(x) is said to be reducible if p(x)=a(x)b(x). Multiplication is distributive over addition..www. it is important to know about Finite Field or Galois Field. . .1 = a. The set F together with the two binary operations is called a field if the following conditions are satisfied: 1. and c in F.. A polynomial is called monic if its leading coefficient is unity.

2: Consider a (8.7) ASCII code with information codeword (0. p).34) where c(p) is a polynomial of degree less than n. . 147 www.k) cyclic code is a factor of pn + 1 and has the form g (p) = pn−k + gn−k−1 pn−k−1 + · · · + g1 p + 1. 0) and encoded with overall even parity pattern. 0. The parity bit may follow an even parity or an odd parity pattern. 1. bk . . 1) where the last bit is the parity bit. 1..com . + bk modulo 2 is appended at the (k+1)th position. Cyclic codes are a subset of the class of linear codes which satisfy the cyclic property. 1. A message polynomial x(p) can also be defined as x (p) = xk−1 pk−1 + · · · + x1 p + x0 (7. The resultant codeword c(p) can be written as c (p) = x (p) g (p) (7. such codes can only detect the error.jntuworld. A typical primitive polynomial is given by p(x) = xm + x + 1..com An irreducible polynomial p(x) of degree ‘m’ is said to be primitive if the smallest integer ‘n’ for which p(x) divides xn +1 is n = 2m −1.. b2 . These codes possess a considerable amount of structure which can be exploited.. it cannot correct the error. 0. If there is a single error in bit 3: (0. .www.. Ex..32) where (xk−1 . bk ). Let the information bit word be: (b1 . and all even numbered error patterns are not detectable. then parity check bit: p = b1 + b2 + . an overall single parity check bit is appended to ’k’ information bits. making the overall codeword: C = (b1 . 1. The generator polynomial of an (n.. A cyclic code can be generated by using a generator polynomial g(p) of degree (n-k).. 1. . 0.33) (7. 0. 0. . We would see an application of such codes in Reed-Solomon codes.. However.jntuworld. Thus the overall codeword is (0.. A specific type of code which obeys both the cyclic property as well as polynomial operation is cyclic codes. x0 ) represents the k information bits. Examples of Block Codes (a) Single Parity Check Code: In single parity check codes (example: ASCII code)... b2 .. All error patterns that change an odd number of bits are detectable.. 1. .

errors in bit 3 and 5: (0. for any (n.. In this case. we get • pc = P0 . 1. 1. 1. there are j errors and p is the bit error probability. say.. then it can be easily checked by the receiver that now there are odd number of 1’s in the codeword and hence there is an error. otherwise n = n). we can write pc + pe + pf = 1. for a (5. 0. 1. 1). Now if an error occurs in the second bit of the second codeword. pe is the probability that the decoder gives incorrect codeword C = C. pc = P0 . 0. Thus the following codewords are transmitted: C1 = [1 0 1 0] C2 = [0 0 1 1] C3 = [1 1 0 0] C4 = [0 1 0 1]. + Pn (n = n if n is even. 1. the received codewords at the receiver would then be C1 = [1 0 1 0] 148 www.jntuworld.com .3) single parity check codeword can be formed with even parity. 1. 0) are to be transmitted. On the other hand. 1). 0. let pc be the probability that the decoder gives correct codeword C. and pf = P1 + P3 + P5 . 0. then the probability of obtaining j errors in this codeword is Pj = n Cj pj (1 − p)n−j . • pf = P1 + P3 + . 1. 0. 1. • pe = P2 + P4 + . if there are two errors. As an example. pe = P2 + P4 . + Pn (n = n − 1 if n is even. After forming three codewords. 0.. Using this formula. These 9 bits can be divided into groups of three information bits and (4. (b) Product Codes: Product codes are a class of linear block codes which provide error detection capability using product of two block codes.jntuworld. those can be appended with a vertical parity bit which will form the fourth codeword.com 1. 1. n − 1) single parity check block code. If in an n-bit codeword.4) single parity check block code. then error will not be detected. and pf is the probability that the decoder fails to give a codeword. Consider that nine information bits (1. otherwise n = n − 1). After decoding a received codeword.. 0. 0. 1.www.

1 occurs a higher number of times than 0. (d) Hamming Codes: A binary Hamming code has the property that (n. 9) product code.jntuworld. no error. For such a (3.35) where k is the number of information bits used to form a n bit codeword.e. • For input bit 0.e. • If the received codeword is (0 0 0). Thus the bit can be corrected. pc = P0 + P1 . At the receiver.1) binary repetition code. (c) Repetition Codes: In a (n. k1 ) & (n2 .www.com . • If the received codeword is (0 0 1) or (0 1 0) or (1 0 0). • Similarly. Ex 3: Consider a (3. the codeword is (0 0 0) and for input bit 1. Accordingly. if the received codeword is (1 1 1). and m is any positive integer.com C2 = [0 1 1 1] ← C3 = [1 1 0 0] C4 = [0 1 0 1] ↑ and these would indicate the corresponding row and column position of the erroneous bit with vertical and horizontal parity check. it is decoded as 1.1) repetition code. the majority decoding principle is used to obtain the information bit. In general. • If the received codeword is (0 1 1) or (1 1 0) or (1 0 1). k) = (2m − 1. if in a group of n received bit. a product code can be formed as (n1 . Thus. no error. k2 ) → (n1 n2 . i. 3) codeword and concatenating them we get a (16. it is decoded as 0. The number of parity symbols are n − k = m. then error is detected and it is decoded as 0 with majority decoding principle. the information bit is decoded as 1. a 149 www. the codeword is (1 1 1). 3) codeword and a vertical (4. Such majority scheme works properly only if the noise affects less than n/2 number of bits. 2m − 1 − m) (7. i.jntuworld. and pf = 0. Here we get a horizontal (4. once again error is detected and it is decoded as 1 with majority decoding principle. pe = P2 + P3 . k1 k2 ).1) repetition code each information bit is repeated n times (n should be odd) and transmitted.

.www.. 3. v5 . With three parity bits we can correct exactly 1 error. the syndrome vector is equal to zero.. i4 . p3 ]. i2 . The parity bits may follow such a modulo 2 arithmetic: p1 = i1 + i2 + i3 . p2 = i2 + i3 + i4 . there is an error vector e which can be obtained from a syndrome table and finally the required codeword is taken as C = V + e. 150 www. p1 . Ex 4: Consider a (7. v6 . This is quite a useful code in communication which is illustrated via the following example. The transmitted codeword is then C = [i1 .. which is same as. p2 . We define a syndrome vector S as S = [S1 S2 S3 ] S1 = v1 + v2 + v3 + v5 S2 = v2 + v3 + v4 + v6 S3 = v1 + v2 + v4 + v7 It is obvious that in case of no error.com codeword is represented by C = [i1 . Syndrome Decoding: For this Hamming code.in . In a nutshell. Calculate S from decoder input V.jntuworld.. let the received codeword be V = [v1 . Corresponding to this syndrome vector. v4 . p1 . This implies S = [0 0 0]. p1 + i1 + i2 + i3 = 0 p2 + i2 + i3 + i4 = 0 p3 + i1 + i3 + i4 = 0. .. to obtain the required codeword. v2 . A few cases are given below to illustrate the syndrome decoding. Let C = [0 1 1 1 0 1 0] and V = [0 1 1 1 0 1 0]..com . 2. obtain e corresponding to S. 4) Hamming code. v7 ]. From syndrome table.jntuworld.. Thus. . we perform the following steps: 1. . and it corresponds to e = [0 0 0 0 0 0 0]. 1.. C = V + e = [0 1 1 1 0 1 0]. The required codeword is then C = V + e. .. p3 = i1 + i3 + i4 . pn−k ]..

This means S = [0 1 1]. It’s coding system is based on groups of bits.jntuworld. Therefore a (7. This will be corrected by performing the operation C = V + e.www. Minimum distance dmin = 2e + 1. So each of the 64 field elements is represented by a 6 bit symbol. For this case. thus making maximum likelihood decoding possible. and can be extended to 2m or 2m + 1. known for their multiple error correcting ability. However. let C = [0 1 0 1 1 0 0] and V = [0 0 1 1 1 0 1] (two errors at second and third bits). Binary BCH codes can be generalized to create classes of non binary codes which use m bits per code symbol. the RS code is used with m = 6. 3.). Number of parity symbols that must be used to correct e errors is n − k = 2e. For US-CDPD. digital TV. we get the primitive polynomial as p(x) = x6 + x + 1. The 6 bit representation of the finite field elements is given in Table 7. Let C = [1 1 0 0 0 1 0] and V = [1 1 0 1 0 1 0]. and the ease of encoding and decoding. Every codeword lies within distance three of any codeword. to follow linearity property there should be 151 www.12) codes with a minimum distance of seven and a error correction capability of three bits. C = V . from which we get e = [0 0 0 1 0 0 0] which means a single bit error is there in the received bit v4 . high speed modems.4) Hamming code can correct only single bit error. rather than individual 0 and 1. wireless communications. e = [0 0 0 0 0 0 0]. and it achieves the largest possible dmin of any linear code. The table elements continue up to α62 . This feature makes it particularly good at dealing with burst of errors: six consecutive bit errors. It’s block length is n = 2m − 1 for m ≥ 3 and number of errors that they can correct is bounded by t < (2m − 1)/2. Block length of these codes is n = 2m − 1.1. (e) Golay Codes: Golay codes are linear binary (23. Typical application areas are storage devices (CD. Another interesting case is. and C = V + e implies the double error cannot be corrected. However. DVD etc. Equating p(x) to 0 implies x6 = x + 1. such as bytes.jntuworld. This is a special.com .com 2. one of a kind code in that this is the only nontrivial example of a perfect code. (f) BCH Codes: BCH code is one of the most powerful known class of linear cyclic block codes. This makes S = [0 0 0] and as a result. (g) Reed Solomon (RS) Codes: Reed-Solomon code is an important subset of the BCH codes with a wide range of applications in digital communication and data storage.

On the decoder side one has to find a specific r(x) = p(x) or vice-versa. Codeword polynomial: c(x) = d(x) + p(x). . . hence α63 is assigned zero. Since this kind of codes are cyclic codes. . Shift register contains ’N’ k-bit stages 152 www. .www. α4 0 0 0 . 0 . + C2t x2t ... it is mainly done using syndrome calculation. . Parity polynomial: p(x) = C2t−1 x2t−1 + .. 0 .jntuworld.com Table 7.com . α1 0 0 0 .3 Convolutional Codes A continuous sequence of information bits is mapped into a continuous sequence of encoder output bits.4. 7. . so a generating polynomial is used instead. but due to its complexity. Since generating an information polynomial is difficult.. . 1 .jntuworld. . The details of such a syndrome calculation can be found in [1]. α2 0 1 0 .. we take a generating polynomial g(x) such that d(x) = g(x)q(x) + r(x) where q(x) is the quotient polynomial and r(x) is the remainder polynomial. + C0 . a zero codeword.1: Finite field elements for US-CDPD α5 1 α1 α2 . . α0 1 0 0 . 1 . α6 = α + 1 . 0 0 0 . . If we assign a parity polynomial p(x) = r(x). A convolutional code is generated by passing the information sequence through a finite state shift register. . The codeword polynomial would then be given as: c(x) = g(x)q(x) + r(x) = p(x).. Information polynomial is then the multiple of generating polynomial. 0 . . 0 . then the codeword polynomial c(x) = g(x)p(x) and the entire process becomes easier. The encoding part of the RS polynomial is done as follows: Information polynomial: d(x) = Cn−1 xn−1 + Cn−2 xn−2 + . α3 0 0 1 . . . This process is given below.

encoding operation starts. . and m linear algebraic function generators based on the generator polynomials. . Convolution codes may be represented in various ways as given below. for an input message sequence of 01011 .6: A convolutional encoder with n=2 and k=1. k-bits at a time. The path information between the states.com . Number of output bits for each k-bit user input data sequence is n bits. a state diagram can be used to represent the encoding process.jntuworld. so the code rate Rc = k/n.com Figure 7. It is easy to verify that encoded sequence is 00 11 10 00 01 .. .7: State diagram representation of a convolutional encoder. The shift register of the encoder is initialized to all-zero-state before Figure 7. Input data is shifted into and along the shift register. represents input information bit ’b’ and the corresponding 153 www. denoted as b/c1 c2 .www. . The state diagram is simply a graph of the possible states of the encoder and the possible transitions from one state to another.jntuworld. State Diagram: Since the output of the encoder is determined by the input and the current state of the encoder.

9: Trellis diagram of a convolutional encoder.jntuworld. Tree Diagram: The tree diagram shows the structure of the encoder in the form of a tree with the branches representing the various states and the outputs of the coder. 154 www.jntuworld. 01). 00. it is not difficult to verify from the state diagram that an input information sequence b = (1011) generates an encoded sequence c = (11. The encoded bits are labeled on the branches of the tree. 10. As an example. Given an input sequence. output bits (c1 c2 ). Figure 7.com Figure 7. the encoded sequence can be directly read from the tree. 01). 00.www.com . Again.8: Tree diagram representation of a convolutional encoder. an input sequence (1011) results in the encoded sequence (11. 10.

jntuworld. 7. Trellis Diagram: Tree reveals that the structure repeats itself once the number of stages is greater than the constraint length. turbo code. Figure 7.com .com Figure 7. It is observed that all branches emanating from two nodes having the same state are identical in the sense that they generate identical output sequences. Turbo Codes: A turbo encoder is built using two identical convolutional codes of special type with parallel concatenation.jntuworld. An interleaver separates the two component encoders.www. By doing this throughout the tree diagram. namely.4. as the systematic output from the other component encoder is only a permuted version of the chosen systematic output. The interleaver is a device that permutes the data sequence in some predetermined manner. An individual encoder is termed a component encoder.4 Concatenated Codes Concatenated codes are basically concatenation of block and convolutional codes. The first encoder outputs the systematic V0 and recursive convolutional V1 sequences while the second encoder discards its systematic sequence and only outputs the recursive convolutional V2 sequence. Depending on the number of input bits to a component encoder it 155 www. Only one of the systematic outputs from the two component encoders is used to form a codeword.10: Block diagram of a turbo encoder.10 shows the block diagram of a turbo encoder using two identical encoders. It can be of two types: serial and parallel codes. we discuss a popular parallel concatenated code. This means that the two nodes having the same label can be merged. we obtain another diagram called a Trellis Diagram which is more compact representation. Below.

Larimore. Singapore: Pearson Education. R. Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice. 156 www. MIMO equalization. 2001. Johnson (Jr.. C. The effectiveness of the discussed topics would be more clear in the next chapter in the context of different multiple access techniques. Encoders are also categorized as systematic or non-systematic. S. nevertheless. T. the discussed topics in this chapter are the basic building blocks for all such techniques and that stems the necessity for all these discussions. Theory and Design of Adaptive Filters. New Delhi: PHI.com may be binary or m-binary encoder. NY: Oxford University Press. 2.) and M. 7. Rappaport. space-time block coding scheme. 7. BLAST architectures etc. S.com . J. Gravano. Introduction to Error Control Codes.www. 2002. If the component encoders are not identical then it is called an asymmetric turbo code. R. 2002. have taken place in modern wireless communication.5 Conclusion Although a lot of advanced powerful techniques for mitigating the fading effects such as space diversity in MIMO systems.6 References 1.jntuworld.jntuworld. 2nd ed. G. Inc. Treichler. 3.

The main aim in the cellular system design is to be able to increase the capacity of the channel i.jntuworld. A cellular system divides any given area into cells where a mobile unit in each cell communicates with a base station.jntuworld. 8. to handle as many calls as possible in a given bandwidth with a sufficient level of quality of service. so the sharing is required to increase the capacity of cell or over a geographical area by allowing the available bandwidth to be used at the same time by different users. And this must be done in a way such that the quality of service doesn’t degrade within the existing users.1 Multiple Access Techniques for Wireless Communication In wireless communication systems it is often desirable to allow the subscriber to send simultaneously information to the base station while receiving information from the base station. As the spectrum is limited.com Chapter 8 Multiple Access Techniques Multiple access techniques are used to allow a large number of mobile users to share the allocated spectrum in the most efficient manner. There are several different ways to allow access to the channel. These includes mainly the following: 1) Frequency division multiple-access (FDMA) 2) Time division multiple-access (TDMA) 3) Code division multiple-access (CDMA) 157 www.e.com .www.

Narrowband Spread Spectrum (IS-95): FDMA/FDD TDMA/FDD TDMA/FDD TDMA/FDD FDMA/TDD FDMA/TDD CDMA/FDD 4) Space Division Multiple access (SDMA) FDMA.1. In narrow band FDMA. 8.jntuworld. there generally are a large number of channels allocated using either FDD or TDD. each channel is shared using TDMA. 8. thus separating a small number of users in time on a single channel.1: MA techniques in different wireless communication systems Advanced Mobile Phone Systems: Global System for Mobile: U. The channels are operated using FDD. multipath fading doesnt greatly affect the received signal within a wideband channel. a user is assigned a particular channel which is not shared by other users in the vicinity and if FDD is used then the system is called FDMA/FDD. The available spectrum is divided in to a large number of narrowband channels. For narrow band TDMA. Thus.S.com .1.www. Depending on how the available bandwidth is allocated to the users these techniques can be classified as narrowband and wideband systems. Such systems are called TDMA/FDD and TDMA/TDD access systems.jntuworld. Narrow band TDMA allows users to use the same channel but allocated a unique time slot to each user on the channel.S. and frequency selective fades occur only in a small fraction of the signal bandwidth 158 www. Digital Cellular: Japanese Digital Cellular: CT2 Cordless Telephone: Digital European Cordless Telephone: U.TDMA and CDMA are the three major multiple access techniques that are used to share the available bandwidth in a wireless communication system.2 Wideband Systems In wideband systems. the transmission bandwidth of a single channel is much larger than the coherence bandwidth of the channel.1 Narrowband Systems The term narrowband is used to relate the bandwidth of the single channel to the expected coherence bandwidth of the channel.com Table 8.

After the assignment of the voice channel the BS and the MS transmit simultaneously and continuously. FDMA is usually 159 www.2 Frequency Division Multiple Access This was the initial multiple-access technique for cellular systems in which each individual user is assigned a pair of frequencies while making or receiving a call as shown in Figure 8.www. then it sits idle and it cannot be used by other users to increase share capacity.com Figure 8. That allocated frequency pair is not used in the same cell or adjacent cells during the call so as to reduce the co channel interference. This is called frequency division duplexing (FDD).com . The FDMA channel carries only one If an FDMA channel is not in use.1.1: The basic concept of FDMA. The features of FDMA are as follows: phone circuit at a time. The bandwidths of FDMA systems are generally narrow i. Different users can use the same frequency in the same cell except that they must transmit at different times.jntuworld. the spectrum cannot be reassigned as long as a call is in place.e. Even though the user may not be talking. One frequency is used for downlink and one pair for uplink.jntuworld. 8.

FDMA systems offer different kinds of solutions to near-far challenge. analog narrowband frequency modulation (NBFM) is used to modulate the carrier. the handset scans the available channels and locks on to an unoccupied channel for the duration of the call. FDMA and TDMA systems are less vulnerable.jntuworld.com implemented in a narrow band system The symbol time is large compared to the average delay spread. Voice signals are sent on the forward channel from the base station to the mobile unit. the worst case to consider is recovery of a weak signal in a frequency slot next to strong signal.2.2 FDMA/TDD in CT2 Using FDMA. In contrast. the gain is set according to the level of the stronger signal. 8. analog cellular system. In the initial call setup. AMPS (Advanced Mobile Phone System) is based on FDMA/FDD. 8. Here.3 FDMA and Near-Far Problem The near-far problem is one of detecting or filtering out a weaker signal amongst stronger signals. FDMA requires tight filtering to minimize the 8. In AMPS. and on the reverse channel from the mobile unit to the base station. the weak signal could be lost in the 160 www. the call is split into time blocks that alternate between transmitting and receiving.S. Multiple or simultaneous users are accommodated in AMPS by giving each user a unique signal.jntuworld.com . Since both signals are present simultaneously as a composite at the input of a gain stage. Using TDD(Time Division Duplexing ).2. The complexity of the FDMA mobile systems is lower than that of TDMA mobile systems. When a call is completed or when a handoff occurs the channel is vacated so that another mobile subscriber may use it. adjacent channel interference.www. and the single channel is actually two simplex channels which are frequency duplexed with a 45 MHz split.2. CT2 system splits the available bandwidth into radio channels in the assigned frequency domain. The near-far problem is particularly difficult in CDMA systems where transmitters share transmission frequencies and transmission time. A single user occupies a single channel while the call is in progress.1 FDMA/FDD in AMPS The first U.

TDMA uses different time slots for transmission and reception. then sends it down a channel with two other streams of user data. TDMA is a complimentary access technique to FDMA. The features of TDMA includes the following: TDMA shares a single carrier frequency with several users where each users makes use of non overlapping time slots. Because of a discontinuous transmission in TDMA the handoff process is much simpler for a subscriber unit. as shown in Figure 8. since it is able to listen to other base stations during idle time slots. TDMA has an advantage that is possible to allocate different numbers of time slots per frame to different users. The number of time slots per frame depends on several factors such as modulation technique. TDMA uses different time slots for transmission and reception thus duplexers are not required. GSM is widely used in Europe and other parts of the world. Data transmission in TDMA is not continuous but occurs in bursts. In such cases.www.3 Time Division Multiple Access In digital systems.com noise floor. continuous transmission is not required because users do not use the allotted bandwidth all the time. the entire bandwidth is available to the user but only for a finite period of time. 8. inter channel interference is almost negligible.jntuworld. TDMA requires careful time synchronization since users share the bandwidth in the frequency domain.2. GSM digitizes and compresses data. In most cases the available bandwidth is divided into fewer channels compared to FDMA and the users are allotted time slots during which they have the entire channel bandwidth at their disposal.jntuworld. This type of duplexing is referred to as Time division duplexing(TDD). available bandwidth etc. In TDMA. This results in low battery consumption since the subscriber transmitter can be turned OFF when not in use. Global Systems for Mobile communications (GSM) uses the TDMA technique. Even if subsequent stages have a low enough noise floor to provide 8.1 TDMA/FDD in GSM As discussed earlier. each in its 161 www.3. Thus bandwidth can be supplied on demand to different users by concatenating or reassigning time slot based on priority. GSM uses a variation of TDMA along with FDD.com . The number of channels are less.

Since many GSM network operators have roaming agreements with foreign operators. users can often continue to use their mobile phones when they travel to other countries. DECT provides 10 FDM channels in the band 1880-1990 Mhz.3.com Figure 8.jntuworld. It operates at either the 900 MHz or 1800 MHz frequency band.jntuworld.www.com . own time slot. 162 www. users can roam over from cell to cell as long as they remain within the range of the system. 8.2: The basic concept of TDMA.2 TDMA/TDD in DECT DECT is a pan European standard for the digitally enhanced cordless telephony using TDMA/TDD. DECT supports handover. DECT antenna can be equipped with optional spatial diversity to deal with multipath fading. Each channel supports 12 users through TDMA for a total system load of 120 users.

the same bandwidth is occupied by all the users.4. which differentiates them from each other (shown in Figure 8. A pseudo noise (PN) sequence converts a narrowband signal to a wideband noise like signal before transmission. SSMA is not very bandwidth efficient when used by a single user.com . two problems in such systems which are discussed in the sequel.www. 163 www. The digital data is broken into uniform sized bursts which is then transmitted on different carrier frequencies. There are.jntuworld.1 Frequency Hopped Multiple Access (FHMA) This is a digital multiple access system in which the carrier frequencies of the individual users are varied in a pseudo random fashion within a wideband channel.com 8.jntuworld.4. Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DS-SS) This is the most commonly used technology for CDMA. There are two main types of spread spectrum multiple access techniques: Frequency hopped multiple access (FHMA) Direct sequence multiple access (DSMA) or Code division multiple access (CDMA). the receiver must know the codeword used by the transmitter. However since many users can share the same spread spectrum bandwidth without interfering with one another. the message signal is multiplied by a Pseudo Random Noise Code.3). CDMA utilize a spread spectrum technique in which a spreading signal (which is uncorrelated to the signal and has a large bandwidth) is used to spread the narrow band message signal. Each user is given his own codeword which is orthogonal to the codes of other users and in order to detect the user. 8. spread spectrum systems become bandwidth efficient in a multiple user environment. however they are all assigned separate codes. In DS-SS.4 Spread Spectrum Multiple Access Spread spectrum multiple access (SSMA) uses signals which have a transmission bandwidth whose magnitude is greater than the minimum required RF bandwidth. however. 8.2 Code Division Multiple Access In CDMA.

it usually combines 64 Walsh-Hadamard codes and a m-sequence. the bit rate is 1.jntuworld. For each channel.com Figure 8. In such a system. Hence in despreading a given user’s waveform. there are a total of 20 channels and 798 users per channel. orthogonality of the received signals can be preserved. wherein for reasonable time or frequency guardbands.3 CDMA and Self-interference Problem In CDMA. nonzero contributions to that user’s signal arise from the transmissions of the other users in the network. respectively. 164 www. self-interference arises from the presence of delayed replicas of signal due to multipath. For orthogonality.www. the frequency range is: 869-894 MHz (for Rx) and 824-849 MHz (for Tx). CDMA/FDD in IS-95 In this standard. as by design they are orthogonal only at zero phase offset.jntuworld. This is distinct from both TDMA and FDMA.3: The basic concept of CDMA.com . 8.2288 Mbps.4. The delays cause the spreading sequences of the different users to lose their orthogonality.

due to different time sifts).4 CDMA and Near-Far Problem The near-far problem is a serious one in CDMA. Time and Code Division Multiple Access (TCDMA): In this TCDMA method different cells are allocated different spreading codes. In TDMA and FDMA. only one user per cell is allotted a particular time slot. Thus at any 165 www. One of the advantages using this technique is they avoid near-far effect. Hybrid FDMA/CDMA (FCDMA): An alternative to the CDMA technique in which the available wideband spectrum is divided into a smaller number of sub spectra with smaller bandwidths. However. The capacity of this hybrid FCDMA technique is given by the sum of the capacities of a system operating in the sub spectra.g. leads to substantial interference. Hybrid Direct Sequence/Frequency Hopped Multiple Access Techniques (DS/FHMA): A direct sequence modulated signal whose center frequency is made to hop periodically in a pseudo random fashion is used in this technique.jntuworld. frequency hopped CDMA systems are not adaptable to the soft handoff process since it is difficult to synchronize the frequency hopped base station receiver to the multiple hopped signals. this is not a problem since mutual interference can be filtered. CDMA and SSMA result in hybrid spread spectrum techniques that provide certain advantages.com . In each cell.www. In CDMA.com 8. however.jntuworld. This problem arises from the fact that signals closer to the receiver of interest are received with smaller attenuation than are signals located further away.4. Therefore the strong signal from the nearby transmitter will mask the weak signal from the remote transmitter. These hybrid techniques are explained below. The smaller sub channels become narrow band CDMA systems with processing gain lower than the original CDMA system.5 Hybrid Spread Spectrum Techniques The hybrid combinations of FHMA. the near-far effect combined with imperfect orthogonality between codes (e. Accurate and fast power control appears essential to ensure reliable operation of multiuser DS-CDMA systems.4. In this scheme the required bandwidth need not be contiguous and different user can be allotted different sub spectrum bandwidths depending on their requirements. 8.

A more advanced approach can further increase the capacity of the network.www. A primitive form of SDMA is when the same frequency is reused in different cells in a cellular wireless network. we have mainly discussed the fixed assignment type of MA techniques. The radiated power of each user is controlled by Space division multiple access. This technique would enable frequency re-use within the cell. thus avoiding a severe fade or erasure event on a particular channel.5 Space Division Multiple Access SDMA utilizes the spatial separation of the users in order to optimize the use of the frequency spectrum. In a practical cellular environment it is improbable to have just one transmitter fall within the receiver beam width. however.6 Conclusion In this chapter. in which case TDMA or CDMA is employed. Time Division Frequency Hopping (TDFH): This technique has been adopted for the GSM standard.com time only one user is transmitting in each cell. When a handoff takes place the spreading code of that user is changed to the code of the new cell. 8. When different areas are covered by the antenna beam. The subscriber can hop to a new frequency at the start of a new TDMA frame. intensionally not covered the reservation-based MA schemes such as packet reservation MA or polling 166 www. namely. where the hopping sequence is predefined and the subscriber is allowed to hop only on certain frequencies which are assigned to a cell. This technique has the advantage in severe multipath or when severe channel interference occurs. frequency can be re-used. However for limited co-channel interference it is required that the cells be sufficiently separated.jntuworld.com . TDMA and CDMA. This limits the number of cells a region can be divided into and hence limits the frequency re-use factor. 8. TCDMA also avoids near-far effect as the number of users transmitting per cell is one.jntuworld. FDMA. SDMA serves different users by using spot beam antenna. We have. Therefore it becomes imperative to use other multiple access techniques in conjunction with SDMA. These areas may be served by the same frequency or different frequencies. for different frequencies FDMA can be used.

com or token passing etc. K. 2nd ed. R. 4. NJ: Prentice Hall. 4th ed. 2.com .7 References 1. 2000. T. 1995. The main idea to discuss only the basic MA techniques has been to grow up a fair idea about the resource sharing in a wireless media when there are many users. 2002. 167 www.www. McGillem. NY: McGraw Hill. Cooper and C. Digital Communications. S. Inc. Modern Communications and Spread Spectrum. G. Rappaport. Upper Saddle River.jntuworld.jntuworld. J. keeping the QoS view point in mind. Feher. NY: McGraw Hill. 1986. D. Singapore: Pearson Education. 8.. G. The readers are encouraged to go through the advanced topics once they finish reading the discussed 8 chapters in this lecture notes. Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice. Proakis. 3. Wireless Digital Communications: Modulation and Spread Spectrum Applications.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful